Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
580 Pages

advertisement

Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Self-propelled High-Performance

Mower-Conditioner

BiG M 420

(from serial no.: 932 743)

Order no.: 150 000 130 06 en

25.04.2016

Table of Contents

CV0

We

EC Declaration of Conformity

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, D-48480 Spelle hereby declare as manufacturer of the product named below, on our sole responsibility, that the

Machine: Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner

Type: BiG M 420 CV, BiG M 420 CRI to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the following relevant provisions of:

• EC Directive 2006/42/EC (machines),

• EU Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC).

Within the meaning of the Directive the harmonised standard EN ISO 14982:2009 was taken as a basis.

The signing Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.

Spelle, 20.04.2016

Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann

(Managing Director, Design & Development)

Year of manufacture: Machine no.:

2

Pos: 3 /Layout Modul e /Inhaltsverzei chnis @ 0\mod_1196861555655_78.docx @ 15165 @ 1 @ 1

Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 3

2 To this Document ................................................................................................................................. 14

2.1

Validity .............................................................................................................................................. 14

2.2

Re-Ordering ...................................................................................................................................... 14

2.3

Information on Direction ................................................................................................................... 14

2.4

Representation and Utilization of Warning Notes ............................................................................ 14

2.5

Identification of the hazard warnings................................................................................................ 14

3 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 15

3.1

Intended use ..................................................................................................................................... 15

3.2

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ...................................................................................................... 15

3.2.1

Personnel Qualification and Training ........................................................................................ 16

3.2.2

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................................ 16

3.2.3

Safety-conscious work practices ............................................................................................... 16

3.3

Safety and Accident Prevention Regulations ................................................................................... 17

3.4

Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel ............................................................................ 18

3.5

Self-propelled working machine ....................................................................................................... 18

3.6

Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................... 19

3.7

Implements ....................................................................................................................................... 20

3.8

Hydraulic system .............................................................................................................................. 20

3.9

Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 21

3.10

Cooling system ................................................................................................................................. 21

3.11

Tyres................................................................................................................................................. 21

3.12

Emergency exit ................................................................................................................................. 21

3.13

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines .......................................................................... 22

3.14

Fire preventions ................................................................................................................................ 22

3.15

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 23

3.16

Telephone and radio sets ................................................................................................................. 23

3.16.1

Wheel chocks ............................................................................................................................ 23

3.16.2

Main battery switch ................................................................................................................... 24

4 Machine Description ............................................................................................................................ 25

4.1

Variants for Machine Equipment ...................................................................................................... 25

4.2

Machine overview ............................................................................................................................. 25

4.3

Identification Plate ............................................................................................................................ 26

4.4

Information Required for Questions and Orders .............................................................................. 26

4.4.1

Contact ...................................................................................................................................... 26

5 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 27

5.1

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 27

5.2

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine ................................................................ 28

5.2.1

Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ............................................................................................. 28

5.2.2

Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................ 30

5.2.3

Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................... 32

5.2.4

Front mowing unit ...................................................................................................................... 34

6 Technical Data of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 36

6.1

Technical data .................................................................................................................................. 36

6.1.1

Technical Data Air Conditioning System................................................................................... 38

6.1.2

Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ................................................................................... 38

3

Table of Contents

6.2

Technical Data of Electrical System ................................................................................................. 38

6.3

Consumables ................................................................................................................................... 39

6.4

Lubricants ......................................................................................................................................... 39

6.4.1

Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2 ............................................................................... 40

7 Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... 41

7.1

Ladder to driver's cabin .................................................................................................................... 41

7.2

Opening the cabin door .................................................................................................................... 42

7.3

Operators controls ............................................................................................................................ 43

7.3.1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 43

7.4

Air comfort seat ................................................................................................................................ 44

7.4.1

Setting the left armrest .............................................................................................................. 46

7.4.2

Right armrest ............................................................................................................................. 46

7.4.3

Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions............................................................................. 47

7.5

Guide's seat...................................................................................................................................... 48

7.5.1

Cooler ........................................................................................................................................ 48

7.5.2

Emergency Exit ......................................................................................................................... 49

7.5.3

OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug) .................................................................................... 49

7.6

Steering Column and Foot Pedals ................................................................................................... 50

7.6.1

Steering Column Adjustment .................................................................................................... 51

7.6.2

Horn........................................................................................................................................... 52

7.6.3

Flashing Light Switch ................................................................................................................ 52

7.6.4

Full Beam .................................................................................................................................. 53

7.6.5

Headlamp Flasher ..................................................................................................................... 53

7.6.6

Using the operating brake ......................................................................................................... 54

7.7

Switch Group Roof Panel ................................................................................................................. 55

7.8

Lighting ............................................................................................................................................. 56

7.8.1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 56

7.8.2

Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ..................................................................... 57

7.8.2.1

Switching on the indicator .................................................................................................. 57

7.8.2.2

7.8.2.3

Brake light .......................................................................................................................... 57

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ........................................................................... 57

7.8.3

Side light/dipped beam.............................................................................................................. 58

7.8.3.1

Switching on the parking light ............................................................................................ 58

7.8.3.2

Switching on the dipped beam ........................................................................................... 58

7.8.4

Working floodlights .................................................................................................................... 59

7.8.4.1

7.8.4.2

Working floodlights Cab ..................................................................................................... 60

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................................................................................... 60

7.8.4.3

Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units" ............................. 61

7.8.4.4

Working floodlight rear ....................................................................................................... 61

7.8.5

Allround lights (optional)............................................................................................................ 62

7.8.6

Interior Lighting / Spotlight ........................................................................................................ 63

7.8.7

Additional Spotlight ................................................................................................................... 64

7.9

Outside mirrors ................................................................................................................................. 65

7.9.1

Left Outside Mirror .................................................................................................................... 65

7.9.2

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ............................................................................ 66

7.9.2.1

7.9.2.2

Setting the right outside mirror ........................................................................................... 66

Setting the anti-collision mirror .......................................................................................... 66

7.10

Inside mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 67

7.11

Sun blind .......................................................................................................................................... 67

4

Table of Contents

7.12

Windshield wipers ............................................................................................................................ 68

7.13

Washer system – windshield ............................................................................................................ 68

7.14

Switch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 69

7.15

Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ...................................................................................................... 70

7.15.1

Actuating release switches ....................................................................................................... 70

7.15.2

Release switch – road/field ....................................................................................................... 71

7.15.3

Autopilot release switch / - optional .......................................................................................... 72

7.15.4

Release switch - holding brake ................................................................................................. 73

7.15.5

Release switch travelling gear .................................................................................................. 74

7.15.6

Axle separation key ................................................................................................................... 75

7.15.7

Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure ................................................................................................ 76

7.15.8

Charge Indicator Lamp.............................................................................................................. 76

7.15.9

Cooling Water Temperature Warning Light .............................................................................. 76

7.15.10

Ignition lock ............................................................................................................................... 77

7.15.11

Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket ................................................................................................... 78

7.16

Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) .......................................................................................................... 78

7.16.1

Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ...................................................................................... 79

7.17

Multi-Function Lever ......................................................................................................................... 80

7.17.1

Multi-Function Lever (Continued) .............................................................................................. 82

7.17.1.1

Driving ................................................................................................................................ 82

7.18

Klimatronik / heating ......................................................................................................................... 83

7.18.1

Control and display elements .................................................................................................... 83

7.18.2

Operation .................................................................................................................................. 85

7.18.3

Switching on the System ........................................................................................................... 85

7.18.4

Setting the Desired Cab Temperature ...................................................................................... 85

7.18.5

Switch air conditioning On / Off ................................................................................................. 86

7.18.6

Switching REHEAT Mode On/Off ............................................................................................. 87

7.18.7

Manual setting of evaporator fan speed .................................................................................... 88

7.18.8

Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit ................................................................. 89

7.18.9

Showing Faults in the Display ................................................................................................... 89

7.19

Adjustable Fan Nozzles ................................................................................................................... 91

7.20

Radio ................................................................................................................................................ 92

8 Info centre "EasyTouch" ..................................................................................................................... 93

8.1.1

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 93

8.2

Information Section .......................................................................................................................... 95

8.2.1

Status line (I) ............................................................................................................................. 96

8.2.2

Motor Data (II) Information Section ........................................................................................... 97

8.2.3

Information section of the travelling gear data (III) ................................................................... 98

8.2.4

Information section of settings (IV and V) ................................................................................. 99

8.2.5

Information Section Drive Information (VI) ................................................................................ 99

8.3

Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........................................................................................ 100

8.3.1

Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional) .......................................... 100

8.3.2

Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional) 102

8.3.3

Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“ ................................................................................. 104

8.3.4

Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ......................................................... 105

8.3.4.1

8.3.4.2

8.3.4.3

Switching the counter on or off ........................................................................................ 106

Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter ................................................. 107

Exporting Customer Counter ........................................................................................... 108

5

Table of Contents

8.3.4.4

Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters)............................................... 108

8.3.5

Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension" ............................................................................. 109

8.3.5.1

8.3.5.2

From the "Road travel" basic screen ............................................................................... 109

From the "Field mode" basic screen ................................................................................ 110

8.3.6

Quick access "Machine settings" ............................................................................................ 111

8.4

Menu level ...................................................................................................................................... 112

8.4.1

Bringing up a Menu Level ....................................................................................................... 116

8.5

Main menu 1 "Settings" .................................................................................................................. 117

8.6

Menu 1-1 "Parameters" .................................................................................................................. 118

8.6.1

Entering parameters ................................................................................................................ 119

8.7

Menu 1-2 „Machine Setting“ ........................................................................................................... 120

8.7.1

Menu 1-3 "Units" ..................................................................................................................... 125

8.7.2

Menu 1-4 "Language" ............................................................................................................. 126

8.7.3

Menu 1-5 "Display" .................................................................................................................. 127

8.7.4

Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" ............................................................................................................. 128

8.7.5

Menu 1-5-2 Beeper ................................................................................................................. 129

8.7.6

Beeper limited by time ............................................................................................................. 130

8.7.7

Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................ 131

8.7.8

Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ............................................................................................ 132

8.7.9

Menu 1-6 Date/time ................................................................................................................. 133

8.7.10

Menu 1-9 Owner's address ..................................................................................................... 134

8.8

Main Menu 2 Counters ................................................................................................................... 135

8.8.1

Machine Data Counter ............................................................................................................ 135

8.8.1.1

Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3) .......................................................... 136

8.8.2

Switching to Customer DataCounters ..................................................................................... 136

8.9

Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 137

8.9.1

Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" .................................................................................. 138

8.10

Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System ............................................................................ 140

8.10.1

Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor .......................................................................................... 141

8.11

Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically ................................................................................... 142

8.11.1

Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually ................................................................................... 146

8.12

Setting the Steering Radius ........................................................................................................... 147

8.12.1

Menu 3-5 „Manual Mode“ ........................................................................................................ 148

8.12.2

Status display of general sensors (2) ...................................................................................... 151

8.13

Main Menu 4 Service...................................................................................................................... 153

8.13.1

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 154

8.13.2

Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics ........................................................................ 157

8.13.3

Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension ........................................................................... 158

8.13.4

Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation .................................................................... 161

8.13.5

Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height................................................................................ 167

8.13.6

Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional) ................................................... 175

8.13.7

Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional) ............................................................................ 181

8.13.8

Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional) ............................................................... 186

8.13.9

Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System .................................................................................... 191

8.13.10

Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ............................................................................................... 194

8.13.11

Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus ............................................................................................................ 205

8.13.12

Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ................................................................................................... 206

8.13.13

Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ......................................................................................................... 217

8.13.14

Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine .................................................................................................... 218

6

Table of Contents

8.13.15

Menu 4-1-15 Joystick .............................................................................................................. 221

8.13.16

Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console ......................................................................................... 223

8.13.17

Menu 4-1-17 Display ............................................................................................................... 226

8.14

Menu 4-2 Error list .......................................................................................................................... 227

8.15

Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................ 232

8.16

Menu 4-4 Information ..................................................................................................................... 233

8.16.1

Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ................................................................................................................ 234

8.16.2

Menu 4-4-2 Software ............................................................................................................... 235

8.16.3

Menu 4-4-3 Machine ............................................................................................................... 237

8.16.4

Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages ................................................................................. 238

8.17

Menu 5 Basic Screen ..................................................................................................................... 238

8.17.1

Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... 239

8.17.2

Information message ............................................................................................................... 240

9 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 241

9.1

Fitting the guard cloths ................................................................................................................... 241

9.2

Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ............................................................................................... 241

9.2.1

Description of Installation ........................................................................................................ 243

9.2.2

Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive) ............................................................................... 244

9.2.3

Setting the Warning Panels .................................................................................................... 245

9.3

Installation of Cutter Blades ........................................................................................................... 245

9.4

Checking / Setting the Tyre Pressure ............................................................................................ 245

10 Start-up ................................................................................................................................................ 246

10.1

Check before Start-up .................................................................................................................... 246

10.2

Daily checks ................................................................................................................................... 246

10.2.1

On the Basic Machine ............................................................................................................. 247

10.2.2

On the Mowing Units ............................................................................................................... 247

11 Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................ 248

11.1

Transport / Road Travel ................................................................................................................. 248

11.2

Preparation for transport/road travel .............................................................................................. 249

11.2.1

Folding Up the Guards ............................................................................................................ 249

11.2.2

Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option) ............................ 250

11.2.3

Error Message 1414 or 1415 .................................................................................................. 251

11.2.4

Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger ..................................................................... 252

11.2.5

Release switch – road/field ..................................................................................................... 252

11.2.6

Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................ 253

11.3

Starting the engine ......................................................................................................................... 254

11.3.1

Killing the engine ..................................................................................................................... 256

11.3.2

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ............................................................................................ 256

11.4

Starting to Drive .............................................................................................................................. 256

11.4.1

Setting the Acceleration Behaviour ......................................................................................... 257

11.4.2

General on Driving .................................................................................................................. 257

11.4.3

Overheating of Hydrostatic System ........................................................................................ 258

11.4.4

Driving Forwards ..................................................................................................................... 258

11.4.5

Reversing ................................................................................................................................ 259

11.5

Cruise Control ................................................................................................................................ 260

11.5.1

Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode ............................................................................ 260

11.5.2

Activating Cruise Control......................................................................................................... 261

11.5.3

Deactivating Cruise Control .................................................................................................... 261

7

Table of Contents

11.6

Stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 262

11.6.1

Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever ................................................................................... 262

11.6.2

Stopping with Foot Brakes ...................................................................................................... 263

11.7

Parking Brake ................................................................................................................................. 264

11.8

Switching Off the Engine ................................................................................................................ 265

11.9

Switch off the machine ................................................................................................................... 265

11.10

Towing ............................................................................................................................................ 266

11.10.1

Releasing the holding brake manually .................................................................................... 266

12 Operation – Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 267

12.1

Intended use ................................................................................................................................... 267

12.2

Reasonably foreseeable misuse .................................................................................................... 267

12.3

Operation of Mowing Units ............................................................................................................. 268

12.4

Folding Down the Mowing Units ..................................................................................................... 269

12.4.1

Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position ....... 270

12.4.2

Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position 270

12.5

Lowering Mowing Units .................................................................................................................. 271

12.5.1

Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position ............................ 271

12.5.2

Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working Position271

12.5.3

Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position ............................... 272

12.6

Mowing Unit Drive .......................................................................................................................... 273

12.6.1

Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................... 274

12.6.2

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 274

12.6.3

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 275

12.6.4

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front ........................................................... 276

12.6.5

Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................. 277

12.7

Lifting the Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 278

12.7.1

Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position ................................. 278

12.7.2

Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position ... 279

12.7.3

Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position .................................... 280

12.8

Folding up the Mowing Units .......................................................................................................... 281

12.8.1

Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position 282

12.8.2

Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to Transport

Position 282

12.9

Mowing ........................................................................................................................................... 283

12.10

Game animal protection ................................................................................................................. 284

12.10.1

Moving the guards into the working position ........................................................................... 285

12.10.2

Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ..................................................................................... 285

12.10.3

Quick Stop ............................................................................................................................... 286

12.10.4

Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) ................................................................................. 286

12.10.5

Switching On/Off Axle Separation ........................................................................................... 287

12.11

Removing the Ground Flaps .......................................................................................................... 288

12.12

Deactivating the axle suspension ................................................................................................... 289

13 Adjusting the mowing units .............................................................................................................. 290

13.1

Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 290

13.2

Adjusting the cutting height ............................................................................................................ 291

13.2.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 291

13.2.2

Adjusting the Lifting Height ..................................................................................................... 292

8

Table of Contents

13.2.2.1

Front mowing unit ............................................................................................................ 292

13.2.3

Adjusting the cutting height ..................................................................................................... 293

13.2.3.1

Lateral Mowing Unit ......................................................................................................... 293

13.3

Adjusting Skids ............................................................................................................................... 295

13.4

Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............................................................................................. 295

13.4.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 296

13.4.2

Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 297

13.5

Adjusting the Tedder Speed ........................................................................................................... 298

13.5.1

Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 298

13.5.2

Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 299

13.6

Adjusting the conditioner plate ....................................................................................................... 300

13.7

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI) ........................................................... 301

13.7.1

Adjusting the roller distance .................................................................................................... 301

13.7.2

Adjusting the roller pressure ................................................................................................... 302

13.8

Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional).............................................................. 303

13.9

Adjusting the swath width ............................................................................................................... 304

13.9.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 304

13.9.2

Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 305

13.10

Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG M CV ................................................................ 306

13.10.1

Removing Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right ............................................................... 306

13.10.2

Dismounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right ........................................................................ 307

13.10.3

Mounting Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right ................................................................ 308

13.10.4

Mounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right ............................................................................. 309

13.11

Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted Mowers.......................................................... 310

13.12

Deflector Plates .............................................................................................................................. 310

13.12.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 310

14 Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................................................................................................. 311

14.1

Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ................................... 311

14.1.1

Hooking Conditioner Baffle Sheet into Hoist ........................................................................... 312

14.1.2

Releasing the tension jacks .................................................................................................... 312

14.1.3

Removing the tedder deflector plate ....................................................................................... 313

14.1.4

Checking the Tines ................................................................................................................. 313

14.1.5

Removing the guard ................................................................................................................ 314

14.1.6

Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor .................................................................................... 315

14.1.7

Locking the tension jacks ........................................................................................................ 316

14.1.8

Tensioning the V-belt .............................................................................................................. 316

14.1.9

Installing the guard .................................................................................................................. 317

14.1.10

Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics ............................................................................. 317

14.1.11

Relaying the Lubrication Lines ................................................................................................ 318

14.1.12

Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS .......................... 318

14.1.13

Switching on the auger monitoring mode................................................................................ 319

14.1.14

Conversion Auger-type Cross Conveyor to “Conditioner Baffle Sheet Unit” .......................... 320

14.2

Additional Equipment – Mulching Device ....................................................................................... 321

14.3

Removing Mowing Units ................................................................................................................ 322

14.3.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 322

14.3.2

Removing of the compensation springs .................................................................................. 323

14.3.3

To remove the PTO shaft: ....................................................................................................... 324

14.3.4

Remove the Weiste Triangle ................................................................................................... 325

14.3.5

Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 326

9

Table of Contents

14.3.6

Removing the Side Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 327

14.3.7

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .......................................................................................... 332

14.3.8

The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure. .................... 333

15 Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................ 334

15.1.1

Engine Overview ..................................................................................................................... 334

15.2

Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt ...................................................................................... 334

15.3

Maintenance Table – Engine ......................................................................................................... 336

15.4

Contamination in the engine compartment .................................................................................... 338

15.5

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air.............................................................. 338

15.6

Engine oil level ............................................................................................................................... 339

15.6.1

Engine oil and filter replacement ............................................................................................. 339

15.7

Fuel filter/water separator .............................................................................................................. 340

15.7.1

Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter .................................................................................................. 340

15.7.2

Emptying the Water Separator ................................................................................................ 340

15.8

Replacing the fuel filter insert ......................................................................................................... 341

15.8.1

Replacing the filter in the hand pump ..................................................................................... 342

15.9

Replacing Urea Filter Inserts .......................................................................................................... 343

15.10

Fuel................................................................................................................................................. 345

15.10.1

Permissible Fuels .................................................................................................................... 345

15.11

Tanks .............................................................................................................................................. 346

15.12

Tanks of urea solution .................................................................................................................... 347

15.13

Venting the fuel system .................................................................................................................. 349

15.14

Engine Coolant ............................................................................................................................... 349

15.15

Engine coolant – checks and controls ............................................................................................ 350

15.16

Air filter ........................................................................................................................................... 351

15.16.1

Safety cartridge ....................................................................................................................... 352

16 Maintenance – compressed air system ........................................................................................... 353

16.1

Compressed-air reservoir ............................................................................................................... 353

16.1.1

Checking the compressed air reservoir .................................................................................. 353

16.1.2

Checking the drain valve ......................................................................................................... 354

16.1.3

Retighten tensioning belts ....................................................................................................... 354

16.2

Replace Air Dryer ........................................................................................................................... 354

17 Maintenance – Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 355

17.1

Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 355

17.1.1

Test run ................................................................................................................................... 356

17.2

Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................... 356

17.3

Tool box .......................................................................................................................................... 356

17.4

Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ............................................................................................... 357

17.5

Tightening torques .......................................................................................................................... 358

17.6

Tightening torques (countersunk screws) ...................................................................................... 359

17.6.1

Deviating Torque ..................................................................................................................... 359

17.7

Opening the Front Guard ............................................................................................................... 360

17.7.1

Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................. 360

17.7.2

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 361

17.8

Cleaning the Tedder Housing ........................................................................................................ 361

17.9

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor .............................................................................. 362

17.10

Shear pins on the conditioner ........................................................................................................ 363

17.11

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes ..................................................... 364

10

Table of Contents

17.11.1

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes) ......................................................... 364

17.12

Main gearbox .................................................................................................................................. 365

17.12.1

Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 365

17.13

Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 367

17.13.1

Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) .................................................................................................. 367

17.14

Input gearbox ................................................................................................................................. 368

17.14.1

Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) .................................................................................................. 368

17.15

Speed gearbox ............................................................................................................................... 369

17.15.1

Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 369

17.16

Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 370

17.16.1

Bottom part .............................................................................................................................. 370

17.17

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ......................................................................................................... 371

17.18

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 372

17.18.1

Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 372

17.18.2

Aligning the Cutter Bar ............................................................................................................ 372

17.18.3

Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 373

17.18.4

Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 374

17.19

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 375

17.19.1

Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 375

17.19.2

Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 375

17.19.3

Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 376

17.20

Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder .............................................................................. 377

17.20.1

Cutter Blades .......................................................................................................................... 377

17.20.2

Blade screw connection .......................................................................................................... 378

17.20.3

Blade Quick-Fit Device............................................................................................................ 378

17.20.4

Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs................................................................................ 379

17.20.5

Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums ....................................................... 380

17.20.6

Abrasion Limit ......................................................................................................................... 381

17.21

Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .................................................................................................. 382

17.21.1

Blade Screw Connection ......................................................................................................... 383

17.21.2

Blade Quick-Fit Device............................................................................................................ 384

17.22

Replacing the linings ...................................................................................................................... 385

17.23

Rotary hub with shear protection ................................................................................................... 386

17.23.1

After Shearing Off ................................................................................................................... 387

17.23.2

Repairing the Sheared off Bearing Unit .................................................................................. 388

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine ........................................................................................................... 389

18.1

Brakes ............................................................................................................................................ 389

18.2

Hydraulic system ............................................................................................................................ 389

18.3

Maintenance - hydraulic system ..................................................................................................... 392

18.3.1

System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics ............................................................. 392

18.3.2

Pumps ..................................................................................................................................... 392

18.3.3

Main block ............................................................................................................................... 393

18.3.4

Over-Pressure Valves ............................................................................................................. 394

18.3.5

Adjustable Throttles ................................................................................................................ 394

18.4

Hydraulic oil .................................................................................................................................... 396

18.5

Hydraulic oil level ........................................................................................................................... 397

18.6

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ..................................................................................................... 398

18.7

High-pressure filter ......................................................................................................................... 399

18.8

Transfer gearbox ............................................................................................................................ 400

11

Table of Contents

18.9

Air intake and distribution ............................................................................................................... 401

18.9.1

Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter .................................................................................... 402

18.9.2

Circulation filter ....................................................................................................................... 403

18.10

Windscreen washer system ........................................................................................................... 404

18.11

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator ...................................................................... 405

18.12

Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side) .................................................................................. 406

18.13

Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side) ............................................................................... 408

18.13.1

Adjusting the Sensors ............................................................................................................. 410

18.13.1.1

Namur sensor d = 12 mm ................................................................................................ 410

18.13.1.2

Namur Sensor d = 30 mm ................................................................................................ 410

18.14

Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating ....................................................................... 411

18.15

Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 411

18.15.1

Air conditioning components ................................................................................................... 411

18.15.2

Refrigerant .............................................................................................................................. 412

18.15.3

Manometric Switch .................................................................................................................. 412

18.15.4

Collector/drier .......................................................................................................................... 413

18.15.5

Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity .............................................................. 414

18.16

Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment .................................................................. 415

18.17

Belt drives ....................................................................................................................................... 416

18.17.1

Fan wheel drive ....................................................................................................................... 417

18.17.2

Outrigger arms ........................................................................................................................ 418

18.17.3

Drive of mowing unit ................................................................................................................ 420

18.17.4

Cross Conveyor Drive ............................................................................................................. 421

18.17.5

Checking / Tensioning / Replacing Belt on Conditioner Drive ................................................ 422

18.18

Tyres............................................................................................................................................... 423

18.19

Changing the Tyre Size .................................................................................................................. 423

18.19.1

Checking and maintaining tyres .............................................................................................. 424

18.19.2

Wheel mounting ...................................................................................................................... 425

18.19.3

Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger .............................................................. 425

19 Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................................................................................................... 426

19.1

Lubricating the PTO shaft .............................................................................................................. 426

19.2

Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox ........................................................................ 426

19.3

Lubrication Chart ............................................................................................................................ 427

20 Maintenance – electrical system ....................................................................................................... 428

20.1

Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 428

20.1.1

Main battery switch ................................................................................................................. 429

20.1.2

Charging Batteries .................................................................................................................. 430

20.1.3

Quick charge ........................................................................................................................... 430

20.1.4

Cleaning the battery ................................................................................................................ 430

20.1.5

Check battery .......................................................................................................................... 431

20.1.6

Check acid level ...................................................................................................................... 431

20.1.7

Measuring Acid Density .......................................................................................................... 432

20.2

Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ................................................................. 433

20.3

Three-phase generator................................................................................................................... 434

20.4

Starter ............................................................................................................................................. 435

20.5

Control Units and Fuses ................................................................................................................. 436

20.5.1

Electronic-Diesel-Control (EDC) ............................................................................................. 437

20.5.2

Cabin Relay Circuit Board ....................................................................................................... 437

20.5.3

Console Circuit Board ............................................................................................................. 438

12

Table of Contents

20.5.4

Cab Circuit Board .................................................................................................................... 440

20.5.5

Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller (KMC1) ................................................................. 442

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication................................................................................................... 443

21.1

Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 444

21.2

Lubricant filling ............................................................................................................................... 448

21.3

Fill coupling .................................................................................................................................... 448

21.4

Lubricant ......................................................................................................................................... 449

21.5

Checking the fill level...................................................................................................................... 450

21.6

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval ................................................................................ 451

21.7

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 451

22 Placing in Storage .............................................................................................................................. 453

22.1

At the End of the Harvest Season .................................................................................................. 453

22.2

Engine area .................................................................................................................................... 453

22.3

Before the Start of the New Season ............................................................................................... 454

22.4

Friction clutch –ByPy ...................................................................................................................... 455

22.4.1

Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft ......................................................................... 455

23 Disposal of the machine .................................................................................................................... 456

23.1

Disposal of the machine ................................................................................................................. 456

24 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 456

24.1

Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 456

Pos: 4 /Layout Modul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

13

To this Document

Pos: 5 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 1/U-Z/Z u diesem D okument @ 107\mod_1334231929021_78.docx @ 965257 @ 1 @ 1

2

Pos: 6 /BA/Ei nleitung/Gültig keit/Selbsfahr er/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286949685156_78.docx @ 463695 @ 1 @ 1

To this Document

2.1 Validity

The Operating Instructions apply to all Self-Propelled High Performance Mowing Conditioners

BiG M 420.

Pos: 7 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/N/N achbestell ung (N achbestellung di eses D okuments) @ 349\mod_1436355974813_78.docx @ 2625865 @ 2 @ 1

2.2 Re-Ordering

Pos: 8 /BA/Zu di esem D okument/N achbestellung_T ext @ 349\mod_1436355830140_78.docx @ 2625835 @ @ 1

If this document should become wholly or partially unusable, you can request a replacement document by stating the order number mentioned on the cover sheet.

Pos: 9 /BA/Zu di esem D okument/Richtungsangaben_mit Überschrift 2. Ebene @ 311\mod_1418209136965_78.docx @ 2405406 @ 2 @ 1

2.3 Information on Direction

Information on direction in this document such as front, rear, right and left always applies in the direction of travel.

Pos: 10 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Verwendung und Darstell ung von War nhinweisen @ 121\mod_1343375943997_78.docx @ 1100795 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 Representation and Utilization of Warning Notes

Warning of dangers are highlighted in this document as warning notes and they are marked with danger signs and signal words.

The warnings must be read completely and the measurements must be strictly adhered to in order to avoid personal injury.

Pos: 11 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Kennzeichnung der Gefahr enhinweise (2012- 07- 26 15:10:30) @ 28\mod_1250244370070_78.docx @ 274714 @ 2 @ 1

2.5 Identification of the hazard warnings

Danger!

DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Measures for hazard prevention

Warning !

WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.

• Measures for hazard prevention

Caution!

CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Property damage

• Measures for risk prevention.

Pos: 12 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Allgemeine F unktionshinweise - Hinweise @ 120\mod_1343309077606_78.docx @ 1100000 @ @ 1 General function instructions are indicated as follows:

Note!

Note

Effect: Economic advantage of the machine

• Actions to be taken

Instructions which are attached to the machine need to be followed and kept fully legible.

Pos: 13 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

14

Pos: 14 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicher heit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.docx @ 635 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

3 Safety

Pos: 15 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBesti mmungsgemäße Ver wendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

3.1 Intended use

Pos: 16 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebr auch/Selbstfahrer /Besti mmungsgemäß er Gebr auch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 17 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebr auch/Z ur besti mmungsgemäßen Ver wendung g ehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.docx @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 18 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVernüftiger weise vorhersehbare F ehl anwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 19 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebr auch/Selbstfahrer /Vernünftiger weise vor hersehbare Fehlanwendung T 1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 20 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebr auch/Selbstfahrer /Auflistung von F ehlanwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 21 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebr auch/Nicht besti mmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 22 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

15

Safety

Pos: 23.1 /BA/Sicher heit/Personalqualifi kati on und -schul ung @ 0\mod_1195639383185_78.docx @ 1136 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.1 Personnel Qualification and Training

The machine may be used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are familiar with it and have been instructed about the dangers connected with it. The operator must define areas of responsibility and monitoring of personnel. Should personnel lack the required knowledge, they must receive the required training and instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents of these operating instructions have been fully understood by personnel.

Repair work not described in these operating instructions should only be performed by

Pos: 23.2 /BA/Sicher heit/Gefahr en bei Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1195639434013_78.docx @ 1155 @ 3 @ 1 authorised service centres.

3.2.2

Pos: 23.3 /BA/Sicher heit/Sicher heitsbewusstes Ar beiten_T eil1 @ 0\mod_1195639792576_78.docx @ 1174 @ 3 @ 1

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in personal injury and environmental hazards as well as damage to the machine. If the safety instructions are not respected, this could result in the forfeiture of any claims for damages.

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result, for example

, in the following hazards:

• Endangering of persons due to not protected working areas.

• Breakdown of important machine functions

• Failure of prescribed methods for repair and maintenance

• Endangering of persons due to mechanical and chemical effects

• Damage to the environment due to leaking hydraulic oil

3.2.3 Safety-conscious work practices

Pos: 23.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Always observe the safety instructions set out in these operating instructions, all existing accident prevention rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules issued by the operator.

The safety and accident prevention regulations of the responsible professional associations are binding.

The safety instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer should also be observed.

Observe the applicable traffic laws when using public roads.

Be prepared for emergencies. Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within reach. Keep emergency numbers for doctors and fire brigade close to the telephone.

16

Pos: 23.5 /BA/Sicher heit/Sicher heits- und U nfall ver hütungs-Vorschriften für BiG M @ 348\mod_1435816773224_78.docx @ 2620038 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

3.3 Safety and Accident Prevention Regulations

1 Please follow all generally applicable safety and accident prevention regulations in addition to the safety instructions contained in these operating instructions!

2 The attached warning and safety signs provide important information for safe operation. Pay attention to these for your own safety!

3 When using public roads, observe the respective traffic regulations!

4 Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment and controls as well as with their functions before you begin working with the machine. It is too late to learn this when you are using the machine for work!

5 The user should wear close fitting clothes. Avoid wearing loose or baggy clothing.

6 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire!

7 Before starting or moving the machine, make certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the machine! (Watch for children!) Make sure that you have a clear view!

8 Attach implements correctly! Attach and secure implements to specified devices only!

9 When attaching or detaching implements, place the supporting devices in the correct positions!

10 Observe permitted axle loads, total weight and transport dimensions!

11 Check and attach transport equipment, such as lighting, warning devices and any protective equipment!

12 Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, linkage, etc.) for remotely operated devices must be designed in such a way that, in whatever transport and working position, they cannot trigger accidental movements.

13 Ensure that implements are in the prescribed condition for road travel and lock them in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions!

14 Never leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving!

15 Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in direction when travelling uphill and downhill or across a gradient!

16 Hitched implements and ballast weights affect the driving, steering and braking response of the machine. Make sure that you are able to brake and steer the machine as required!

17 Take into account the extension radius and/or inertia of an implement when turning corners!

18 Start up implements only when all safety devices have been attached and set in the required position!

19 Keep safety equipment in good condition. Replace missing or damaged parts.

20 Keep clear of the working range of the machine at all times!

21 Never operate the hydraulic folding frames if anyone is inside the swivel range!

22 Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulically) can cause crushing and shearing injuries!

23 Do not stand within the turning and swivel range of the implement!

Pos: 23.6 /BA/Sicher heit/Sicher heits- und U nfall ver hütungs-Vorschriften BiG M 400/420/500 Zusatz @ 119\mod_1342170562046_78.docx @ 1071934 @ @ 1

24 Before leaving the mower, lower the front mower onto the ground, firmly step on the parking brake pedal. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key!

25 No one should stand between the mower and the implement unless the vehicle has been secured against rolling by means of the parking brake and/or wheel chocks!

26 Caution: When the front mower P.T.O shaft has been removed, the drive shaft at the front of the machine continues to turn if the engine is running.

Pos: 23.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

17

Safety

Pos: 23.8 /BA/Kabi ne/Ei nweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Ei nweisersitz / Personenbeför der ung @ 45 \mod_1276767521968_78.docx @ 408886 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel

1 Only persons who are guiding the driver or directing the machine may be conveyed on the guide's seat

Pos: 23.9 /BA/Sicher heit/Selbstfahr er/Sel bstfahrende Arbeitsmaschine @ 120\mod_1343031911873_78.docx @ 1095434 @ 2 @ 1

2 Persons are not permitted to ride as passengers

3.5 Self-propelled working machine

Pos: 23.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1  The warning flashers and warning beacon must be used in accordance with local traffic laws when using public highways.

2  Switch on the lighting so that the vehicle can be easily recognised.

3  The machine must not be taken into operation if the safety equipment is not functioning.

4  Always check the machine for driving and operational safety before use.

5  Hold the hand-grip firmly when climbing in and out of the mower.

6  It is not permitted to transport people on the platform.

7  The road safety switch must be in road position during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic functions - except for the steering and brakes – are deactivated.

8  Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.

9  Implements must be in transport position and locked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for road travel.

10  If the engine is running in an enclosed space, divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient ventilation.

11  When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of batteries and electrical cables.

18

Pos: 23.11 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Autopil ot @ 0\mod_1195646567591_78.docx @ 1384 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

3.6 Autopilot

Pos: 23.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1  Autopilot must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off public and semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and far away from any persons that could be endangered. They must only be used for their intended purpose: - Automatic guide of the machine by GPS (Global Positioning System).

2  Before placing the autopilot in service, check the functionality of safety elements that can be checked and make a visual inspection of all the components.

To do this, the user should proceed as follows:

• Check switching off of the autopilot when the steering wheel is moved and the seat switch engages

• Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of mechanical damages and leaks

3  When autopilot is in operation, there must be on one within 50 m of the machine in any direction.

4  The operator is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while autopilot is in operation.

5  While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the machine immediately if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.

6  After autopilot has been in operation and before leaving the field, autopilot must always be switched off on the autopilot release switch on the console.

7  Manipulating safety-related elements of the autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.

8  The autopilot should only be installed by an authorised service centre.

19

Safety

Pos: 23.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeitsger äte @ 0\mod_1195643623216_78.docx @ 1270 @ 2 @ 1

3.7 Implements

1 Caution! The flywheel will continue to rotate for some time even after the drive has been disengaged! Keep away from the implement during this time. Do not work on the machine until it has come to a standstill.

2 Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements must be carried out only when the drive is switched off, the engine switched off and the ignition key removed!

Pos: 23.14 /BA/Sicherheit/H ydr auli kanl age M ähaufber eiter (BiG M400 / BiG M500) @ 38\mod_1265362557136_78.docx @ 348614 @ 2 @ 1

3.8 Hydraulic system

Pos: 23.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 The hydraulic system is pressurised!

2 When connecting hydraulic cylinders and engines, make sure that the hydraulic hoses are connected correctly!

3 When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the mower-conditioner hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic system is depressurised both on the tractor side and on the device side!

4 When functions are connected hydraulically between the mower-conditioner and the accessory equipment, connecting parts should be identified so that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g. raising/lowering) -

Risk of accident!

5 Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!

The new hoses must fulfil the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implement!

6 When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury!

7 Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil) can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection!

8 Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and switch off the engine!

20

Pos: 23.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Batterie @ 0\mod_1195646320763_78.docx @ 1308 @ 2 @ 1

3.9

Safety

Battery

1 Maintenance work on the batteries requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

2 Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark sources clear of the battery;

Risk of explosion!

3 Never check the charging level of the battery by connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use an acid tester or voltmeter.

4 Do not charge a frozen battery;

Risk of explosion

! Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.

5 Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable protective clothing.

Pos: 23.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Kühlsystem @ 0\mod_1195646385154_78.docx @ 1327 @ 2 @ 1

3.10

Pos: 23.18 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/RR eifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

Cooling system

The heated cooling system is pressurised –

Risk of burns

! - For this reason, only remove the radiator cap with the engine switched off and after the engine has been able to cool.

3.11

Pos: 23.19 /BA/Sicherheit/R eifen @ 0\mod_1195646435716_78.docx @ 1346 @ @ 1

Tyres

1  When working on the tyres, make sure that the implement is safely lowered and secured against rolling (wheel chocks).

2  Installing wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and suitable tools!

3  Repair work on the tyres and wheels should be done by specially trained personnel using appropriate installation tools only!

4  Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressures!

5  Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the machine tipping over.

Pos: 23.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Notaussti eg @ 0\mod_1195646495279_78.docx @ 1365 @ 2 @ 1

3.12 Emergency exit

Pos: 23.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for being an emergency exit. In case of an emergency the cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this, the right hand side window must be manually unlocked before opening.

21

Safety

Pos: 23.22 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeiten im Bereich von H ochspannungsleitung en @ 11\mod_1223357468516_78.docx @ 145505 @ 2 @ 1

3.13 Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

1  Always take great care when working under or in the vicinity of power transmission lines.

2  Ensure that when in operation or being transported, the machine cannot exceed a total height of approx. 4m.

3  If there is any need to travel under overhead lines, the machine operator must request information on the rated voltage and the minimum height of the overhead lines from the overhead line operator.

4  Always keep the safety distances according to the table.

Rated voltage kV

To 1

Above 1 to 110

Above 101 to 220

Above 220 to 380

Safe distance from overhead lines m

3

4

1

2

Pos: 23.23 /BA/Sicherheit/Brandschutzmaß nahmen @ 0\mod_1195646926716_78.docx @ 1423 @ 2 @ 1

3.14 Fire preventions

Pos: 23.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire! In particular, remove any crop wound around rotating parts.

2 The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard. Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

3 The fire hazard can be reduced by removing accumulated crop from the machine several times a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and checking the machine components for overheating. Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective action. Heed the lubricating instructions.

4 Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.

5 Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine, the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo charger, and remove crop residues.

6 Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.

22

Pos: 23.25 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Wartung Mäher mit Gasspeicher+ Auswechseln von Arbeitswer kzeug en @ 0\mod_1195647075607_78.docx @ 1442 @ 2 @ 1

3.16.1

Pos: 23.29 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Unterleg keile BM 420 Bild @ 80\mod_1315489626538_78.docx @ 706258 @ @ 1

Wheel chocks

Safety

3.15 Maintenance

Pos: 23.26 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Z usatz Wartung M äher @ 348\mod_1435817863627_78.docx @ 2620259 @ @ 1

1 Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning! - Remove the ignition key!

2 Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly seated and tighten if necessary!

3 When carrying out maintenance work on a raised mowing unit, always use suitable means to secure it against falling.

4 When replacing working tools with cutting edges, use suitable tools and gloves!

5 Oils, greases and filters must be disposed of correctly!

6 Always disconnect the power supply before working on the electrical system!

7 If protective devices and guards are subject to wear, check them regularly and replace them in good time!

8 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and mounted devices, turn the power supply off at main battery switch or disconnect generator cable and battery!

9 Replacement parts must at least comply with the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implements! This is guaranteed by original KRONE spare parts!

10 Only use nitrogen for filling pneumatic accumulators - risk of explosion!

11 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and on mounted implements, mark all plug connections of the control units and loosen them. Furthermore mark all plug connections of “Relay circuit board cabin” and “Relay circuit board console” and loosen them (refer to chapter Maintenance - Electrics “Control Units and Fuses”).

Pos: 23.27 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Tel efon und F unkg eräte @ 0\mod_1195647114060_78.docx @ 1461 @ 2 @ 1

3.16 Telephone and radio sets

Pos: 23.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/U nterleg keile @ 33\mod_1254202555660_78.docx @ 318451 @ 3 @ 1

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

1

Pos: 23.30 /BA/Sicherheit/Sel bstfahrer /Unterleg keile BM 420 Text @ 80\mod_1315489430312_78.docx @ 706230 @ @ 1

Fig.1

• The machine features 2 wheel chocks

• The wheel chocks (1) are located in direction of travel front left behind the platform

• The wheel chocks must always be carried along

• When parking the machine, always secure it against rolling with both wheel chocks

• Fold the wheel chocks open completely and place them as close as possible to the wheels in that a way that the machine cannot roll away

Pos: 24 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

23

Safety

Pos: 25 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batteriehauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

3.16.2 Main battery switch

Pos: 26 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Achtung – M otorschaden: Den Batterie-Hauptschalter nicht bei laufendem M otor betätigen @ 349\mod_1436272532454_78.docx @ 2624529 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Engine damage!

• Do not switch off the main battery switch while the engine is running, the ignition key must be in the “STOP” position.

• In case of an emergency, the main battery switch can also be actuated when the ignition key is not in the “STOP” position.

Pos: 27 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e(n)/Batterie-Hauptschal ter BM 420 Bild @ 349\mod_1436348914888_78.docx @ 2625488 @ @ 1

1.

2.

3.

120 s

27 018 234 0

1

Fig. 2

1) Main battery switch

Pos: 28 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e(n)/Batterie-Hauptschal ter BM 400 Text @ 181\mod_1376922926269_78.docx @ 1552088 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel.

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine‟s power supply.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs.

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

Pos: 29 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

0) Electrical power circuit interrupted

I) Electrical power circuit turned on

24

Pos: 30 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Maschi nenbeschr eibung @ 107\mod_1334231806004_78.docx @ 965201 @ 3 @ 1

Machine Description

4 Machine Description

Pos: 31 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/A/Varianten zur Maschi nenausstattung @ 348\mod_1435841651854_78.docx @ 2621564 @ 2 @ 1

4.1 Variants for Machine Equipment

Pos: 32 /BA/M aschinenbeschrei bung/M aschinenübersicht/Selbstfahr er/Varianten Bi G M 420 @ 348\mod_1435843311387_78.docx @ 2621655 @ @ 1

The machine may be equipped with the following variants:

• Hydraulic lateral adjustment front mounted mower for levelling system

• Hydraulic cutting height adjustment

• Aktivo comfort seat

• Hydraulic swath merging system

• High-cut skids

• BSS swath width in case of CV design

Pos: 33 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMaschi nenübersicht @ 0\mod_1195565731130_78.docx @ 555 @ 2 @ 1

4.2 Machine overview

Pos: 34 /BA/M aschinenbeschrei bung/M aschinenübersicht/Selbstfahr er/Maschi nenübersicht BiG M 420 @ 57\mod_1295849441968_78.docx @ 547515 @ @ 1

11

10

9 8 7

12

1 2

Pos: 35 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.3

1 Lateral mowing unit right

3 Right outrigger arm

5 Lifting gear

7 Front mowing unit

9 Lateral mowing unit left

11 Left outrigger arm

13 Cab

3

13

5 6

4

BM 420 0036

2 Operating panel

4 Engine

6 Combination radiator

8 Work hydraulics valves

10 Main battery switch

12 Shut-off valve for front outrigger

25

Machine Description

Pos: 36 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKennzeichnung @ 0\mod_1195564622099_78.docx @ 496 @ 2 @ 1

4.3

Pos: 37 /BA/Einl eitung/Kennzeichnung/BiG M/Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1319782902906_78.docx @ 739914 @ @ 1

Identification Plate

Fig. 4

The machine data are located on a nameplate (1). It is located on the lower right side of the machine on the front of the frame.

Pos: 38 /BA/Einl eitung/Kennzeichnung/Angaben für Anfr age und Bestellungen_F ahrzeugident-Nr. @ 0\mod_1195565119708_78.docx @ 515 @ 2 @ 1

4.4

Pos: 39 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Ansprechpartner @ 0\mod_1195569394286_78.docx @ 839 @ 3 @ 1

Information Required for Questions and Orders

Type

Year of manufacture

Vehicle ID number

Note

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type designation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture : To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.

Note

Authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensure safety. The use of spare parts, accessories and other devices which are not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will result in the revoking of the liability for damages resulting thereof.

4.4.1 Contact

Pos: 40 /BA/AdressenAdresse M aschinenfabri k KRON E Spell e @ 444\mod_1460097223706_78.docx @ 3031795 @ @ 1 Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Strasse 10

D-48480 Spelle (Germany)

Telephone: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-339 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-239 (Spare parts - domestic)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359 (Spare parts - export)

Email: [email protected]

Pos: 41 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

26

Pos: 42 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicher heit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.docx @ 635 @ 3 @ 1

Safety

5

Pos: 43 /BA/Sicher heit/Selbstfahr er/Sicherheit Einführung Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1319723128935_78.docx @ 739807 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

5.1

Pos: 44 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Introduction

The BiG M 420 Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner is equipped with all the necessary safety devices (protective devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate all potential hazards on this machine as this would impair its full functional capability. Hazard warnings are attached to the machine in the relevant areas to warn against any dangers. The safety instructions are provided in the form of so-called warning pictograms. Important information on the position of these safety signs and what they mean is given below!

27

Safety

Pos: 45 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sicher hei tsaufkl eber an der M aschine @ 0\mod_1195634967326_78.docx @ 1020 @ 1 @ 1

5.2 Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine

Pos: 46 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/GGrundmaschi ne "Front-/ H eckansicht" @ 14\mod_1231774361478_78.docx @ 172491 @ 2 @ 1

5.2.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“

Pos: 47 /BA/Sicher heit/Aufkl eber/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicher heitsaufkl eber Grundmaschine Fr ont H eck Big M 420 @ 184\mod_1378818875019_78.docx @ 1581143 @ @ 1

28

Fig. 5

1) 2)

Before performing maintenance and repair work, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Order no. 942 289-0 (1x)

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against accidentally rolling away.

Order no. 942 250-0 (1x)

3)

Pos: 48 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Keep the stipulated safety distance from power transmission lines.

Order no. 942 293-0 (1x)

4)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order no. 942 196-1 (2x)

Safety

29

Safety

Pos: 49 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/GGrundmaschi ne "linke und r echte Maschi nenseite" @ 14\mod_1231774462634_78.docx @ 172514 @ 2 @ 1

5.2.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”

Pos: 50 /BA/Sicher heit/Aufkl eber/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicher heitsaufkl eber Grundmaschine r echte/links Seite Big M 420 @ 184\mod_1378820342468_78.docx @ 1581381 @ @ 1

30

Fig. 6

1)

Before starting the machine, read and follow the operating instructions and safety instructions.

Order no. 939 471-1 (1x)

3)

2)

Safety

Passengers are not permitted to ride on ladder steps or platforms.

Order no. 942 291-0 (2x)

4)

Do not stand within the swivel range.

Order no. 939 469-1 (2x)

5)

The accumulator is subject to gas and oil pressure. Disassembly and repair in strict accordance with the instructions in the technical handbook.

Order no. 939 529-0 (4x)

7)

Danger of burns!

Hot surface, keep sufficient distance.

Order no. 942 210-0 (1x)

6)

When making repairs

(welding work), always switch off the engine.

Disconnect the main battery switch and remove both cable plugs from the PLD control unit on the engine.

Order no. 942 405-0 (2x)

Pos: 51 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against unintended rolling.

Order no. 942 250-0 (1x)

31

Safety

Pos: 52 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k links / r echts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 2 @ 1

5.2.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 53 /BA/Sicher heit/Aufkl eber/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicher heitsaufkl eber Seitenmähwer ke Big M 420_Europa @ 86\mod_1319708993562_78.docx @ 739610 @ @ 1

32

Fig. 7

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (4x)

2)

When the engine is in operation, keep your distance.

Order No. 942 197-1 (2x) a) b) c)

3)

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

Order No. 939 410-2 (4x)

Safety

Pos: 54 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (4x)

5)

Danger due to rotating shaft.

Order No. 939 520-1 (2x)

(with auger - option (4x))

33

Safety

Pos: 55 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 2 @ 1

5.2.4 Front mowing unit

Pos: 56 /Abkürzungen /CV- Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 57 /BA/Sicher heit/Aufkl eber/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicher heitsaufkl eber Fr ontmähwer k Big M 420_Europa @ 87\mod_1320825558361_78.docx @ 747465 @ @ 1

Pos: 58 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 8

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (3x)

2) a) b) c)

With hydraulic front guard flap option:

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (2x)

34

Pos: 59 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführ ung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 60 /BA/Sicher heit/Aufkl eber/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 420/CRi /Sicher hei tsaufkl eber Fr ontmähwer k(CRI) Big M 420_Eur opa @ 141\mod_1355826629332_78.docx @ 1254824 @ @ 1

Safety

Pos: 61 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 9

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the safety devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order no. 939 576-0 (3x)

2)

For the hydraulic front guard flaps option:

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order no. 942 196-1 (2x)

939 572-0 a) b) c)

35

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/T echnische D aten der M aschine @ 134\mod_1351154219999_78.docx @ 1195165 @ 1 @ 1

6

Pos: 62.2 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Technische Daten mit 2. Ü berschrift @ 0\mod_1195566374865_78.docx @ 594 @ 2 @ 1

Technical Data of the Machine

6.1 Technical data

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication. We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Pos: 62.3 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Selbstfahr er/Bi G M 420/Technische Daten: Grundmaß e F ahrzeug Big M 420_C ater pillar/M AN @ 140\mod_1355220777826_78.docx @ 1246434 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Basic dimensions

Transport width

Transport length

Transport height

Weight

Weight distribution

Pos: 62.4 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Selbstfahr er/Bi G M 420/Technische Daten: M otor M AN Bi G M 420 @ 137 \mod_1353424868486_78.docx @ 1217166 @ @ 1

Engine

Engine manufacturer

Engine type

Design

Emission level

Power (ECE R120)

Cooling system

Combustion method

Capacity

Engine speed

Starter

Three-phase generator

Pos: 62.5 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Selbstfahr er/Bi G M 420/Technische Daten: Fahrantrieb Big M 420_Cater pillar/MAN @ 137\mod_1353481050673_78.docx @ 1217255 @ @ 1

Travelling gear

Type

3000 mm

8165 mm

4000 mm

15.500 kg

10.000 kg - front / 6.000 kg - rear road operation field mode

MAN

D 2066 LE 121

6 cylinders in row

IIIb (EU)

311 kW (423 HP)

Liquid cooling

Common Rail injection

10.5 l

850 – 1650 rpm

1900 rpm

24 V; 5.5 kW

14 V; 270 A

Continuous hydraulic drive with rotary piston motors

0 to 20 km/h

0 to 40 km/h

Standard

Standard

Pos: 62.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Working speed

Transport speed

All-wheel

Axle separation

36

Pos: 62.7 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Selbstfahr er/Bi G M 420/Technische Daten: Achsen Big M 420_Cater pillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358417808790_78.docx @ 1273931 @ @ 1

Axles

Steering angle

Steering

Suspension front axle

Pos: 62.8 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten/Selbstfahr er/Bi G M 420/Technische Daten: Bereifung _MAN @ 348 \mod_1435744290147_78.docx @ 2618230 @ @ 1

Tyres

Front 750/60 R30 (CARGO X BIB)

Rear 520/80 R 26

Front 750/65 R26 (MEGA X BIB)

Rear 600/65 R28 (AC 65)

53°

1.0 bar

1.2 bar

1.9 bar

1.2 bar

Technical Data of the Machine

Rear axle

Hydro-pneumatic

Air pressure

Note

Increase the values specified in the table by 0.4 bar when using the machine on slopes.

Pos: 62.9 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Radmuttern_Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358420623083_78.docx @ 1274079 @ @ 1

Wheel nuts

Tightening torque

Pos: 62.10 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Abmessung en Mähwerk CV_C aterpillar/M AN @ 137\mod_1353499031570_78.docx @ 1218454 @ @ 1

Mowing units CV design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

630 Nm

3

9.720 mm

4 per lateral mowing unit

5 per front mowing unit

4 per lateral mowing unit

2 per front mowing unit

V-shaped steel tines

700/1.000 rpm

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

Pos: 62.11 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Abmessung en Mähwerk CRI_Cater pillar/M AN @ 140\mod_1355221207089_78.docx @ 1246463 @ @ 1

Pos: 62.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Mowing units CRI design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

3

9.000 mm

5 per mowing unit

2 per mowing unit

Rollers

760 rpm

37

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.13 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/TT echnische D aten Kli maanlage @ 136\mod_1352814649537_78.docx @ 1211328 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.1 Technical Data Air Conditioning System

Pos: 62.14 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Klimaanl age 910 m³/h 17,2 Ampere @ 182\mod_1377753515185_78.docx @ 1564614 @ @ 1

Component Performance data

Evaporator

Heater

Fan

Voltage

Current consumption

Refrigerant

Refrigerating capacity* 5;200 Watt*

Heating capacity 4;000 Watt

910 m 3 /h free blowing

12 Volt

17,2 amperes

R 134a (CFC free)

* measured at +30° Celsius ambient temperature (data rendered by the manufacturer)

Pos: 62.15 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Klimaanl age Käl temittel datenblatt R 134a ( Auszug) @ 0\mod_1197351117948_78.docx @ 17726 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)

Refrigerant R 134a:

Chemical designation:

Chemical formula:

Molecular weight:

Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):

Freezing point:

Critical temperature:

Critical pressure:

Density (liquid at +25° Celsius):

Flammability limits

Environmental data

FKW 134a:

ODP - Ozonolysis potential

CLP - Chlorine load potential

HGWP - Greenhouse effect

PCR - Photochemical reactivity

Pos: 62.16 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: M otor-Elektrik / M aschinen-El ektri k_M AN @ 349\mod_1436432973446_78.docx @ 2626448 @ 2 @ 1

1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane

CH

2

F CF

3

102.0 g/mol

-26.1°C

-101.0°C

-101.1°C

40.60 bar

1.206 kg/m 3 in air - not flammable

ODP = 0

CLP = 0

HGWP = 0.26

PCR = 0.5

6.2 Technical Data of Electrical System

Pos: 62.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Designation

Alternator (on-board electrical system)

Number of batteries

Battery voltage

Battery capacity per battery

14 V; 270 A

2 units

12 V

135 Ah

38

Pos: 62.18 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/BBetri ebsstoffe @ 174\mod_1371620600320_78.docx @ 1490571 @ 2 @ 1

6.3 Consumables

Pos: 62.19 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Betriebsstoffe F ahrzeug Bi G M 420 MAN @ 188\mod_1380173674246_78.docx @ 1610678 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SSchmierstoffe @ 17\mod_1236177314933_78.docx @ 201837 @ 2 @ 1

Diesel tank

Urea tank

Engine coolant

Filling quantity

700 litres

70 litres

60 litres

Refer to the enclosed MAN operation and maintenance manual

6.4 Lubricants

Pos: 62.21 /BA/Ei nlei tung/T echnische Daten/Selbstfahrer /BiG M 420/T echnische D aten: Schmi erstoffe F ahrzeug Bi G M 420 MAN @ 14 7\mod_1360739625542_78.docx @ 1313513 @ @ 1

Pos: 62.22 /Abkürzungen /M ähwer ke C V-Ausführ ung @ 145\mod_1359535035820_78.docx @ 1295126 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CV design)

Pos: 62.23 /BA/War tung/Tabellen_F üll mengen/M ähwer ke/T echnische D aten Betriebsstoffe Füll meng en Frontmähwer k BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Pos: 62.24 /Abkürzungen /M ähwer ke CRi-Ausführung @ 145\mod_1359535111951_78.docx @ 1295445 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CRi design)

Pos: 62.25 /BA/War tung/Tabellen_F üll mengen/M ähwer ke/T echnische D aten Betriebsstoffe Füll meng en Frontmähwer k BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

Pos: 62.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Hydraulic oil

Transfer gearbox

Engine oil

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Cutter bar

Filling quantity

Filtered lubricants

Bio-degradable lubricants

80 litres

6.0 litres Mobil SHC 630

43 litres

HLP46, HE46

Refer to the enclosed MAN operation and maintenance manual

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

Bio-degradable lubricants lubricants

Brand name

On request

** = lateral mowing units

Bio-degradable

Brand name

On request

39

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.27 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/Vog el/Betri ebsstoffe F ettsorten der Z entralschmi erung @ 348 \mod_1435838648092_78.docx @ 2621117 @ 3 @ 1

6.4.1 Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2

Manufacturer Type designation

Pos: 63 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

AGIP

ARAL

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

ESSO

ELF

Autol Top 2000

Long-term grease H

High–Lub L4742

Energrease LS EP 9346

Energrease LS-EP2

Spheerol EP L2

Li

Li

Exxon multi-purpose grease Li

ELF Multi 2 Li

Spec. Ca

Li

Li

Li

FINA

FUCHS

EP multi-purpose grease

LZR 2

KROON OIL Lithep Grease

MOBIL Mobilux EP 2

Mobilgrease MB 2

MOGUL LV 1 EP

Li

Li

Li

Li

Li

Li

ÖMV

OPTIMOL

SHELL

TEXACO

ÖMV Signum M283

Olit EP 2

Retinax EP L2

Multifak EP2

TOTAL Multis EP2 Li

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li

Li/Ca

Li

Li

Li

Biologically fast degradable lubricating greases

ARAL

AVIA

BECHEM

DEA

FINA

FUCHS

BAB EP 2

Syntogrease

UWS VE 42

Dolon E EP2

Biolical EP S2

Plantogel 0120S

LUBRITECH Stabyl Eco EP2

ÖMV ÖMV ecodur EP2

TEXACO Starfak 2

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol E2

Li/Ca

Li

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li

Li/Ca

Ca

Ca

Li

Minimum conveying temperature

Saponification [°C]

25

25

–20

–15

–20

–20

–20

25

10

–15

–20

25

10

25

–20

25

–20

–20

–20

–20

–20

25

25

–20

25

25

–20

25

–20

25

40

Pos: 64.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Kabine @ 0\mod_1195650476560_78.docx @ 1556 @ 1 @ 1

Cabin

7 Cabin

Pos: 64.2 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Aufsti egsleiter zur F ahr er kabine BM 400 ( 2012-07-26 13:22:20) @ 0\mod_1195647599076_78.docx @ 1499 @ 2 @ 1

7.1 Ladder to driver's cabin

Pos: 64.3 /BA/Kabi ne/Aufstiegsleiter/Aufsti egsleiter Big M 420 @ 47\mod_1285667878078_78.docx @ 457056 @ @ 1

Danger

! -

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Do not access or leave (the machine) over ladder during travel.

• It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.

• Always make certain the ladders are clean. Take special care that no grease or other slippery materials accumulates on the ladders.

• When leaving the cab, always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 64.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 10

• Ladder (1) to the driver‟s cab

1

41

Cabin

Pos: 64.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKabi nentür öffnen @ 0\mod_1195650425029_78.docx @ 1537 @ 2 @ 1

7.2

Pos: 64.6 /BA/Kabi ne/Tür Öffnen von i nnen/außen @ 0\mod_1195651571638_78.docx @ 1633 @ @ 1

Opening the cabin door

1

BM 400 0182

Fig. 11

• From the outside:

Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the door.

Pos: 64.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0183

Fig. 12

• From the inside:

Lift the door opening lever (1) and open the door.

42

Pos: 64.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBedi enungselemente @ 0\mod_1195651806826_78.docx @ 1652 @ 2 @ 1

7.3

Pos: 64.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

Operators controls

7.3.1

Pos: 64.10 /BA/Kabine/Bedienelemente Übersicht Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320143989012_78.docx @ 741413 @ @ 1

Overview

Cabin

9

5

1

2

3

Pos: 64.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.13

1 Driver's seat

2 Steering column

3 Service brake

4 Guide's seat

5 Switch group - roof panel

6 Info centre

7 Switch panel

4

8 Multi-function lever

9 Switch group – air conditioning/heating

10 Interior lighting

11 Cooler

12 ISO compartment for radio

13 Side window wiper (right/left)

43

Cabin

Pos: 64.12.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLuft-Komfort-Sitz @ 78\mod_1314281916697_78.docx @ 696162 @ 2 @ 1

7.4 Air comfort seat

Pos: 64.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Kurzzeitige Ablenkung @ 78\mod_1314282284221_78.docx @ 696190 @ @ 1

Danger! - Brief distraction

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The driver‟s seat must only be adjusted when the machine is stopped.

Pos: 64.12.3 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Eingeschr änkter Beweg ungsfr eiraum des Mulitfunkti onshebels (alte D arstellung) @ 79\mod_1314595386879_78.docx @ 696925 @ @ 1

Danger

! – Limited freedom of movement for the multi-function lever

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• After adjusting the seat, the right armrest and the steering column adjustment, check whether the multi-function lever is freely moveable in all directions. Should this not be the case, the setting needs to be readjusted.

Pos: 64.12.4 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/War nung - F ahr ersitz falsch ei ngestellt ( alte Darstell ung) @ 79\mod_1314351997140_78.docx @ 696784 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• Prior to start-up, adjust the driver`s seat ergonomically and individually according to the driver

Pos: 64.12.5 /BA/Kabine/F ahr ersitz/Luft- Komfort- Sitz ST ANDARD Luft-Komfort-Si tz_Bild_Gesamtübersicht BM 420/500 Big X @ 325\mod_1425560162607_78.docx @ 2498209 @ @ 1

10

8

2

3

4

5

1

6 12

7

9

Pos: 64.12.6 /BA/Kabine/F ahr ersitz/Ei nführtext @ 78\mod_1314338699867_78.docx @ 696252 @ @ 1

BX480595

Fig. 14

The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Pos: 64.12.7 /BA/Kabine/F ahr ersitz/Gewichtsei nstellung @ 78\mod_1314339002000_78.docx @ 696280 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.12.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent health problems, the individual driver‟s weight adjustment should be checked and adjusted prior to operation of the machine. The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).

44

Pos: 64.12.9 /BA/Kabine/F ahr ersitz/Höheneinstell ung @ 78\mod_1314339309445_78.docx @ 696308 @ @ 1

Cabin

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver‟s seat (1) up. Press the lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver‟s seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Pos: 64.12.10 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/H orizontalfederung @ 78\mod_1314340542270_78.docx @ 696364 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.12.11 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Längsei nstellung @ 78\mod_1314340870689_78.docx @ 696392 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.12.12 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Sitzneigungsei nstellung @ 78\mod_1314341157250_78.docx @ 696420 @ @ 1

Longitudinal adjustment

• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver‟s seat (1) forward or backward into the requested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, the driver‟s seat must not be movable into any other position.

Seat angle adjustment

• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface by increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.

Pos: 64.12.13 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Sitzti efenei nstellung @ 78\mod_1314342965217_78.docx @ 696448 @ @ 1

Seat depth adjustment

• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the required position by pushing forward and backward.

Pos: 64.12.14 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Kopfstütze @ 78\mod_1314343284989_78.docx @ 696476 @ @ 1

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver‟s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back

– the horizontal suspension is switched off.

Headrest

Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on the same height, if possible.

• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.

Pos: 64.12.15 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Bandschei benstütze @ 78\mod_1314343609780_78.docx @ 696504 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.12.16 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/R ückenl ehnenei nstellung @ 78\mod_1314344065766_78.docx @ 696532 @ @ 1

Lumbar support

• The height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest can be adapted individually by turning the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.

Pos: 64.12.17 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Schwi ngungsdämpfer ei nstellen @ 79\mod_1314596261195_78.docx @ 696981 @ @ 1

Adjustment of the backrest

• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different position any more.

Set the Vibration Damper

Pos: 64.12.18 /BA/Sicher hei t/2. Vor ang estellte War nhi nweise/Warnung - Schwing ungsdämpfer falsch eing estellt (al te Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314596183569_78.docx @ 696953 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• The vibration damper must always be set so tightly that the seat cannot drift, also in case of a bad road, and that the pedals are always in contact with the vibration damper.

Pos: 64.12.19 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STAND ARD/Schwi ngungsdämpfer ei nstellbarer @ 79\mod_1314354261168_78.docx @ 696895 @ @ 1 The oscillating behaviour of the driver‟s seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation via the adjustable damper stepless from “soft” to “hard”.

• Pull lever (12) up (seating comfort: soft)

• Pull lever (12) down (seating comfort: hard)

Pos: 64.12.20 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

45

Cabin

Pos: 64.12.21 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A- E/A/Ar ml ehne links @ 78\mod_1314344564181_78.docx @ 696588 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.1 Setting the left armrest

Pos: 64.12.22 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STAND ARD/Arml ehne links neuer Mutifunktionshebel Bild @ 79\mod_1314353402049_78.docx @ 696867 @ @ 1

8

11

BX850945

Pos: 64.12.23 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Arml ehne links Beschr eibung @ 79\mod_1314345159341_78.docx @ 696616 @ @ 1

Fig. 15

Pos: 64.12.24 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A- E/A/Ar ml ehne rechts @ 79\mod_1314345446706_78.docx @ 696644 @ 3 @ 1

• Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

• Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of the armrest.

• Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten the hexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.

7.4.2 Right armrest

Pos: 64.12.25 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Arml ehne r echts Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 79\mod_1314352240603_78.docx @ 696811 @ @ 1

3

1

2

Pos: 64.12.26 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Arml ehne r echts Beschr eibung @ 79\mod_1314346051414_78.docx @ 696700 @ @ 1

Fig. 16

The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are one unit.

Setting the right armrest

• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) into the requested height and tighten the clamping screw (2) again.

Pos: 64.12.27 /BA/Kabi ne/Fahr ersitz/Arml ehne r echts Beschr eibung Z usatz BM 420/500 BigX @ 79\mod_1314353125257_78.docx @ 696839 @ @ 1

• The angle of inclination and the height of the right armrest can be adjusted by activating the lever (3)

Pos: 64.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

46

Pos: 64.14 /BA/Kabine/Ver bandskasten / Betriebsanl eitung Schublade BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272347696858_78.docx @ 375780 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.3 Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions

Cabin

Pos: 64.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.17

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver‟s seat (1).

47

Cabin

Pos: 64.16 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/EEinweisersitz @ 52\mod_1289471929875_78.docx @ 504469 @ 2 @ 1

7.5 Guide's seat

Pos: 64.17 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Ei nweisersitz Achtung (2012-07-26 15:59:04) @ 52\mod_1289472176093_78.docx @ 504495 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Hindrance to driver!

Pos: 64.18 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahr ersitz/Beifahrersi tz Bild BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272431803112_78.docx @ 377335 @ @ 1

• The guide's seat must only be used while the machine is being guided. Otherwise no persons other than the driver are permitted to remain on the machine or in the driver's cab during operation.

Fig.18

Pos: 64.19 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahr ersitz/Einweisersitzfl äche herunter klappen @ 52\mod_1289472477171_78.docx @ 504541 @ @ 1

• Before use fold down the guide's seat surface (1).

Pos: 64.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K-O/KKühlbox @ 42\mod_1272436051831_78.docx @ 377418 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.1

Pos: 64.21 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Bil d BM 420 / 500 @ 42\mod_1272436122175_78.docx @ 377518 @ @ 1

Cooler

Pos: 64.22 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Text @ 42\mod_1272437167768_78.docx @ 377542 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.19

The cooler (1) is located under the guide's seat (2) in the cab.

The cooler can be connected to the 12-V socket (3) on the right next to the passenger seat with the 12-V plug (4).

48

Pos: 64.24 /BA/Kabine/N otaussti eg BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272290080084_78.docx @ 375572 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.2 Emergency Exit

Cabin

Pos: 64.25 /BA/Kabine/On- Board- Di agnosestecker (OBD) – M otor MAN @ 83\mod_1317729239127_78.docx @ 730468 @ 3 @ 1

Fig.20

In case of an emergency (1), the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.

To do this:

• Swivel the lever (2) forward until it reaches the locking point

• Pull the safety cotter pin (3) and remove it

• Open the side window (1) completely

7.5.3 OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug)

Pos: 64.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 21

The OBD diagnostics plug (1) is located in the cabin, behind the instructional seat and below the storage surface (2).

49

Cabin

Pos: 64.27 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäule und F ußpedal e BM 500/BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289480764906_78.docx @ 504895 @ 2 @ 1

7.6 Steering Column and Foot Pedals

Pos: 64.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.22

1 Button for horn

2 Indicator switch

3 Pilot lamp indicator

4 Full beam

5 Headlamp flasher

6 Full beam indicator light

7 Not assigned

8 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment

9 Release lever for horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

10 Service brake

50

Pos: 64.29 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäulenverstellung (2012-08- 09 15:37:40) @ 52\mod_1289481396328_78.docx @ 505108 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.1

Cabin

Steering Column Adjustment

Danger

! -

Loss of control over the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Adjust the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

• The steering column (1) is held in vertical position by spring pressure. Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the steering wheel with both hands.

1

3

2

Pos: 64.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX100300_1

Fig. 23

Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

• Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1), and adjust to the desired position.

After the pedal (2) has been released, the steering column (1) will be locked.

Horizontal steering column adjustment

• Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column (1) into the requested position. Lock the release lever (3) again.

51

Cabin

Pos: 64.31 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Hupe @ 52\mod_1289481326156_78.docx @ 505062 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.2 Horn

Pos: 64.32 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Blinklichtschalter @ 348\mod_1435840018303_78.docx @ 2621179 @ 3 @ 1

1

BX100210_1

Fig. 24

• When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is sounded.

7.6.3 Flashing Light Switch

1

2

BX100213_1

Fig. 25

Note

When you want to change the direction of travel in road traffic, use flashing light to shows this.

Pos: 64.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Switch (1) forward - direction indicator right

• Switch (1) backward - direction indicator left

The direction indicator warning light (2) lights up when the flashing lights are switched on.

52

Pos: 64.34 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Fer nlicht (2012-08- 16 13:57:43) @ 52\mod_1289481203984_78.docx @ 505010 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.4 Full Beam

1

2

Pos: 64.35 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lichthupe @ 52\mod_1289481134765_78.docx @ 504984 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.5

BX100212_1

Fig. 26

Note

Full beam only when dipped beam is turned on.

Turn off full beam when a vehicle is approaching from the opposite direction.

• Switch full beam on - press lever (1) down.

• Switch full beam off - pull lever (1) up.

When full beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2) will be lit.

Headlamp Flasher

1

2

Cabin

Pos: 64.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX200040_1

Fig. 27

• Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.

53

Cabin

Pos: 64.37 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/B/Betriebsbr emse betätig en @ 49\mod_1286779662750_78.docx @ 463113 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.6

Pos: 64.38 /BA/Kabine/Betriebsbr ems e betätig en Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 52\mod_1289487058875_78.docx @ 505805 @ @ 1

Using the operating brake

1

BX100111_1

Fig. 28

Pos: 64.39 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Betriebsbr emse betätigen T ext @ 74\mod_1309242945934_78.docx @ 660390 @ @ 1

Danger!

– when the operating brake function is limited.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Check the brake function every time before starting to drive.

Pos: 64.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

54

Pos: 64.41.1 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsol e Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347266509191_78.docx @ 1160361 @ 2 @ 1

7.7 Switch Group Roof Panel

Cabin

Fig. 29

Pos: 64.41.2 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsol e T ext BM 420 @ 130 \mod_1347267004931_78.docx @ 1160395 @ @ 1

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Mirror adjustment (right outside mirror only)

5 Rear work lights

6 Parking light / dipped beam

7 Allround light (optional)

8 Hazard lights

9 Additional spotlight

10 Windshield wiper

11 Windshield wiper washer system

Pos: 64.41.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

55

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.4 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/BBel euchtung @ 0\mod_1195658399935_78.docx @ 1881 @ 2 @ 1

7.8

Pos: 64.41.5 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/Ü bersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

Lighting

7.8.1

Pos: 64.41.6 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Beleuchtung Ü bersicht BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285674059968_78.docx @ 457109 @ @ 1

Overview

6

4 7 6

7 4

2

1 3 9 8

3

5

8 9

12

11 10

Pos: 64.41.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.30

1 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

2 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

3 Working floodlights, side lower

4 Working floodlight lower pointing to the front

5 Working floodlight rear

6 Cab roof working floodlight

7 Dipped beam / full beam

8 Front parking light (clearance lamp)

9 Indicators / hazard warning flashers

10 Licence plate lamp

11 a) Brake light b) Indicators / hazard warning flashers c) Tail light / rear parking light (clearance lamp)

12 Allround light (optional)

11

11 a b c

BM 420 0002

56

Pos: 64.41.8 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/BBli nker, Warnblinkanl age und Br emslicht (2015- 12- 07 13:17:19) @ 48\mod_1286516373468_78.docx @ 461657 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.2 Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

Pos: 64.41.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Blinker Hinweis F ahrtrichtungswechsel bei Str aßenfahrt mit Blinklicht anzeigen. ( 2012- 08- 10 12:02:46) @ 48\mod_1286516520484_78.docx @ 461683 @ @ 1

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Pos: 64.41.10 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bli nker, War nbli nkanl age und Bremslicht Bil d BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286519378578_78.docx @ 461839 @ @ 1

Cabin

12a

12b

10

10

BM 420 0003

Fig.31

Pos: 64.41.11 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bli nker ei nschalten @ 48\mod_1286517252328_78.docx @ 461735 @ 4 @ 1

7.8.2.1 Switching on the indicator

• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the indicators (10, 12b) will flash on one side (right/left).

Pos: 64.41.12 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Br emslicht @ 48\mod_1286517961515_78.docx @ 461761 @ 4 @ 1

7.8.2.2 Brake light

Pos: 64.41.13 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/U-Z/War nblinkanl age @ 48\mod_1286518286593_78.docx @ 461813 @ 4 @ 1

When the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (12a) will light up as soon as the operating brake is pressed.

7.8.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher

Pos: 64.41.14 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/War nbli nkanl age Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268382748_78.docx @ 1160508 @ @ 1

1

10

Fig.32

Pos: 64.41.15 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bli nker, War nbli nkanl age und Bremslicht BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1195658983248_78.docx @ 1921 @ @ 1

The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.

• When the hazard warning flasher has been switched on, all indicators (10, 12b) will flash at the same time.

Pos: 64.41.16 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

57

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.17 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T /SStandlicht / Abbl endlicht @ 47\mod_1285679225203_78.docx @ 457241 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.3 Side light/dipped beam

Pos: 64.41.18 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Bil d BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268955251_78.docx @ 1160621 @ @ 1

1

7

11

9

Pos: 64.41.19 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Text @ 48\mod_1286520637718_78.docx @ 461971 @ 44 @ 1

Fig.33

The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.

The switch has three positions:

I

- Off

II

- Parking light

III

– Dipped beam

7.8.3.1 Switching on the parking light

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

The following lamps will light up when the parking light is switched on:

9 Front parking light

12c Rear parking light

Switching on the dipped beam 7.8.3.2

Pos: 64.41.20 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.

When dipped beam is turned on, the following are lit:

7 Dipped beam

9 Front parking light

11 Licence plate lamp

12c Tail light

Note

The dipped beam can be switched on only when the ignition has been switched on.

58

Pos: 64.41.21 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A- E/A/Ar bei tsschei nwerfer @ 48\mod_1286522984234_78.docx @ 462049 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.4

Working floodlights

Pos: 64.41.22 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347270164680_78.docx @ 1160765 @ @ 1

Fig. 34

Pos: 64.41.23 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer Text BM 420 / 500 @ 130\mod_1347271298137_78.docx @ 1160794 @ @ 1

The rocker switch (1,2,3,4) for the work lights is located in the switch group roof panel.

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Rear work lights

It has 2 settings:

Off

On

Pos: 64.41.24 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Always switch off the working floodlights during road travel!

Cabin

59

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A- E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabi ne @ 48\mod_1286524163921_78.docx @ 462127 @ 4 @ 1

7.8.4.1

Working floodlights Cab

Pos: 64.41.26 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer Kabi ne Bil d BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347274714584_78.docx @ 1160823 @ @ 1

Fig. 35

Pos: 64.41.27 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer Kabi ne Text BM 420/500 @ 130 \mod_1347275354690_78.docx @ 1160936 @ @ 1

The 6 working floodlights (6) on the cab roof can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

When the rocker switch (1) is turned on, the following are lit:

6 Cab roof floodlights

Pos: 64.41.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A- E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front @ 48\mod_1286524169140_78.docx @ 462153 @ 4 @ 1

7.8.4.2

Working floodlight Bottom front

Pos: 64.41.29 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer unten Front Bild BM 420 @ 130 \mod_1347276018374_78.docx @ 1161049 @ @ 1

2

4

Fig. 36

Pos: 64.41.30 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer unten Front T ext @ 130\mod_1347276310451_78.docx @ 1161079 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (2) to position II:

When the rocker switch (2) is turned on, the following are lit:

4 Working floodlight front (right and left)

Pos: 64.41.31 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4

60

Pos: 64.41.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A- E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer seitlic h unten und Mähwerke r echts/li nks @ 48\mod_1286524157656_78.docx @ 462101 @ 4 @ 1

7.8.4.3

Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units"

Pos: 64.41.33 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer setlich unten und Mähwer ke r echts/links Bild BM 420 @ 131 \mod_1347277074891_78.docx @ 1161341 @ @ 1

3

4

Cabin

5

6 7

Fig. 37

Pos: 64.41.34 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer setlich unten und Mähwer ke r echts/linksT ext BM 4 20 @ 131\mod_1347277757715_78.docx @ 1161401 @ @ 1

The two working floodlights (4,5,6,7) can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (3) to position II:

When the rocker switch (3) is turned on, the following are lit:

Pos: 64.41.35 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A- E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer H eck @ 48\mod_1286525027906_78.docx @ 462205 @ 4 @ 1

4 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

5 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

6 Working floodlights lateral right

7 Working floodlights lateral left

7.8.4.4

Working floodlight rear

Pos: 64.41.36 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer H eck Bil d BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279118287_78.docx @ 1161513 @ @ 1

4

5

Fig.38

Pos: 64.41.37 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Ar beitsschei nwerfer H eck Text BM 400/420/500 @ 48\mod_1286529514968_78.docx @ 462491 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (4) to position II:

When the rocker switch (4) is turned on, the following are lit:

5 Working floodlight rear

Pos: 64.41.38 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

61

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.39 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T /RRunduml euchten opti onal @ 48\mod_1286524188234_78.docx @ 462179 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.5

Allround lights (optional)

Pos: 64.41.40 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/R unduml euchte Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279511325_78.docx @ 1161543 @ @ 1

13

1

Fig.39

Pos: 64.41.41 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/R unduml euchte Text BM 400/420/500 @ 49\mod_1286530440406_78.docx @ 462543 @ @ 1

Option depends on user’s country

In some countries the allround lights must be switched on in road traffic.

Pos: 64.41.42 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Switch on the allround lights (13)

The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp in the switch (1) will light up.

62

Pos: 64.41.43 /BA/Kabi ne/BeleuchtungInnen-Raumbel euchtung / Spotlight BM 420/500 (2015-10-23 13:14:34) @ 41\mod_1271751084243_78.docx @ 372526 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.6 Interior Lighting / Spotlight

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.44 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.40

The interior lighting (1) and spotlight (2) are located on the cab roof.

Overview:

3 = On / Off switch - interior lighting (1)

4 = On / Off switch - spotlight (2)

Note - switch-off delay

After ignition stage II is turned off, interior lighting will stay on for the amount of time set on time relay (5).

The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (5).

To do this:

• Open the cover (7) on the cab roof

• Move switch (6) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table)

S1

Off

On

On

S2

Off

On

Off

(s)

110…900

14…110

2.5 14

Off On 0…2.5

Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the rotary potentiometer (8) of the time relay (5) that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t(s).

63

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.45 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuchtung/Innen-R aumbeleuchtung / Zusätzlicher Spotlight BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347002500384_78.docx @ 1159306 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.7 Additional Spotlight

1

Pos: 64.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 41

The spotlight is used to illuminate the multi-function lever.

The spotlight (2) is located on the cab roof.

The rocker switch (1) for the spotlight has three positions:

I- 30% brightness

II – Off

III – 100% brightness

2

64

Pos: 64.43.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/AAuß enspi egel @ 32\mod_1253519080403_78.docx @ 313745 @ 2 @ 1

7.9 Outside mirrors

Pos: 64.43.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr- Außenspieg el (2012- 08- 08 15:22:38) @ 32\mod_1253519267091_78.docx @ 313770 @ @ 1

Danger! -

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Before starting to drive, adjust the mirror so that the rear driving area is fully

Pos: 64.43.3 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel / Sonnenbl ende/Auß enspi egel li nks BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286776114734_78.docx @ 462847 @ 3 @ 1

7.9.1 Left Outside Mirror

1

Cabin

Pos: 64.43.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.42

• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.

65

Cabin

Pos: 64.43.5 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/RR echter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspi egel BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286776268859_78.docx @ 462873 @ 3 @ 1

7.9.2 Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror

Pos: 64.43.6 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel / Sonnenbl ende/R echter Außenspieg el und Anfahrspi egel Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347282021728_78.docx @ 1161768 @ @ 1

2

1

Pos: 64.43.7 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel / Sonnenbl ende/Auß enspi egel r echts @ 49\mod_1286777019984_78.docx @ 462951 @ 4 @ 1

Fig. 43

7.9.2.1 Setting the right outside mirror

Pos: 64.43.8 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel / Sonnenbl ende/Anfahrspi egel einstell en @ 49\mod_1286776763796_78.docx @ 462925 @ 4 @ 1

The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.

• Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).

• Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.

7.9.2.2 Setting the anti-collision mirror

The anti-collision mirror (2) must be adjusted manually.

Pos: 64.43.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Anfahrspi egel Hi nweis (2012- 08- 08 15:31:56) @ 49\mod_1286776577265_78.docx @ 462899 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.43.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Set the anti-collision mirror in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

66

Pos: 64.43.11 /BA/Kabi ne/Spieg el / Sonnenblende/Innenspi egel @ 0\mod_1195711607577_78.docx @ 2043 @ 2 @ 1

7.10 Inside mirror

Fig. 44:

Adjust the inside mirror manually.

Adjust the inside mirror according to requirements.

Pos: 64.44 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel / Sonnenbl ende/Sonnenbl ende BM 420 / 500 @ 131\mod_1347281315525_78.docx @ 1161656 @ 2 @ 1

7.11 Sun blind

Pos: 64.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 45

Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.

Cabin

67

Cabin

Pos: 64.46 /BA/Kabine/Fr ontschei benwischer BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347282447153_78.docx @ 1161827 @ 2 @ 1

7.12 Windshield wipers

1

Fig. 46

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is located in the roof panel.

The switch has three positions:

- Off

- Interval

- Continuous operation

Switching on the windshield wipers

Pos: 64.47 /BA/Kabine/Schei benwaschanlag e – Frontscheibe BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347284689341_78.docx @ 1161926 @ 2 @ 1

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

7.13 Washer system – windshield

1

Pos: 64.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 47

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.

Switching on the windshield washer system

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

68

Pos: 64.49.1 /BA/Kabine/Schalter konsole/Schalterkonsole BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271762510508_78.docx @ 372627 @ 2 @ 1

7.14 Switch panel

Cabin

Fig. 48

1  Panel switches

2  Pilot lamps

3  Ignition lock

4  Cigarette lighter

5  12 V socket

6  CAN diagnostics socket

7  USB connection

Pos: 64.49.2 /BA/Kabine/Schalter konsole/Hinweis C AN-Diagnosesteckdose / U SB- Anschl uss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.49.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

69

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.4 /BA/Kabine/Schalter konsole/Konsol enschalter und Kontr ollleuchten BM 420 @ 85 \mod_1319112554926_78.docx @ 737170 @ 2 @ 1

7.15 Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps

Fig. 49

1 Road/field release switch

2 Autopilot release switch (optional)

3 Parking brake release switch

4 Traction drive release switch

5 Axle separation key

6 Switch hydraulic auger hood left (optional)

7 Fold up/ fold down front guard flaps switch (front mowing unit optional)

8 Switch hydraulic auger hood right (optional)

9 Indicator lamp engine oil pressure

10 Charge pilot lamp

11 Indicator lamp cooling water temperature

Pos: 64.49.5 /BA/Kabine/Schalter konsole/Betätigung Freig abeschal ter ( 2012-08-08 11:37:12) @ 0\mod_1195717535303_78.docx @ 2202 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.1 Actuating release switches

1

1

2

Fig. 50:

Pos: 64.49.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Locked release switch

Effect: Release switches cannot be activated.

• To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2) forward and press the release switch.

70

Pos: 64.49.7 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Straß e/F eld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.2 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 64.49.8 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Stell ung Fr eigabeschalter bei Straß enfahrt (2012-08- 06 13:27:39) @ 0\mod_1196320338201_78.docx @ 6332 @ @ 1

Danger! - Release switches for road travel not in position (I) "Road travel"

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The road/field release switch must be in position "I" for road travel.

• This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.

Pos: 64.49.9 /BA/Kabine/Schalter konsole/Freigabeschalter Straße/Fel d (2012- 08- 16 09:57:38) @ 0\mod_1195717693209_78.docx @ 2221 @ @ 1

1 II

Cabin

I

Fig. 51

The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from road travel to field operation and vice versa.

- Road travel

- Field mode

Pos: 64.49.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Depending on the position of the "Road/field" release switch, the "Road travel or field mode" basic screen appears in the Info Centre.

71

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.11 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Fr eigabeschalter Autopilot / - optional ( 2012-08-16 11:43:16) @ 0\mod_1195717962350_78.docx @ 2240 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional

1 II

I

Fig. 52:

Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the autopilot function.

Note -

• Autopilot is only available in Field mode with the travelling gear turned on

• The road/field release switch must be active in field operation and the travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

- Autopilot off

- Autopilot released

Pos: 64.49.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note -

• For further information, please consult the operating instruction "Autopilot Brief

Introduction" included with delivery

72

Pos: 64.49.13 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Fr eigabeschalter Feststellbr emse (2012- 08- 06 14:04:57) @ 0\mod_1195718259850_78.docx @ 2259 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.4 Release switch - holding brake

Fig. 53:

Pos: 64.49.14 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note -

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

• The holding brake is applied automatically when the ignition is switched off.

Cabin

73

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.15 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFr eigabeschalter Fahrantri eb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.5 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 64.49.16 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Gefahr - Ungewolltes bewegen der Maschi ne (2012-08-06 14:44:16) @ 0\mod_1196319463264_78.docx @ 6313 @ @ 1

Danger! -

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• No persons may be present in the direct hazardous area of the machine when the travelling gear release switch is actuated!

• Always remove the ignition key before leaving the cabin.

To turn off the machine:

• Activate the parking brake switch; move the travelling gear switch (1) to position off (I).

Pos: 64.49.17 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Fr eigabeschalter Fahr antri eb (2012-08-16 10:37:06) @ 0\mod_1195720600131_78.docx @ 2278 @ @ 1

1 II

I

Fig. 54:

When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated, the travelling gear is released .

- Travelling gear off

- Travelling gear on

Pos: 64.49.18 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note -

• When the travelling gear is switched off (position II), the mowing unit drive cannot be switched on.

74

Pos: 64.49.19 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/T aste Achstr ennung @ 0\mod_1195722759115_78.docx @ 2297 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.6 Axle separation key

Cabin

Fig. 55:

Actuating the axle separation key switches axle separation on or off.

Pos: 64.49.20 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Axle separation does not turn on

• Axle separation can only be activated in drive level 1 (field mode).

• When activating the axle separation, the maximum top speed is 14 km/h (instead of 19 km/h).

• If the axle separation is switched when travelling faster than 14 km/h, the electronics prevent the axle separation from being activated. Only after the speed has been reduced to below 14 km/h, are the electronics, the valves, and the axle separation activated.

• Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation switched on

• Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle separation switched off

75

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.21 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Kontrollleuchten Bild BM 420 @ 49\mod_1287064818000_78.docx @ 464765 @ @ 1

Fig.56

Pos: 64.49.22 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Kontrollleuchte M otoröldr uck (2012-08-06 16:00:06) @ 85\mod_1319112649093_78.docx @ 737198 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.7 Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure

Caution! - The pilot lamp (1) “Engine oil pressure” lights up

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Switch off engine immediately

• Remedy the malfunction

Pos: 64.49.23 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Kontrollleuchte Ladekontr ollleuchte BM 420/BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271763780008_78.docx @ 372751 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.8 Charge Indicator Lamp

The charge indicator lamp (2) will light up if the output voltage of the three-phase generator is not sufficient to charge the batteries.

• Check the cables and connections on the three-phase generator and on the battery.

• Check the V-belt on the three-phase generator.

Pos: 64.49.24 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Kontrollleuchte Kühl wassertemper atur @ 348 \mod_1435748894587_78.docx @ 2618362 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.9 Cooling Water Temperature Warning Light

Pos: 64.49.25 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution! - Warning light (3) “Cooling water temperature” lights up

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Allow the engine to idle without load.

• Switch off the engine after the engine has cooled down.

• Eliminate the fault.

76

Pos: 64.49.26 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Z ündschl oss BM 420/500 @ 147\mod_1361177933788_78.docx @ 1318972 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.10 Ignition lock

Pos: 64.49.27 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 57

The ignition lock (1) has four positions:

- Off

- Electric circuit for electronics is switched on

The ignition is switched on

-Start position

Cabin

77

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/Zigar ettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose @ 42\mod_1272437710878_78.docx @ 377567 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.11 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket

Pos: 64.49.29 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Achtung ( 2012-08-06 16:37:09) @ 42\mod_1272438967737_78.docx @ 377642 @ @ 1

Caution! - Hot cigarette lighter!

Effect: Burns

• Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle.

• Never hold onto the cigarette lighter (1) when it is pushed in.

Pos: 64.49.30 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Zig arettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Bild BM 420/500 @ 83\mod_1317732783534_78.docx @ 730557 @ @ 1

Fig. 58

Pos: 64.49.31 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Zig arettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose T ext @ 0 \mod_1195725058068_78.docx @ 2355 @ @ 1

Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required temperature is reached the insert will come out by itself.

The socket (2) can be used to connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a maximum of

10 amperes. When the engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the specified plug to connect accessory units.

Pos: 64.49.32 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Steckdose 12 V Hi nweis BM 420/500 @ 42\mod_1272440213768_78.docx @ 377745 @ @ 1

Note

An additional 12-V socket is located in the driver‟s cab on the right next to the passenger seat facing in the direction of travel.

Pos: 64.49.33 /BA/Kabi ne/Diag nosestecker (ISO- Bus) @ 83\mod_1317733119227_78.docx @ 730585 @ 2 @ 1

7.16 Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus)

Pos: 64.49.34 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

A diagnostics socket (3) (ISO-Bus) is located additionally in direction of travel right next to the passenger seat.

78

Pos: 64.49.35 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Di agnosesteckdose / U SB- Anschl uss BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271765654040_78.docx @ 372900 @ 3 @ 1

7.16.1 Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection

Cabin

Fig. 59

• CAN interface (1)

• USB connection (2)

Pos: 64.49.36 /BA/Kabi ne/Schalter konsole/Hi nweis CAN-Di agnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbri ngungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

79

Cabin

Pos: 64.51.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ultifunktionshebel @ 184\mod_1378997406387_78.docx @ 1587556 @ 2 @ 1

7.17 Multi-Function Lever

Pos: 64.51.2 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/N ur i m F eldbetrieb @ 184\mod_1378997469830_78.docx @ 1587584 @ @ 1

In field mode only

Pos: 64.51.3 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/M ultifunktionshebel BM 420/500 N EU T eil 1 Bil d @ 184\mod_1378997526285_78.docx @ 1587612 @ @ 1

2

3

1

16

24

10

15

25

11

9

4

5

6

8

12

7

19

20

21

Pos: 64.51.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 60

13 14

17

22

23

18a 18b

BM 500 0107

80

Pos: 64.51.5 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/M ultifunktionshebel BM 420 N EU T eil 1 Tabelle @ 184\mod_1378902502789_78.docx @ 1582635 @ @ 1 1

2

3

5

4

7

6

8

Switching off all mowing unit drives

Bringing up pre-setting “I” cutting height (option)

Bringing up pre-setting “II” cutting height (option)

Folding down / lowering mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Folding down /lowering mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Lifting front mowing unit (headland position = transport position)

9

Folding up both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lifting all the mowing units

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

10

Folding down both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lowering all the mowing units

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Pos: 64.51.6 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/M ultifunktionshebel BM 420 N EU T eil 2 @ 184 \mod_1378903051767_78.docx @ 1582684 @ @ 1

11 Lower front mower

12 Additional function for keys "4 to 11"

13 Not assigned

14 Not assigned

15 Activation key for Autopilot (optional)

16 Not assigned

17 Additional function: Mowing units – release

18a Not assigned

18b Not assigned

19 Increase engine speed inching until nominal speed is reached

20 Switch from nominal speed to idle speed and vice versa

21 Reduce engine speed inching until idle speed

22 Not assigned

23 Cross switch lever

24 Sideshift right (optional)

25 Sideshift left (optional)

Pos: 64.51.7 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/Hi nweis di e T asten (5,7 und 8) haben 2 Schaltstufen. @ 346\mod_1434953803267_78.docx @ 2610856 @ @ 1

Cabin

Pos: 64.51.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The keys (5, 7 and 8) have two shift steps, key (9) can optionally be equipped with two shift steps, as well.

• By pressing a key to the first shift step, the mower is raised incrementally (as long as the key is held down) from working position to headland position.

• By pressing a key once to the second shift step, the mower is raised automatically from working position into headland position.

81

Cabin

Pos: 64.51.9 /BA/Kabine/M ultifunktionshebel Bi GM/N EUE Ausführ ung/M ultifunktionshebel BM 420/500 F ortsetzung @ 41\mod_1271256276293_78.docx @ 369225 @ 34 @ 1

7.17.1

7.17.1.1

Multi-Function Lever (Continued)

Driving

15

16

Pos: 64.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.61

15 Actuation key for travelling gear

16 Selector switch for acceleration ramp

A Acceleration (in forward travel) / Deceleration (in reverse) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

B - Multi-function lever – central position

C - Acceleration (in reverse) / Deceleration (in forward travel) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

D - Deceleration to 0 km/h / Fast reversing with actuation key (15) pressed (in field operation only)

E - Multi-function lever – central position

F - Switch on cruise control / Save current speed for cruise control – press activation key (15) and rotate multi-function lever in direction F

G - Without (17) key pressed, switch off left mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on left mower drive

H - Central position

J - Without (17) key pressed, switch off right mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on right mower drive

K - Without (17) key pressed, switch off front mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on front mower drive

L - Central position

M - Without (17) key pressed, switch off all mower drives / with (17) key pressed, switch on all mower drives

82

Pos: 64.53.1 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/Klimatr oni k / H eizung Ü bersicht (2012-08- 09 09:35:28) @ 0\mod_1195728661475_78.docx @ 2453 @ 23 @ 1

7.18

7.18.1

Cabin

Klimatronik / heating

Control and display elements

The Klimatronik is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabs. The driver‟s work is made easier through clear, intuitive control of all tasks and optimum climate control in the driver‟s cab.

Note

If the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automatically performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

Fig. 62

Key function key

1  Key to switch air conditioning on and off

2  Key to adjust the desired cab temperature upward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Up"

3  Key to adjust the desired cab temperature downward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Down"

4  Key to switch the controller on and off

5  Key to switch the evaporator fan speed Manual / Automatic

6  Key to switch REHEAT mode on and off (demoisturising the cab air)

7  Covered key to switch the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit

83

Cabin

LCD function of LCD display

Pos: 64.53.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 63

8  Icon indicates REHEAT mode

9  Icon indicates air conditioning

10  Icon indicates fully automatic mode is turned on

11  Bar indicates fan speed in manual mode

12  Icon indicates manual fan mode

13  4-place seven segment display shows setpoint value or error code

14  Icon indicates unit of measure for temperature (°)

15  Indicates the icon for vehicle cab

84

Pos: 64.53.3 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/Anl age ei nschalten (2012- 08- 09 09:42:21) @ 0\mod_1195729216365_78.docx @ 2491 @ 33 @ 1

7.18.2

7.18.3

Operation

Switching on the System

Cabin

Fig. 64

Press the key

Note

After the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self test and the software version is displayed for about 5 seconds.

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 seconds (for example 6 operating hours).

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Pos: 64.53.4 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/Einstell en der gewünschten Kabi nentemper atur @ 0\mod_1195729761475_78.docx @ 2510 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.4 Setting the Desired Cab Temperature

Pos: 64.53.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 65

The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automatic mode.

To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press the value appears in the display. (press key 5 x) key until the desired

85

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.6 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/Klimabetrieb Ei n- / Ausschalten @ 0\mod_1195730018068_78.docx @ 2529 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.5 Switch air conditioning On / Off

Fig. 66

You can switch on the air conditioning with the key.

Air conditioning is now turned on; icon indicates air conditioning.

The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

Pos: 64.53.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the icon disappears.

key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The

86

Pos: 64.53.8 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/R EHEAT - Betrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 348\mod_1435824868528_78.docx @ 2620381 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.6 Switching REHEAT Mode On/Off

Cabin

Fig. 67

REHEAT mode = (demoisturize cabin air)

Switching on the REHEAT mode:

• Press the key.

The icon shows REHEAT mode in the display.

In REHEAT mode:

• The compressor is permanently switched on to demoisturize cabin air.

• The evaporator fan speed is 100%.

• The evaporator fan speed can be reduced manually (refer to chapter “Manual Setting of

Evaporator Fan Speed”).

• The control unit switches heating on if necessary. This prevents that the cabin temperature is changed.

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.

Switching off REHEAT mode:

• Press key again.

Pos: 64.53.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The REHEAT mode is switched off. The icon will no longer be displayed.

87

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.10 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlag e/H eizung/Manuell es Einstell en der Ver dampferlüfter drehzahl ( 2012-08-09 09:53:31) @ 0\mod_1195733653506_78.docx @ 2567 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speed

Fig. 68

Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with the key.

The manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bar display (full bar display = 100%). The icon no longer appears.

Fan flashes for 5 seconds. During this time the fan speed can be increased with the key or lowered with the key in increments of 10%.

Note

The lowest fan speed that can be set is 30% (three bars are displayed).

Pos: 64.53.11 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the and

key twice reactivates AUTO mode. The

icons are no longer displayed.

; the

88

Pos: 64.53.12 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlag e/H eizung/U mschal ten der Temper aturanzeige i n ° Fahrenheit @ 0\mod_1195734049209_78.docx @ 2586 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit

Cabin

Fig. 69

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.

Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the

Fahrenheit.

key as well. The display switches to °

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.

Pressing the (8) key and

Pos: 64.53.13 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlag e/H eizung/Anzeige von Störungen i m Display (2012-08-09 10:00:52) @ 0\mod_1195734281959_78.docx @ 2605 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.9

key again switches the display back to ° Celsius.

Showing Faults in the Display

Error code (F0)´

Fig. 70

Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator ( ).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

89

Cabin

Error code (FI)

Pos: 64.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig 71

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The control is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

90

Pos: 64.55 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eizung/Verstell bar e Lüfterdüsen BM 420/500 (2012-08-09 10:14:03) @ 42\mod_1272517641193_78.docx @ 378245 @ 2 @ 1

7.19 Adjustable Fan Nozzles

Cabin

Pos: 64.56 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.72

Fan nozzles (1), adjustable

Note

Set the fan nozzles in such a way that the panes do not mist up.

91

Cabin

Pos: 64.57 /BA/Kabine/R adi oeinbau ( 2012-08-09 10:16:20) @ 0\mod_1195735722428_78.docx @ 2644 @ 2 @ 1

7.20 Radio

1

BM 400 0215

Pos: 65 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 73:

1  ISO compartment for radio

Note

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

92

Pos: 66.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Info-Center „EasyT ouch“ @ 0\mod_1195737815318_78.docx @ 2663 @ 1 @ 1

8

Pos: 66.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.1.1 Overview

Pos: 66.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Info-Center Easy T ouch Ü bersicht @ 149\mod_1361778360457_78.docx @ 1335125 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 74

• I = Display

• II = Keys

Pos: 66.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• V = Menu key

to (1 - 8)

• III = Keys to (A - D)

• IV = Rotary potentiometer

93

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Allgemeine Beschr eibung der T asten_Drehpoti_M enütaste @ 0\mod_1195738501881_78.docx @ 2701 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 75

The Info Centre informs you about the current actions and the current operating condition of the machine. You can use the Info Centre to make settings for the machine and start or stop actions. Its main components are:

Keys 1-8

Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no function.

Keys A-D

The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.

Rotary potentiometer (1)

The rotary potentiometer has two functions:

1  The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change settings and to select the desired menu in the menu level.

2  Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and saves the settings.

Menu key (2)

You can use the key with the rotary potentiometer to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to the basic screen.

94

Pos: 66.7.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Display Beschrei bung @ 0\mod_1195739127068_78.docx @ 2740 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 76

Display

(screen display)

The display is divided up into the following sections:

Status line (I):

• Time, number of errors, status display of mowing units

Information section:

• Engine information (II)

• Travelling gear information (III)

Pos: 66.7.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Infor mationsber eich BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404219424823_78.docx @ 2061256 @ 2 @ 1

• Settings (IV and V)

• Drive information (VI) (only in Field mode basic screen)

8.2 Information Section

Basic screen road travel Basic screen field mode

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 66.7.3 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 77

After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / Field" release switch, the basic screen "Road Travel" or "Field Mode" appears in the display.

95

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.7.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Inf obereiche/Statuszeile BiG M 500 ÜS/Bil d @ 269\mod_1401983199919_78.docx @ 2036980 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.1 Status line (I)

Fig. 78

Pos: 66.7.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Statuszeile T ext BiG M 420/500 @ 269\mod_1401962457652_78.docx @ 2036442 @ @ 1

Symbol Designation

Error

Error central lubrication system

Description

– At least one error has occurred.

You can find the number of the present errors in front of the symbol.

– For error remedy, refer to operating instructions of central lubrication system.

Pos: 66.7.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Statuszeile T abell e Bi G M 420 @ 270\mod_1402050620751_78.docx @ 2037801 @ @ 1

Headland Position

Working position

Folded up

Lateral mowing unit left

Front mowing unit Lateral mowing unit right

Drive off drive on Drive off drive on Drive off drive on

Pos: 66.7.7 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

96

Pos: 66.7.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Infober eich Motor daten BiG M 420 @ 131\mod_1348468320098_78.docx @ 1165550 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.2 Motor Data (II) Information Section

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig.79

1080

Engine speed

Road mode: 850 - 1650 rpm

Field mode: 850 - 1900 rpm

Engine capacity as %

Pos: 66.7.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschrei bung Infobereiche/Infober eich Motor daten T eil3 Störleuchten Motorfehl er BM420/500 und BiG X @ 115\mod_1339684399818_78.docx @ 1012501 @ @ 1 Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault)

Stop immediately!

Inform the KRONE dealer or the KRONE customer service

Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)

Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible

Pos: 66.7.10 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich M otordaten Teil 3 Störleuchten SCR-System weiß @ 175\mod_1372228621064_78.docx @ 1497035 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.7.11 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich M otordaten Teil 2 BM420/500 @ 131\mod_1348469206154_78.docx @ 1165699 @ @ 1

Cooling water temperature display.

Pos: 66.7.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling water temperature display temperature reaches the critical range.

changes to yellow if the cooling water

Fuel gauge (1 diesel / 2 urea solution)

Diesel fuel reserve display (appears in the display if the tank contains less than 10 per cent of the diesel fuel)

Urea solution reserve display

(appears in the display if the tank contains less than 20 per cent of the urea solution)

(Flashes if the tank contains less than 10 per cent of the urea solution)

97

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.7.13.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/Infober eich Fahrantri ebsdaten (III) Bil d BM 400 @ 29\mod_1251200813705_78.docx @ 281322 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.3 Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

Fig. 80

Pos: 66.7.13.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/T empomat @ 29\mod_1251199726596_78.docx @ 281172 @ @ 1

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control operation in km/h.

Pos: 66.7.13.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/F ahrgeschwi ndigkeit @ 29\mod_1251199875752_78.docx @ 281197 @ @ 1

Travelling speed

Road mode: 0 - 40 km/h

Pos: 66.7.13.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/Beschl eunigungsrampe @ 29\mod_1251199880768_78.docx @ 281222 @ @ 1

Acceleration ramp

Cruise control inactive

Field mode: 0 - 19 km/h

2 = ...

3 = ...

= Highest acceleration ramp 1 = Lowest acceleration ramp

Pos: 66.7.13.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/F ahrtrichtung @ 29\mod_1251199885768_78.docx @ 281247 @ @ 1

Direction of travel

Pos: 66.7.13.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/Antri ebsart @ 29\mod_1251199893346_78.docx @ 281272 @ @ 1

= Forward travel

Type of drive

= Neutral (stopped) = Reverse travel

Axle sep. active mode)

(only possible in Field

Parking brake is applied

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems.

Pos: 66.7.13.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/Bergab - M odus @ 70\mod_1305726024726_78.docx @ 639629 @ @ 1

Downhill mode

The downhill mode symbol indicates to the driver that the speed of the machine is automatically restricted when travelling downhill.

Pos: 66.7.13.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich F ahrantriebsdaten (III)/Autopilot @ 142\mod_1358153665545_78.docx @ 1266914 @ @ 1

Autopilot (Optionally Only in Field Mode)

Pos: 66.7.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Autopilot active Autopilot ready Autopilot inactive

98

Pos: 66.7.15 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Einstell ung en @ 0\mod_1195800021723_78.docx @ 2862 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.4 Information section of settings (IV and V)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 81

(see Chapter "Settings").

Pos: 66.7.16 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschr eibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Antriebsdaten BiG M 420 @ 131\mod_1348472047808_78.docx @ 1165776 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.5 Information Section Drive Information (VI)

Fig. 82

Drive information appears only in the "Field Mode" basic screen.

970 rpm

Speed drive left

1070 rpm

Speed drive front

970 rpm

Speed drive right

Pos: 66.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

970 rpm

Speed of left auger Speed of right auger

970 rpm

99

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Schnellzugrifftasten am Grundbil d @ 0 \mod_1195803032020_78.docx @ 2907 @ 2 @ 1

8.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen

The quick access keys can be used to perform functions directly from the basic screen or to bring up the appropriate submenu.

Pos: 66.9.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare Schni tthöhe Seite 1/2 Bild BiG M 420 @ 132\mod_1348809983004_78.docx @ 1167746 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.1 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional)

Fig. 83

Pos: 66.9.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare Schni tthöhe Seite 1/2 T ext BiG M 420/500 @ 57\mod_1296204792046_78.docx @ 549897 @ @ 1

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode".

Pos: 66.9.4 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the key or to display the hydraulically adjustable cutting height.

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" appears.

1.

 = saved pre-set values

A and

2. = saved pre-set values

3. = current cutting height values

You can use the

B keys to save pre-settings for cutting height.

= Save pre-set 1 cutting height

= Save pre-set 2 cutting height

100

Pos: 66.9.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare Schni tthöhe Seite 2/2 BiG M 500 @ 81\mod_1316168422535_78.docx @ 715843 @ @ 1

Activating keys 1-8 sets the angle of the mowing units.

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 84

Inclination Mowing units lateral left

Front mowing unit

Lateral mowing units right

Mowing unit all reduce

Key Key Key Key increase

Key Key Key Key

Note

If all mowing units are selected, the angle of the front mowing unit is set first. Then the lateral mowing units are automatically adjusted to the value of the front mowing unit.

• Press the key to display the basic screen.

Pos: 66.9.6 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

101

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare seitliche F ederentl astung T1 BM 400/420 @ 51 \mod_1288093469796_78.docx @ 477992 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional)

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"

Lateral spring compensation can be used to adjust the ground pressure of the lateral mowing units to local conditions. In order to protect the sward, the load on the lateral mowing units must be relieved so that they do not jump when mowing, yet do not leave any brush marks on the ground.

Note

To set the pressure, lower both lateral mowing units to the ground and set the front axle to working position.

Pos: 66.9.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare seitliche F ederentl astung T2 Bild BM 420 @ 274 \mod_1404218575813_78.docx @ 2061136 @ @ 1

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 85

Pos: 66.9.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch ei nstellbare seitliche F ederentl astung T3 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093474375_78.docx @ 478018 @ @ 1

• Pressing the compensation.

5 or

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" appears.

(1) = saved values of pre-setting I

(2) = saved values of pre-setting II

(3) = current values of spring compensation

You can use the

A and

B keys to save pre-settings (I and II) for hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure).

I = Save pre-setting I

II = Save pre-setting II

• Activating the key for

Pos: 66.9.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating the key for

brings up pre-setting (I).

brings up pre-setting (II).

102

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.11 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulisch einstell bar e seitliche Federentlastung T 4 BM 400/420 @ 274\mod_1404283222140_78.docx @ 2062395 @ @ 1

Note

Different lateral mower weights for mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping

(BSS) Effect: Different group pressure.

With option "Mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping", the weight of the right mowing unit is greater than the weight of the left mowing unit. This is caused by the movement of the drive. Accordingly the compensation pressure must be set about 5 bar higher for the right mowing unit.

Fig. 86:

Activating keys 1-4 increases or reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units.

Pressure Mowing units lateral left Mowing units lateral right reduce

Key Key

Pos: 66.9.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 increase

Key

High compensation pressure =

Lower compensation pressure =

Key lower ground pressure higher ground pressure

103

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendaten-Zähl er @ 274\mod_1404283801560_78.docx @ 2062594 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.3 Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“

Fig. 87

Appears in the basic screen “Road Operation and Field Mode”

Pos: 66.9.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press

1

2

3

4

key under the softkey for bringing up the customer counter

Customer data counter

Designation

Customer dataset

Status display

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

Counter (active counters are highlighted in colour)

Operating hours counter (h)

Working hours counter (h)

Odometer (km)

Surface counter ha Surface in hectares

Øha / h Average surface hectares per hour

Fuel consumption

L/h

Ø L/ha

L

4.1

4.2

Current average consumption

Current average consumption per hectare

Absolute fuel consumption

Display information of the currently active counter

Display of the activated customer counter (for example Client 1)

Selected surface counter

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

Freely usable numeric input field (for example to assign several different cultivated areas to the customer record)

104

Pos: 66.9.15 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendatensatz ( 1) ändern bzw. neuanleg en @ 291\mod_1410761146365_78.docx @ 2297135 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.4 Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

1

7 8

2

B C D

BM4000109_2

Fig. 88

A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select the customer record you want to modify; select a free customer record to create a new entry with the and highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field. keys.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is

• You can change the customer record or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change.

Pos: 66.9.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

105

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.17 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Z ähler ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 274\mod_1404292575380_78.docx @ 2063551 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.4.1 Switching the counter on or off

Fig. 89

• Use the

• Activating the

Pos: 66.9.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the and keys to turn the counter on and off . key brings up the basic screen. key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

106

Pos: 66.9.19 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/N utzfläche eines Kundenzähl ers l öschen @ 274\mod_1404291551680_78.docx @ 2063401 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.4.2 Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 90

It is possible to assign up to 10 areas to each customer counter. However, it is also possible to select just one area. The counters shown in (3) are assigned to the selected area.

You can either delete individual areas or all areas of a customer counter. When deleting the area, all counters displayed in (3) are reset to zero.

Pos: 66.9.20 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/N utzfläche für einen Kundensatz zuordnen bzw. auswähl en @ 175\mod_1372325259523_78.docx @ 1499449 @ @ 1

Assigning or selecting the area for a customer record

The selection of the right customer record is a prerequisite for this.

• Press

Pos: 66.9.21 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einzel ne Nutzfl ächen eines Kundenzähl ers l öschen @ 175\mod_1372324988934_78.docx @ 1499421 @ @ 1

or key until the area appears in the input field (1).

Deleting single areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press the or key until the area to be deleted appears in the input field (1).

• Press appears.

key under the softkey to delete the area, an information message “Delete?”

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

• Press key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

Pos: 66.9.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Repeat deletion of the counters for each created area, if necessary.

107

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.23 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Alle Nutzflächen ei nes Kundenzähl ers löschen @ 175\mod_1372324755685_78.docx @ 1499393 @ @ 1

Deleting all areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press or key until the sigma sign ( ) appears in the input field (1).

• To delete all areas, press all areas?” appears.

key under the softkey , an information message “Delete

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

• Press

Pos: 66.9.24 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundenzähl er exporti eren @ 340\mod_1432023691276_78.docx @ 2580449 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.4.3

key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

Exporting Customer Counter

• Insert USB flash drive into the USB connection in the cabin.

The USB connection is located between driver's seat and switch panel (refer to “Switch panel” in chapter “Cabin”).

Fig. 91

If the terminal has detected the USB flash drive, icon (1) is displayed in the customer counter.

• Actuate key to export all customer counters (ten customers with ten fields each) completely onto the USB flash drive.

The file on the USB flash drive is called “…_CLientCounter.csv”.

Pos: 66.9.25 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Wechsel n zu den allgemeinen Z ähl er (Maschi nendaten-Zähler) @ 29\mod_1251278517328_78.docx @ 282578 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.4.4 Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters)

Pos: 66.9.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the menu. key under the softkey brings up the "Counters and machine data"

For more information see Section "Counters and Machine Data"

108

Pos: 66.9.27 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulische Achsfederung Str aß enfahrt BM 420 @ 132\mod_1348825382002_78.docx @ 1168901 @ 34 @ 1

8.3.5

8.3.5.1

Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension"

From the "Road travel" basic screen

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 92

When travelling on public roads, the front axle must be lowered to reach a transport height of max. 4 m.

• Activating the key lowers axle suspension with inching.

109

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.29 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulische Achsfederung Grundbil d Bild BM 420 @ 132\mod_1348825737551_78.docx @ 1168930 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.5.2 From the "Field mode" basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 93

Pos: 66.9.30 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/H ydr aulische Achsfederung Grundbil d T ext BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288095723421_78.docx @ 478122 @ @ 1

• Activating the key brings up the "Hydraulic axle suspension" submenu.

The "Hydraulic axle suspension" menu appears.

• Activating the or key for lifting axle suspension. (inching)

• Activating the or key to approaching mowing position. (inching)

• Activating the or key for

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

lowering axle suspension. (inching)

= Sensor alive (axle suspension is located under the working position)

= Sensor not alive (axle suspension is located above the working position)

• Activating the

Pos: 66.9.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the

key brings up the basic screen.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

110

Pos: 66.9.32 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einstell ung en Maschi ne BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404307912456_78.docx @ 2064683 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.6 Quick access "Machine settings"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 94

Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode"

Pos: 66.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating the key brings up menu level "Machine setting".

The "Machine settings" menu appears.

Note

For more information, see chapter "Machine settings"

111

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM enüebene @ 80\mod_1315900872940_78.docx @ 708317 @ 2 @ 1

8.4 Menu level

Pos: 66.12 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/M enüebene Kurzüberblick BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404367907320_78.docx @ 2065265 @ @ 1

Short Overview

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

1

Settings

1-1

Parameter

1-1-1

Work

1-2

Setting Machine

1-3

Units

1-4

Language

1-5

Display

1-5-1

Contrast

1-5-2

Beeper

1-5-4

Direction of Rotation

1-5-5

Configuring Status Line

1-6

Date/Time

1-9

Address Owner

112

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

2

Counter

3

Maintenance

3-1

Calibrating Cutting Height

3-3

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System

3-5

Manual Mode (only accessible for technicians)

4

Service

4-1

Diagnostics

4-1-1

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation Optional

4-1-4

Cutting Height Optional

4-1-5

Swath Hood Optional

4-1-6

Sideshift Optional

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps Optional

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

113

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

4-1-10

Work

4-1-11

CAN Bus

4-1-12

Traction Drive

4-1-13

Electronics

4-1-14

Diesel Engine

4-1-15

Multi-Function Lever

4-1-16

Control Unit Console

4-1-17

Terminal

114

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Pos: 66.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

4-2

Error List

4-3

Fitter's Section

4-4

Information

4-4-1

Joystick

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Display Software Packages

5

Basic Screen

115

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.14 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/M enüebene aufr ufen @ 0\mod_1196058555821_78.docx @ 3161 @ 3 @ 1

8.4.1 Bringing up a Menu Level

Fig. 95

• You can bring up a menu level with the

The display indicates the menu level.

The menu level is divided into five main menus: key on the rotary potentiometer.

= Main menu 1 "Settings"

= Main menu 2 "Counters"

= Main menu 3 "Maintenance"

= Main menu 4 "Service"

= Main menu 5 "Basic screen"

Pos: 66.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can close the menu level that was called with on the rotary potentiometer.

116

Pos: 66.16.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstell ung en/Hauptmenü 1 „Ei nstellungen“ @ 89\mod_1322031869516_78.docx @ 757694 @ 2 @ 1

8.5 Main menu 1 "Settings"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 96

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".

The main menu, "Settings", is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

= Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"

= Menu 1-3 "Units"

= Menu 1-4 "Language"

= Menu 1-5 "Display"

= Menu 1-6 "Date/time"

= Menu 1-9 "Owner's address"

Pos: 66.16.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

117

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstell ung en/1- 1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Menü 1-1 Parameter BiG M 400 @ 9\mod_1219816874593_78.docx @ 122840 @ 2 @ 1

8.6 Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

Fig. 97:

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-1 "Parameters" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the menu level "Parameters".

The "Parameter" menu is divided into two sub-menus:

= Menu 1-1-10 "Work parameters"

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired menu.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the parameters of the selected menu to be displayed or

Pos: 66.16.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

118

Pos: 66.16.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstell ung en/1- 1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Ei ngabe von Parametern @ 41\mod_1271221822261_78.docx @ 368585 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.1 Entering parameters

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 98

Note

As long as data is being read, the current process can be stopped by pressing the key next to the softkey.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit the input field and the value that was entered is applied.

Note

To apply the default setting values, press the key next to the softkey.

• To jump back to the screen that was previously displayed, press the softkey. key next to the

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.16.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For additional information on the individual parameters, please refer to the parameter list in appendix "Parameter List".

119

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Einstell ung M aschine BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404369456555_78.docx @ 2065523 @ 2 @ 1

8.7 Menu 12 „Machine Setting“

Fig. 99

Main menu 1 “Settings” is displayed.

• Select menu 1-3 “Machine Setting” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine Setting".

The “Machine Setting” menu is divided into 2 pages:

Pos: 66.16.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/M enüer kär ung für Seite 1 bis 3 @ 51\mod_1288099830734_78.docx @ 478252 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 3:

Pos: 66.16.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 M enüer kär ung T asten Einstell ung M aschine @ 28\mod_1250603053175_78.docx @ 275901 @ @ 1

• Press the key to bring up the previous page of the "Machine setting" menu.

• Press the key to bring up the next page of the "Machine setting" menu.

• Activating the key brings up the basic screen.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 66.16.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

120

Pos: 66.16.11 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite1/3) @ 51\mod_1288102051312_78.docx @ 478382 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 1/3)

Pos: 66.16.12 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 1a) BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404371138407_78.docx @ 2065775 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 100

1) Selection between and

CV = tines conditioner

CRI= roller conditioner

2) Setting for lifting mechanism, front axle on headland

Front axle can only be raised in manual mode.

Semi-automatic lifting:

The semi-automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected.

Pos: 66.16.13 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Automatic lifting:

The automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position,

• as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected or

• as soon as a mowing unit is lowered from the headland position into the operating position. In addition, the automatic lifting mechanism lifts the front axle again as soon as the “Lifting all Mowing Units" function is actuated on the multi-function lever.

121

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.14 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Einstell ung F eder entl astung (3)_Überschnitt einstell en ( 4) @ 279\mod_1405346789463_78.docx @ 2149975 @ @ 1

Fig. 101

3) Setting spring compensation (optional)

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched on.

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched off.

4) Adjusting the overcut in cm / inch

Pos: 66.16.15 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Auswahl von Mähwer ks- Zusatzausr üstung en (optional) (5) @ 174\mod_1371189296325_78.docx @ 1486835 @ @ 1

5) Selection of mowing unit additional equipment (optional)

Both augers selected

Only right hand auger selected

Only left hand auger selected

No auger selected

Hay hood selected

Pos: 66.16.16 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 H ydraulisch einstellbar e Schnitthöhe ein-/ausschal ten ( optional) ( 6) @ 174\mod_1371190175220_78.docx @ 1486874 @ @ 1

6) Switch hydraulically adjustable cutting height on and off (optional) hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched on. hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched off.

Pos: 66.16.17 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

122

Pos: 66.16.18 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite2/3) @ 51\mod_1288101419671_78.docx @ 478330 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.16.19 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 2/3) Bi G M 420 Fr ontkl appen / H ang ausgleich @ 132\mod_1349083231605_78.docx @ 1169526 @ @ 1

Fig. 102

Setting the Hydraulic Front Flaps (Optional)

Symbol Designation

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched on

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched off

Pos: 66.16.20 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Setting the Sideshift (optional)

Symbol Designation

Sideshift switched on

Sideshift switched off

Info centre "EasyTouch"

123

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.21 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite3/3) @ 51\mod_1288102821890_78.docx @ 478434 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.16.22 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 Bild F ahrhebel N EU @ 274\mod_1404372998415_78.docx @ 2066114 @ @ 1

Fig.103

Pos: 66.16.23 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Ei nstellung Maschi ne Big M 400/M enü 1- 2 (Seite 3/3) Text BM 420/500 Zeit Wegsteuer ung @ 51\mod_1288100911312_78.docx @ 478304 @ @ 1

1) Setting time / distance control

The following descriptions refer to function (9,10) "Raise/lower all mowing units" on the multifunction lever.

Time control (determines the delay time of lifting or lowering the lateral mowing units to the front mowing unit)

Pos: 66.16.24 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Distance control (determines the distance still to be covered before the lateral mowing units are raised or lowered to the front mowing unit).

2) Input field: Delay time to raise lateral mowing units.

3) Input field: Delay time to lower lateral mowing units.

4) Input field: Distance to be covered before lifting lateral mowing units.

5) Input field: Distance to be covered before lowering lateral mowing units.

124

Pos: 66.16.25 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-3 „Ei nheiten“ @ 0\mod_1197532786335_78.docx @ 24301 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.1 Menu 1-3 "Units"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 104

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-3 "Units" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the selected measuring units. The currently set measuring unit is highlighted in colour.

= Anglo-American units active

= English/American units active

= Metric (SI) units

= Metric (SI) units inactive

Setting the measuring units:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

Pos: 66.16.26 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

125

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.27 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-4 „Sprache“ @ 275\mod_1404374634904_78.docx @ 2066266 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.2 Menu 1-4 "Language"

Fig. 105

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-4 "Language" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the language selection.

Set language

(1) = currently set language

(2)= shows the selected language

• You can select the language you want with the rotary potentiometer.

• To confirm the selection, press the rotary potentiometer.

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.16.28 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again)

126

Pos: 66.16.29 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5 „Displ ay“ @ 89\mod_1322042220039_78.docx @ 758191 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.3 Menu 1-5 "Display"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 106

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-5 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 1-5 "Display".

The "Display" menu is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

= Menu 1-5-2 "Beeper"

= Menu 1-5-4 "Direction of Rotation"

= Menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line"

Pos: 66.16.30 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

127

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.31 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 1 „Kontrast“ @ 9\mod_1219844730062_78.docx @ 124157 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

Fig. 107

You can adjust the brightness of the display in the "Contrast" Diagnostics menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Contrast" setting appears.

= Day design

= Night design

The value after the symbols /

Setting and saving the brightness

indicates the set brightness value.

The higher the value after the / symbols the greater the brightness of the display.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to make the desired selection. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or reduces the value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

Pos: 66.16.32 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

128

Pos: 66.16.33 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 2 Beeper @ 89\mod_1322042675069_78.docx @ 758419 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.5 Menu 1-5-2 Beeper

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pic. 108

The acoustic signal (beeper) for alarm messages, information messages and for pressing a key can be activated and deactivated in this menu. For alarm messages and information messages the duration of the tone can be set additionally.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-2 "Beeper" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display indicates the beeper settings.

= Key pressed

Beeper function

= Alarm Message = Information message

= Beeper inactive = Beeper active

= Beeper limited by time

Activate / deactivate beeper

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired function

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 66.16.34 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

129

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.35 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 2 Beeper zeitlich begrenzen @ 41\mod_1271228361090_78.docx @ 368764 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.6 Beeper limited by time

Fig. 109

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

Pos: 66.16.36 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting (

• Press the rotary potentiometer (a new input field appears).

).

• Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to a new input field. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

130

Pos: 66.16.37 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 4 Dr ehrichtung @ 89\mod_1322043577709_78.docx @ 758566 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 110

The direction of rotation of the rotary potentiometer for scrolling can be changed in this menu.

The rotary potentiometer is set in the factory so that turning it to the left scrolls down and turning it to the right scrolls up (as indicated by the blue arrow) (1).

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-4 "Direction of rotation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows a list for which the direction of rotation can be changed for the rotary potentiometer.

or key to change the direction of rotation for the • Activating the parameter list

• Activating the or key to change the direction of rotation for input fields.

• Activating the or key to change the direction of rotation for menus.

Note

The blue arrow (1) indicates the direction of rotation for the rotary potentiometer to scroll down.

• Pressing the key under the softkey brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 66.16.38 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• To apply the default setting values, press the key under the softkey.

131

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.39 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 5 Statuszeile konfigurier en @ 89\mod_1322043912248_78.docx @ 758654 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.8 Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line

Fig. 111

The first field (1) of the status display for the basic screens "Road travel/Field mode“ can be adjusted individually in this menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The selection options of the displays (2) for the first field (1) of the status line are shown.

Possible displays (2):

= Time

= Time and date

/

= Diesel fuel consumption per hour

/

= Hectares per hour

/

= Diesel fuel consumption per hectare

To change the display for the status line:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired display. The display is highlighted in colour.

• To accept the selected display, press the rotary potentiometer

The display that was just selected now appears in the basic screens

Pos: 66.16.40 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key under the softkey opens the basic screen.

132

Pos: 66.16.41 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-6 „Datum/U hrzeit“ @ 89\mod_1322060573514_78.docx @ 759970 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.9 Menu 1-6 Date/time

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 112

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-6 "Date/time" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the date and the time.

To set date/time

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• Set the desired date/time with the rotary potentiometer.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection field.

Pos: 66.16.42 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

133

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.43 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-9 „Adresse Lohnunter nehmer“ @ 89\mod_1322128074780_78.docx @ 761468 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.10 Menu 1-9 Owner's address

Fig. 113

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-9 "Owner's address" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows the owner's address.

Note

A maximum of 30 characters can be entered in the input field. The information is used each time a print job is sent to the CAN printer. If a line contains no characters (including no spaces), that line will not be considered for printing.

To set the address:

Fig. 114

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field

• You can change the text or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change.

• Pressing the

Pos: 66.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

key under the softkey opens the basic screen

134

Pos: 66.18.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Z ähler/H auptmenü 2 „Z ähler“ @ 275\mod_1404379598824_78.docx @ 2066800 @ 23 @ 1

8.8 Main Menu 2 Counters

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 115

• You can bring up a menu level with the

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters. key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

Counter level (sets)

8.8.1

Pos: 66.18.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= total counter (cannot be deleted)

= counter level 1 (can be deleted)

= counter level 2 (can be deleted)

= counter level 3 (can be deleted)

Machine Data Counter

Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)

= operating hour counter (h)

= working hours counter (h)

= surface counter (ha)

= odometer (both road and field mode)

= fuel consumption (l)

135

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.18.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Z ähler/H auptmenü 2 Löschen der Maschi nendatenzähl er @ 275\mod_1404386973100_78.docx @ 2067159 @ 43 @ 1

8.8.1.1 Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3)

Fig. 116

Machine data for counter levels (sets) 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters.

• Activate the key for or the key to select the counter level (1) to be deleted.

• Pressing the key under the softkey deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.)

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

• Pressing the key under the softkey brings up the basic screen

Switching to Customer DataCounters 8.8.2

Pos: 66.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key under the softkey brings up the "Customer data counter" menu.

For more information, see Section "Customer Data Counters"

136

Pos: 66.20.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3/H auptmenü 3 „ Wartung“ Bi G M 420 @ 275\mod_1404390479600_78.docx @ 2067500 @ 2 @ 1

8.9 Main Menu 3 Maintenance

The “Maintenance” main menu is divided into three menus:

Info centre "EasyTouch"

3-1

Main Menu 3 Maintenance

Designation

Bringing up “Calibrating Cutting Height”

3-3

Bringing up “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System”

3-5

Bringing up Manual Mode (only accessible for technicians)

Fig. 117

Pos: 66.20.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 3 “Maintenance”

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer

137

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K-O/MM enü 3-1 „Kalibrier ung Schnitthöhe“ @ 28\mod_1250833598028_78.docx @ 277855 @ 3 @ 1

8.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"

Pos: 66.20.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schwenken der Mähwer ke @ 28\mod_1250833011700_78.docx @ 277801 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

Pos: 66.20.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Gefahr - U nvor herg esehenes zuschalten von Antrieben @ 28\mod_1250833758403_78.docx @ 277880 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Unexpected switching on of drives

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Observe the following instructions very precisely!

Pos: 66.20.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-1/Menü 3- 1 „Kalibri erung Schnitthöhe“ Bi G M 420 @ 132\mod_1349329326587_78.docx @ 1170854 @ @ 1 The sensors have been pre-adjusted to record cutting height in the factory. Heavy demand and the setting of components may cause an offset in the cutting pattern of the right / left and front mowing unit. If this happens, the sensors must be recalibrated.

• Perform calibration on an even and solid surface.

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch.

• You can use the "Hydraulic Axle Suspension" key to move from the basic screen to mowing position (refer to chapter entitled “Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”).

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Pos: 66.20.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-1/Menü 3- 1 „Kalibri erung all e Mähwer ke auf 0° ei nstellen“ Bild @ 28\mod_1250668612774_78.docx @ 276409 @ @ 1

Adjust all mowing units to 0°.

Fig. 118

Pos: 66.20.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-1/Menü 3- 1 „Kalibri erung Schnitthöhe" Menü aufrufen T ext @ 28\mod_1250669698133_78.docx @ 276434 @ @ 1

To do this:

Pos: 66.20.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the cutting height setting.

138

Pos: 66.20.10 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 1/M enü 3-1 All e Mähwer ke auf 0° ei nstellen ausrichten @ 46\mod_1283317596765_78.docx @ 448365 @ @ 1

Aligning the Mowing Units

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 119

Front mowing unit:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use the

1 or

2 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit right:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use the

3 or

4 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit left:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use the

5 or

6 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

1 2

• Loosen the angle of rotation sensors on the right and left mowing unit and set them in the oblong hole until a value (1) of about 2900 mV to 3100 mV appears in the display

(calibration screen).

• Screw the angle of rotation sensors tightly into place.

Save sensor value (2) for inclination 0°

• Turn the rotary potentiometer to jump to the appropriate input field (2) (the input field is highlighted in colour).

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• When you press the rotary potentiometer again, the value (1) for inclination 0° is applied in the input field (2).

Pos: 66.20.11 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The sensor for the front mowing unit is not adjustable. However, the value must be accepted at this point.

139

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/ISOBUS Lenksystem kalibri eren @ 275\mod_1404397033672_78.docx @ 2067739 @ 2 @ 1

8.10 Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System

WARNING! –

Risk of injury due to the spontaneous movement of parts (e. g. steering axle)

• No persons may remain in the danger zone.

After replacing sensor system and actuator, the ISOBUS steering system must be recalibrated.

The following order must be adhered to for calibrating:

• Calibrate steering angle

• Calibrate steering (valves) (automatically or manually)

• Enter the steering radius

The calibrated values are checked for plausibility. The error message appears next to the calibrated value if a value is outside the valid range. The value cannot be saved.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up the main menus with menu key.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 66.20.12.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/Lenksystem Bild @ 142\mod_1358321317872_78.docx @ 1272443 @ @ 1

Fig. 120

Pos: 66.20.12.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/Lenksystem M enüer klär ung: Lenkwinkelsensor kalibri eren @ 142\mod_1358321797351_78.docx @ 1272472 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos: 66.20.12.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pos. Meaning

Steering angle sensor (The value of the selected steering angle sensor is displayed)

1 Steering angle left

2 Straight-ahead driving

3 Steering angle right

4 Engine speed

140

Pos: 66.20.12.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/Lenkwinkelsensor kalibri eren @ 275\mod_1404727549231_78.docx @ 2071559 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.10.1 Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor

Calibrating Steering Angle Left

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 215-300 for left turn.

The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is smaller than 215.

If the value is larger than 300, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is correctly assembled.

The steering angle sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum left position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Left” with the rotary potentiometer to save the actual value, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Straight-Ahead Driving

When driving straight-ahead, the value for the straight-ahead driving steering angle sensor must be 320 - 420. The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is not within the range

320 - 420.

• Steer the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position to move the steering axle to the centre position.

• Select the input field “Straight-Ahead Driving” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Right

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 450 - 650 for right turn.

If the value is larger than 650, the steering angle sensor must be readjusted.

If the value is smaller than 450, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is installed in a correct way.

The steering sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum right position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Right” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Pos: 66.20.12.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Calibration must be restarted if the steering angle sensor is readjusted during the calibration process.

141

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/Lenkung (Ventile) automatisch kalibri eren Ü S @ 134\mod_1351058496302_78.docx @ 1193325 @ 2 @ 1

8.11 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically

Pos: 66.20.12.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/WARNUN G- Verletzungsgefahr durch Bewegung der Lenkachse @ 134\mod_1351058403021_78.docx @ 1193297 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury due to the movement of the steering axle

The valves are automatically actuated when starting the calibration. The steering axle moves accordingly.

• No persons may remain in the danger zone (steering axle).

Pos: 66.20.12.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 3/Autopilot kalibrier en/Lenkung automatisch kalibri eren Ei nführtext @ 134\mod_1351058338610_78.docx @ 1193269 @ @ 1

The valve currents are recorded by the system and saved during the automatic calibration. The process may take a few minutes. When starting the calibration, the steering is first controlled completely to the right. Then the system increases the valve current for the left valve until the system detects that a rotary movement takes place on the steering axle. Consequently, this current value will be saved as new minimum current. This process is repeated for the right valve.

The calibration will be interrupted as soon as the steering wheel is moved or the driver leaves the seat.

Pos: 66.20.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrier en Bild @ 142\mod_1358322634268_78.docx @ 1272541 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.20.12.11 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 121

142

Pos: 66.20.12.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrier en Menüer klär ung @ 134\mod_1351058120734_78.docx @ 1193213 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos. Meaning

1 Status of the calibration:

Valve Y52 “Steering Left” is calibrated.

Valve Y51 “Steering Right” is calibrated.

The calibration process has been stopped.

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Calibration has been successful and values are saved.

2

An error has occurred.

Error number with symbol .

3

Calibration not running.

Calibration running.

4

Stop the calibration process.

Bring up the previous page.

Pos: 66.20.12.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrier en Vorgang @ 175\mod_1372312811058_78.docx @ 1498534 @ @ 1

Fig. 122 Calibrating ISOBUS steering system Calibrating steering

A prerequisite for calibrating the valves is that the steering angle sensor has been set and calibrated correctly before.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up main menus with menu key .

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Calibrating Steering” menu.

143

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 123

Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone of the steering axle.

• Press

• Press

key for softkey“

key for

“ to start calibration.

to finish calibration process.

Pos: 66.20.12.14 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press key for to bring up the previous view.

After the calibration is complete, the symbol appears for approx. 3 seconds.

144

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrier en Fehlerliste T ext @ 134\mod_1351057864536_78.docx @ 1193157 @ @ 1

If an error occurs during calibration, the calibration process will be interrupted and the corresponding error will be displayed.

Calibrating Steering Error List Automatically

Pos: 66.20.12.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrier en Fehlerliste T abell e @ 134\mod_1351056606429_78.docx @ 1193129 @ @ 1

Meaning Cause / remedy No.

Symbol

1 Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

2

3

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is smaller than the calibrated value “Steering completely left”.

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is bigger than the calibrated value “Steering completely right”.

The valve Y52 “Steering left” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become smaller. However, the sensor value has become bigger.

Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

4

5

6

The valve Y51 “Steering right” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become bigger. However, the sensor value has become smaller.

Although the valve Y52

“Steering left” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

Although the valve Y51

“Steering Right” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The left-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the right.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The right-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the left.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Hydraulic system defective.

• Hydraulic valve Y52 “Steering Left” incorrect.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Hydraulic system defective.

• Hydraulic valve Y51 “Steering right” defective.

145

Info centre "EasyTouch"

No.

Symbol

7 and 9

8 and 10

11

Meaning

Cable break Y52 valve steering left

Cable break Y51 valve steering right

Pressure has been detected on the pressure sensor B46

“Pressure steering”.

Cause / remedy

• Cable break to the valve Y52 “Steering left”

• Valve coil Y52 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Cable break to the valve Y51 “Steering right”.

• Valve coil Y51 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Steering intervention on the steering wheel.

• Pressure sensor B46 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Hydraulic system defective.

Pos: 66.20.12.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkung manuell kalibrier en @ 134\mod_1351056504714_78.docx @ 1193101 @ 3 @ 1

8.11.1 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually

Steering Valve on Left

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Current Value Valve Left” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the left valve is updated.

Steering Valve on Right

Pos: 66.20.12.18 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Steering Valve on Right” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the right valve is updated.

146

Pos: 66.20.12.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/M enü 3-3/Autopilot kali brieren/Lenkr adi us einstellen @ 275\mod_1404450847730_78.docx @ 2068125 @ 2 @ 1

8.12 Setting the Steering Radius

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1 2

Fig. 124

After the steering angle sensor and the valves for the steering have been calibrated, the steering radius must be determined and entered.

Pos: 66.20.13 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Setting the Steering Radius” menu.

• Turn the steering wheel to the left up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

To save the current value, select the rotary potentiometer (1), the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

• Turn the steering wheel to the right up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

• To save the current value, select the input field (2) with the rotary potentiometer, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

ISOBUS steering system is now calibrated.

147

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/MMenü 3-5 „H andbetrieb“ @ 132\mod_1349333816049_78.docx @ 1170912 @ 3 @ 1

8.12.1 Menu 35 „Manual Mode“

Pos: 66.20.15 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.20.16 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - H andbetrieb Schwenken der Mähwer ke @ 29\mod_1251188626799_78.docx @ 280962 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

• Carelessness when you use manual mode can cause damage to the machine (watch out for possible collisions when swivelling the mowing units in and out).

Pos: 66.20.17 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/M enü 3-5 „Handbetrieb“ BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349332153525_78.docx @ 1170883 @ @ 1

Fig. 125

If the multifunction lever or the sensor system is defective, the mowing units can be adjusted inching via manual mode.

Inching means that there is no float position when lowering the mowing units.

Moreover, this menu item allows you to set the cutting heights of the mowing units.

Pos: 66.20.18 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up “Manual Mode” menu.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-5 “Manual Mode” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows Manual Mode.

Manual mode is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Manual mode “Lifting/Lowering Mowing Units”

Page 2: Manual mode “Setting Cutting Height”

148

Pos: 66.20.19 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüer kärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.20.20 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 8/nächste_vorherige M enüebene zur ück @ 29\mod_1251107696463_78.docx @ 279672 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

• Press the key

• Press the key

to open the next page of the menu.

to open the previous page of the menu.

• Press the key to display the basic screen.

• Pressing the

Pos: 66.20.21 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freig abebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.20.22 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

149

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.23 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/M enü 3-4 Symboler kl ärung @ 0\mod_1197552930351_78.docx @ 26011 @ @ 1

Explanation of symbols:

Pos: 66.20.24 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 126

= raise front mowing unit inching with the

= lower front mowing unit inching with the key. key.

= fold down left mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= fold down right mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= lower left mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

= lower right mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

= raise left mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

= raise right mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

150

Pos: 66.20.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T /SStatusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensor en (2) @ 0\mod_1197556508007_78.docx @ 26092 @ 3 @ 1

8.12.2 Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 66.20.26 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/M enü 3-4 Sensor B14_15_48_49 @ 9\mod_1219909987241_78.docx @ 124321 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 127

= Sensor B15 position mowing unit left

= Sensor B14 position mowing unit right

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Pos: 66.20.27 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensor en @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.20.28 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Aufr ufen Gr undbild/M enüebene zur ück @ 0\mod_1197556942913_78.docx @ 26130 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

• Activating the

Pos: 66.20.29 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key brings up the basic screen.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

151

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.30 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/H ydraulisch einstell bar e Schnitthöhe ( Seite 2/2) @ 132\mod_1349339037229_78.docx @ 1171145 @ @ 1

Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting Height (Page 2/2)

Fig. 128

Activating keys 1-6 sets the inclination of the mowing units.

Inclination Mowing unit lateral left

Front mowing unit Mowing unit lateral right

Reduce

key key key

Increase

Pos: 66.20.31 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 8/Sensorübersicht @ 29\mod_1251119423573_78.docx @ 280119 @ @ 1

Sensor overview:

Pos: 66.20.32 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/Sensor B 41/42/43 Tabelle @ 132\mod_1349339370125_78.docx @ 1171170 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B43

B42

B41

key key

Sensor not OK red Description

key

Cutting height front mowing unit

Cutting height lateral mowing unit right

Cutting height lateral mowing unit left

152

Pos: 66.22.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Ser vice/M enü 4-1- 1/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice @ 0\mod_1197557899632_78.docx @ 26358 @ 2 @ 1

8.13 Main Menu 4 Service

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 129

• You can bring up a menu level with the key o n the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 4 "Service" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4 "Service".

The main menu "Service" is divided up into four menus:

= Menu 4-1 "Diagnostics"

= Menu 4-2 "Error list"

= Menü 4-3 "Fitter's section (password-protected")

= Menu 4-4 "Information"

Pos: 66.22.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

153

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Ser vice/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 „Diagnose“ aufr ufen BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380176295599_78.docx @ 1610707 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.1 Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

Fig. 130

• Press menu key to bring up “Diagnostics” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Service” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4-1 “Diagnostics”.

Pos: 66.22.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Ser vice/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 „Diagnose“ Menüs BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372326765399_78.docx @ 1499477 @ @ 1

5

4-1-1

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

Designation

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation

4-1-4

Cutting Height

4-1-5

Swath Hood

4-1-6

Sideshift

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

4-1-10

Work

4-1-11

CAN Bus

4-1-12 Traction Drive

154

Pos: 66.22.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4-1-13

4-1-14

4-1-15

4-1-16

4-1-17

Electronics

Diesel Engine

Multi-Function Lever

Control Unit Console

Terminal

Info centre "EasyTouch"

155

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Ser vice/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 Anzeige nicht erfüllter Fr eigabebeding ung en für di e Di agnose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349344753454_78.docx @ 1171277 @ @ 1

Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics

Pos: 66.22.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 131

Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been met but which must be met to be able to perform diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in each case.

Symbol Meaning

Diesel engine speed not at 1900 rpm

GO

Diesel engine has not been started

STOP

Diesel engine is not off

V > 0

Speed of vehicle is not correct

Turn axle separation release switch on or off

Turn the autopilot release switch on or off

Turn the travelling gear release switch on or off

Turn road/field release switch on or off

Turn release switch for parking brake on or off

Seat switch (driver's seat is unoccupied)

Open or close door

156

Pos: 66.22.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Ser vice/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 Anzeige möglicher Stör ungen für di e Diag nose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349345223062_78.docx @ 1171306 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.2 Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 132

The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).

Error CAN* to engine control

BEK

Error CAN* to CUC (control unit console)

DIOM

Error CAN* to DIOM

Error CAN* to joystick

Error CAN* to KMC1 (KMC = Krone-machine controller)

Error CAN* to SD (Smartdrive)

Pos: 66.22.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Error CAN* to joystick

*) CAN = Controler-Area-Network

157

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.10.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1-1 „Diagnose Achsfederung“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283323788093_78.docx @ 448535 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.3 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension

Fig. 133

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-1 "Diagnostics of axle suspension" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Axle suspension diagnostics appears.

The "Axle suspension" diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.10.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.10.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.10.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

158

Pos: 66.22.10.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-1/Sensor B20 Achsfeder ung @ 0\mod_1197610185837_78.docx @ 26645 @ @ 1

Sensor Test (page 1/2)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 134

Status display of general sensors (2)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

Pos: 66.22.10.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensor en @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 66.22.10.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/2) @ 0\mod_1197610625431_78.docx @ 26684 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/2)

Pos: 66.22.10.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.10.9 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.10.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.10.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.10.12 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

159

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.10.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-1/Aktor entest Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611281618_78.docx @ 26741 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the “Axle suspension” function.

1

Fig. 135

(1) Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.10.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.10.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-1/Tabell e Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611724790_78.docx @ 26779 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.11 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to axle suspension.

Y19 Main valve

Y15 Lifting axle suspension

Y16 Lowering axle suspension

160

Pos: 66.22.12.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-3/Menü 4-1-3 „Diagnose F ederendtl astung" @ 46\mod_1283325482906_78.docx @ 448591 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.4 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 136

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-3 "Diagnostics of spring compensation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Spring compensation diagnostics appears.

The "Spring compensation" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 66.22.12.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.12.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.12.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

161

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-3/Sensor test F ederentl astung (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197617848837_78.docx @ 28267 @ @ 1

Sensor test spring compensation (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 137:

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the spring compensation function.

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

Pos: 66.22.12.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B44

B45

Spring compensation left

Spring compensation right

162

Pos: 66.22.12.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.12.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.12.9 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.12.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.12.12 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

163

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-3/Aktor entest F ederentl astung ( 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618876212_78.docx @ 28305 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

Fig. 138

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

 Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.12.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.12.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zusatsventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y30

Pos: 66.22.12.16 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41

Additional valve 1

Additional valve 2

164

Pos: 66.22.12.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.12.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.12.19 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.12.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.12.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.12.22 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-3/Aktor entest F ederentl astung ( 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197621399243_78.docx @ 28384 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

1 2

Fig. 139

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

 Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.12.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.12.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-3/Tabell e Aktoren F eder entl astung @ 0\mod_1197620752884_78.docx @ 28364 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.13 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to spring compensation.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y31 Spring compensation right

Y42 Spring compensation left

166

Pos: 66.22.14.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diag nose Schnitthöhe Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283328540437_78.docx @ 448674 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.5 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 140

Pos: 66.22.14.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diag nose Schnitthöhe Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251361156886_78.docx @ 284896 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-4 "Diagnostics of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Cutting height diagnostics appears.

The "Cutting height" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 66.22.14.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.14.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.14.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

167

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Sensor test Schnitthöhe ( 2) (Seite 1/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283329291171_78.docx @ 448702 @ @ 1

Sensor test cutting height (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 141

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the cutting height.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B43

B42

B41

Cutting height – front mowing unit

Cutting height – right lateral mowing unit

Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit

168

Pos: 66.22.14.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.13 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

169

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum T esten, der an der M aschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktor e @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Aktor entest Schnitthöhe ( 2/4) Bil d BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404459439391_78.docx @ 2068237 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0047_2

Fig. 142

Pos: 66.22.14.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.14.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zusatsventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.14.19 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

170

Pos: 66.22.14.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.22 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.25 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

171

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum T esten, der an der M aschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktor e @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Aktor entest Schnitthöhe ( 3/4) Bil d BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404719079435_78.docx @ 2070475 @ @ 1

2

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0048_2

Fig. 143

Pos: 66.22.14.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.14.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Tabell e Aktoren Schnitthöhe 3/4 @ 46\mod_1283340572046_78.docx @ 449425 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y35 Cutting height right 1

Y36

Y37

Pos: 66.22.14.31 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y38

Cutting height right 2

Cutting height – front mowing unit 1

Cutting height – front mowing unit 2

172

Pos: 66.22.14.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.34 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.37 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

173

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum T esten, der an der M aschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktor e @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Aktor entest Schnitthöhe ( 4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283341098734_78.docx @ 449481 @ @ 1

1

Fig. 144

Pos: 66.22.14.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.14.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.42 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Tabell e Aktoren Schnitthöhe 4/4 @ 46\mod_1283341654625_78.docx @ 449507 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y39 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 1

Y34 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 2

Pos: 66.22.15 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

174

Pos: 66.22.16.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diag nose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283344002875_78.docx @ 449562 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.6 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 145

Pos: 66.22.16.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diag nose hydraulische Schneckenhaube T ext BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251376875502_78.docx @ 287117 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-5 "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics for the hydraulic auger hood appears.

The "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.16.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.16.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.16.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

175

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Sensor test hydr aulische Schneckenhauben ( 2) (Seite 1/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197628159400_78.docx @ 28695 @ @ 1

Sensor test - hydraulic auger hoods (2) (page 1/3)

Pos: 66.22.16.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 146

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the hydraulic auger hoods function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S2

Hydraulic auger hoods left

S5

Hydraulic auger hoods right

176

Pos: 66.22.16.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.16.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.16.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.16.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.16.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.16.13 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

177

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-5/D er Aktortest /Testen, F unktion „hydr aulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 66.22.16.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-5/Aktor entest hydr aulische Schneckenhaube (2/3) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404736479856_78.docx @ 2072267 @ @ 1

1

5 6 2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0055_1

Fig. 147

Pos: 66.22.16.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.16.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.16.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zusatsventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.16.19 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

178

Pos: 66.22.16.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.16.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.16.22 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.16.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.16.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.16.25 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

179

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-5/D er Aktortest /Testen, F unktion „hydr aulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 66.22.16.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.16.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-5/Aktor entest hydr aulische Schneckenhauben ( 3/3) Bil d BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251379241424_78.docx @ 289052 @ @ 1

1 2

Fig. 148

Pos: 66.22.16.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.16.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-5/Tabell e Aktoren hydraulische Schneckenhauben BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197631161806_78.docx @ 28755 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.17 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc x @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the hydraulic auger hood.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y32 Auger hoods right

Y33 Auger hoods left

3

180

Pos: 66.22.18.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-6/Menü 4-1-6 Diag nose H angausgleich @ 46\mod_1283347867062_78.docx @ 449617 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.7 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 149

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics sideshift " with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Sideshift diagnostics appears.

The "Sideshift" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 66.22.18.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.18.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.18.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

181

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-6/Sensor test H ang ausgleich ( 2) (Seite 1/3) @ 81\mod_1316093658099_78.docx @ 714718 @ @ 1

Sensor Test – Sideshift (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 150

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the sideshift function.

Switch Switch activated green

S73

Pos: 66.22.18.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.18.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Switch not activated transparent

Description

Sideshift (Only on BiG M 400)

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.18.8 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.18.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest M aschine geg en Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.18.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.18.11 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

182

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-6/Aktor entest H angausgleich ( 2/3) @ 279\mod_1405414790716_78.docx @ 2151370 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Sideshift” function.

1

2 5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0059_1

Fig. 151

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

 Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.18.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.18.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zusatsventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.18.15 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

183

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.18.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.18.18 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.18.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.18.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.18.21 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

184

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-6/Aktor entest H angausgleich ( 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197632459321_78.docx @ 28856 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Sideshift" function.

1

Fig. 152

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.18.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.18.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-6/Tabell e Aktoren H ang ausgl eich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197873505393_78.docx @ 29515 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.19 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the sideshift.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y28 Sideshift left

Y29 Sideshift right

185

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Menü 4-1-7 Diag nose Fr ontschutzklappen @ 46\mod_1283348927000_78.docx @ 449807 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.8 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional)

Pic. 153

The "Diagnostics" main menu 4 is called.

• Select menu 4-1-7 “Diagnostics front guard flaps" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

Front guard flaps diagnostics appears.

The diagnostics menu “Front guard flaps” is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.20.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.20.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.20.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

186

Pos: 66.22.20.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Sensor test Frontschutzklappen (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 46\mod_1283348928359_78.docx @ 449833 @ @ 1

Sensor test front guard flaps (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 154

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the front guard flaps.

Switch Description Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

S8

Pos: 66.22.20.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.20.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für M onteur e zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Front guard flaps

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.20.8 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.20.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest M aschine geg en Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.20.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.20.11 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

187

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-7/BM 400/Aktor entest Frontschutzkl appen (2/3) @ 280\mod_1405424928677_78.docx @ 2152487 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

2 5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0262_1

Fig. 155

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.20.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.20.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zusatsventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y30

Pos: 66.22.20.15 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41

Additional valve 1

Additional valve 2

188

Pos: 66.22.20.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.20.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.20.18 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.20.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.20.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.20.21 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

189

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-7/BM 400/Aktor entest Frontschutzkl appen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348925843_78.docx @ 449781 @ @ 1 The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

Fig. 156

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.20.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.20.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-7/BM 400/Tabell e Aktoren Fr ontschutzklappen ( 3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348929593_78.docx @ 449859 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.21 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the front guard flaps.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y43 Front guard flaps 1

Y44 Front guard flaps 2

190

Pos: 66.22.22.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/MMenü 4-1-9 ISOBUS Lenksystem @ 175\mod_1372314591267_78.docx @ 1498563 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.9 Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System

Pos: 66.22.22.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/M enü 4-1- 9 „Autopil ot“ Bild BM 400 @ 132\mod_1349353845372_78.docx @ 1171516 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 157

Pos: 66.22.22.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/M enü 4-1- 9 „ISOBUS Lenksystem“ T ext @ 175\mod_1372315598436_78.docx @ 1498592 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up “ISOBUS Steering System” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1-9 “ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

ISOBUS steering system diagnostics is displayed.

Pos: 66.22.22.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/M enü 4-1- 9 ist in 2 Seiten aufgeteilt @ 175\mod_1372316264344_78.docx @ 1498621 @ @ 1

The “ISOBUS Steering System” diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages

Page 1: Display diagnostics values

Page 2: Actuator test

Pos: 66.22.22.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 2 @ 132\mod_1349360133802_78.docx @ 1171748 @ @ 1

Menu Control of Pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.22.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.22.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.22.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

191

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.22.9 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.22.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.22.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 66.22.22.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-9/BM 420 Autopil ot / Lenksystem/Der Aktortest /T esten, F unktion „ Autopilot“ @ 175\mod_1372317573293_78.docx @ 1498650 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been installed on the machine for the

“ISOBUS Steering System” function.

Pos: 66.22.22.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-9/BM 420 Autopil ot / Lenksystem/Aktor entest Autopilot Bil d BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404740901639_78.docx @ 2073394 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0097_1

Fig. 158

Pos: 66.22.22.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-4/Anzeig e Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.22.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.22.16 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

192

Pos: 66.22.22.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-9/BM 420 Autopil ot / Lenksystem/Tabelle Aktoren Autopilot BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372317907399_78.docx @ 1498679 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.23 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The displayed status displays are valid for all actuators that refer to the ISOBUS steering system.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y54

Lock valve steering rear left

Y53

Lock valve steering rear right

Y52

Steering rear left

Y51

Steering rear right

193

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/M enü 4- 1-10 Di agnose Arbeit BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316094827000_78.docx @ 714803 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work

Fig. 159

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics work" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Work diagnostics appears.

The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into 6 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Sensor Test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Page 5: Actuator test

Page 6: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 6

Pos: 66.22.24.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.24.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.24.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

194

Pos: 66.22.24.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Ar beit (2) ( Seite 1/6) BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316095969365_78.docx @ 714888 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 1/6)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 160

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the work function.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B10

Suction return air filter

B33 Hydraulic tank filling level

Pos: 66.22.24.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Ar beit (2) ( Sei te 1) Z usatz Sensor en B57/B58 @ 81\mod_1316151350061_78.docx @ 715096 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B57

B58

Pressure filter steering hydraulics

Pressure filter work hydraulics

Pos: 66.22.24.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

195

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Ar beit (2) ( Seite 2/6) @ 9\mod_1219915289585_78.docx @ 124432 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 2/6)

Fig. 161

Sensor designation:

= Sensor B11 speed – front mowing unit

= Sensor B12 speed – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B13 speed – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B14 position – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B15 position – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B28 speed – right auger

= Sensor B29 speed – left auger

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

Pos: 66.22.24.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Ü berschrift Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensor en (2) @ 0\mod_1197884083518_78.docx @ 29633 @ @ 1

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 66.22.24.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemei nen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 66.22.24.11 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

196

Pos: 66.22.24.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884281565_78.docx @ 29671 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.17 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

197

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Ar beit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884924049_78.docx @ 29747 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

Fig. 162

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197885546643_78.docx @ 29807 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main valve

Y22 Lateral mowing unit right lift

Y23 Lateral mowing unit right lower

Y27 Lateral mowing unit right fold down

Pos: 66.22.24.22 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

198

Pos: 66.22.24.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197884308393_78.docx @ 29690 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.25 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.28 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

199

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Ar beit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885483846_78.docx @ 29787 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

Fig. 163

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885035893_78.docx @ 29767 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y24 Lateral mowing unit left lift

1

Y25 Lateral mowing unit left lower

Y26 Lateral mowing unit left fold down

Pos: 66.22.24.33 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

200

Pos: 66.22.24.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197884337908_78.docx @ 29709 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 5/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.36 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.39 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

201

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Ar beit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886146908_78.docx @ 29827 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

Fig. 164

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.42 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886205518_78.docx @ 29847 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y20 Lifting front mowing unit

1

Y21 Lowering front mowing unit

Pos: 66.22.24.44 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

202

Pos: 66.22.24.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 6/6) @ 0\mod_1197884374705_78.docx @ 29728 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 6/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.47 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.48 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.50 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

203

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.51 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Ar beit (6/6) BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404743326483_78.docx @ 2074740 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0017_1

Fig. 165

1.

 Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.52 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.53 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.54 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar bei t (6/6) BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288160770328_78.docx @ 478547 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y8 Front mowing unit drive

Y9 Side mowing unit drive, right

Y10 Side mowing unit drive, left

Pos: 66.22.25 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

204

Pos: 66.22.26 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1- 11/M enü 4- 1-11 „CAN- Bus“ BM 420 @ 348\mod_1435825337543_78.docx @ 2620412 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 166

Main menu 4 “Diagnostics” is called.

• Select menu 4-1-11 “CAN Bus” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

CAN bus diagnostics is displayed.

CAN bus participant:

Active Inactive or disconnected from CAN bus

Designation

Joystick

Control Unit Console (CUC)

SmartDrive

DIOM

Terminal

KMC1 (KRONE Machine

Controller)

ECU (Engine Control Computer)

ISOBUS ECU

(ECU = Electronic Control Unit)

Pos: 66.22.27 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAN = Controller Area Network

• Pressing menu key takes you back one menu level.

205

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/M enü 4- 1-12 F ahr antrieb Ü berschrift @ 81\mod_1316154190621_78.docx @ 715190 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear

Pos: 66.22.28.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/M enü 4- 1-12 F ahr antrieb Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316157923503_78.docx @ 715359 @ @ 1

Fig. 167

Pos: 66.22.28.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/M enü 4- 1-12 F ahr antrieb M enü aufrufen @ 81\mod_1316154489538_78.docx @ 715218 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-12 "Drive" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Drive diagnostics appears.

The "Travelling Gear" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 66.22.28.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.28.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.28.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

206

Pos: 66.22.28.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) ( Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251718644413_78.docx @ 295583 @ @ 1

Travelling gear switch (1) (page 1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 168

Pos: 66.22.28.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1197893098455_78.docx @ 30395 @ @ 1

= Road/Field release switch not activated

= Road/Field release switch activated

= Release switch travelling gear not activated.

= Travelling gear release switch activated

= Parking brake release switch not activated.

= Parking brake release switch activated

= Key axle separation not activated.

= Key axle separation activated

Pos: 66.22.28.10 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

207

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/F ahr antrieb (2) (Sei te 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251720587648_78.docx @ 295633 @ @ 1

Travelling gear (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 420/F ahr antrieb-Schal ter ( 1) Bil d BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 169

Pos: 66.22.28.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/F ahr antrieb (2) BM 400/ BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271236251527_78.docx @ 368967 @ @ 1

• Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is the current travel speed.

= Forward travel

= Neutral (stopped)

= Reverse travel

=

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat operation in km/h.

= Cruise control inactive

Type of drive

= Axle separation active (only possible in Field mode)

Pos: 66.22.28.14 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D 025

= Parking brake is applied

=

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems..

Green active Transparent inactive Description

Downhill mode

208

Pos: 66.22.28.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 3) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251716592773_78.docx @ 295533 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (3) (page1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 420/F ahr antrieb-Schal ter ( 1) Bil d BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 170

Pos: 66.22.28.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Sensortest dient zum Testen der Sensor en F ahr antrieb @ 60\mod_1297929188908_78.docx @ 562388 @ @ 1

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the travelling gear function.

Pos: 66.22.28.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 420/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 3_1) T abellen BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316160005940_78.docx @ 715444 @ @ 1

Sensor Description Sensor

OK gree n

Sensor not OK red

Sensor unknown transparent

B5 Flush valve temperature

B7 High pressure

B22 Braking pressure

B25 Brake tank pressure

B38 Pivoting angle pump front axle

B39 Pivoting angle pump, rear axle

Pos: 66.22.28.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 420/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 3_1) T abellen Z usatz B56 @ 81\mod_1316160896568_78.docx @ 715474 @ @ 1

B56 Wheel motor return (pressure)

Pos: 66.22.28.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 3_2 B40/K43) T abell en BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928941508_78.docx @ 562304 @ @ 1

Switch not activated yellow

Switch unknown transparent

Description Sensor Switch activated green

B40

K43

Pos: 66.22.28.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 3_3 D 017) T abell en BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928866436_78.docx @ 562217 @ @ 1

Green active Transparent inactive

Brake pedal switch

Travelling gear switch

Description

D 017

POWER

Power limitation

Pos: 66.22.28.22 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

209

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Sensortest F ahrantrieb ( 4) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251721794976_78.docx @ 295683 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (4) (page1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 420/F ahr antrieb-Schal ter ( 1) Bil d BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 171

Pos: 66.22.28.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Beschr eibung der Zeil e (4) @ 41\mod_1271234519480_78.docx @ 368865 @ @ 1

D018 = SD transmiss. Status (1 OK) (2 not OK)

D019 = drive level (1= drive level 1) (2=drive level 2)

Pos: 66.22.28.26 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D023 = Safety signal ( OK) ( not OK)

D700 = Saf. IO Toggle analogue val. to digital

210

Pos: 66.22.28.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.29 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.32 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

211

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantri eb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197900763705_78.docx @ 31005 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Fig. 172

Pos: 66.22.28.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en F ahr antrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901026377_78.docx @ 31025 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.28.36 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y5 Axle separation

Y6 1/2 absorption volume front axle

Y7 1/2 absorption volume rear axle

212

Pos: 66.22.28.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.39 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.42 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

213

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funkti on „Fahrantri eb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 66.22.28.44 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantri eb (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283430681187_78.docx @ 450341 @ @ 1

Fig. 173

Pos: 66.22.28.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Hi nweis Statusanziege Gültig keit Fahr antri eb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 66.22.28.47 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en F ahr antrieb (3/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901795565_78.docx @ 31095 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Brake light reversing lights

Y45 Stop valve front axle

Y46 Stop valve rear axle

Pos: 66.22.28.48 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

214

Pos: 66.22.28.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest (Sei te 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.50 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/N ur für M onteure zug änglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.51 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise altGefahr - Aktortest ( 2014- 10- 16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.52 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschi ne gegen Wegrollen sicher n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.53 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Hi nweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.54 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

215

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.55 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funkti on „Fahrantri eb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 66.22.28.56 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantri eb (4/4) BM 400 Bild @ 46\mod_1283433331343_78.docx @ 450396 @ @ 1

Fig. 174

Pos: 66.22.28.57 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanzeig e des angewähl ten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.58 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/Hi nweis Statusanziege Gültig keit Fahr antri eb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 66.22.28.59 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en F ahr antrieb (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283435088921_78.docx @ 450448 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y1 Front axle backward

Y2 Front axle forward

Y3 Rear axle backward

Y4 Rear axle forward

Pos: 66.22.29 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

216

Pos: 66.22.30.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4- 1-13 „El ektr oni k“ Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251724003570_78.docx @ 295789 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.13 Menu 4-1-13 Electronics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 175

Pos: 66.22.30.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4- 1-13 „El ektr oni k“ Text @ 0\mod_1197903920096_78.docx @ 31372 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-13 "Electronics" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Electronics diagnostics appears.

Pos: 66.22.30.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.30.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4- 1-13 Elektroni k Bil d Seite 1 und 2 BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251722625366_78.docx @ 295708 @ @ 1

Fig. 176

Pos: 66.22.30.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4- 1-13 Elektroni k T ext bl ättern @ 0\mod_1197904126361_78.docx @ 31410 @ @ 1

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that lie within a valid range.

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that do not lie within a valid range.

• To scroll forward, use the

Pos: 66.22.30.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mi t Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.31 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key. To scroll backward, use the key.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

217

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.32.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/M enü 4- 1-14 Di esel motor (1/3) BM 420 Bild @ 51\mod_1288164875390_78.docx @ 478655 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine

Fig.177

Pos: 66.22.32.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/M enü 4- 1-14 Di esel motor (1/3) BM 400/420/500 Text @ 30\mod_1251727027851_78.docx @ 296193 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Diesel engine diagnostics" appears.

Pos: 66.22.32.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/Di esel motor ( Seite 1/3) BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781350349_78.docx @ 296265 @ @ 1

Diesel engine page 1

= Engine speed

= Engine cooling water temperature

= Engine oil pressure

= Cooling water level

Pos: 66.22.32.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 3 @ 30\mod_1251782549208_78.docx @ 296311 @ @ 1

Menu control of pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.32.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/M enüsteuerung (1/2) BM 400/420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781668115_78.docx @ 296290 @ @ 1

• Activating the

• Activating the

• Activating the

• Activating the

Pos: 66.22.32.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the

key for

key for key for

causes the next maintenance interval to be displayed.

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed. causes the next page to be displayed.

B

key for causes the previous page to be displayed.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

218

Pos: 66.22.32.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/Di esel motor ( Seite 2u3) Bild BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404805518221_78.docx @ 2076555 @ @ 1

Diesel Engine Pages 2 and 3

Info centre "EasyTouch"

D210 69 °C

B36

D208 l/h

B34

2764 mV

60 %

D209

P 2.10

bar

D203Auslastung (Drehzahl)

70 %

D202Auslastung (Vollast)

16 %

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0019_2

Fig. 178

Page 2

Pos: 66.22.32.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/Di esel motor Sei te 2 Symbol er klär ung BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251784530161_78.docx @ 296365 @ @ 1

Page 3

= Current fuel consumption

= Charge air temperature

P

Pos: 66.22.32.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/Di esel motor Sei te 2 M otorausl astung @ 51\mod_1288171090031_78.docx @ 478802 @ @ 1

= Charge air pressure

• Engine capacity, speed

• Maximum engine capacity

Pos: 66.22.32.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-14/Di esel motor Seite 2 Sensoren B34 B36 BM 400/420 @ 348\mod_1435752536698_78.docx @ 2618644 @ @ 1

Sensor

B34

Sensor OK green Sensor not OK red

B36

Pos: 66.22.32.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-14/Di esel motor Seite 3 Symbol erkl ärung @ 30\mod_1251787777771_78.docx @ 296525 @ @ 1

= Fuel pressure

= Electrical voltage

Pos: 66.22.32.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-14/Di esel motor Seite 3 Symbol erkl ärung T 2 BM 420/500 @ 60\mod_1297924686229_78.docx @ 562090 @ @ 1

= Exhaust temperature

1 Ambient temperature

2 Atmospheric pressure

Pos: 66.22.32.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-14/H arnstofflösung AdBlue @ 41\mod_1271238591840_78.docx @ 369019 @ @ 1

Urea solution

Filling level

Temperature

Pos: 66.22.32.14 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Description

Diesel tank filling level

Air filter contamination

219

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.32.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-14/M enü Di eselmotor Wartungsinter vall @ 30\mod_1251790172458_78.docx @ 296638 @ @ 1

Fig.179

Pos: 66.22.33 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating the key for causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed.

220

Pos: 66.22.34 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1- 15/M enü 4- 1-15 Joystick (1/2) Fendt @ 41\mod_1271397831477_78.docx @ 371180 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.15 Menu 4-1-15 Joystick

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig.180

The key functions of the joystick can be checked in the Joystick Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when the joystick is activated in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-15 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick Diagnostics" appears.

Pos: 66.22.35 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

221

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.36 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1- 15/M enü 4- 1-15 Joystick (2/2) FENDT @ 41\mod_1271397833149_78.docx @ 371205 @ @ 1

Menu control:

Fig.181

• Pressing the

• Press the menu.

key under the

key under the

softkey brings up the "Work" menu.

softkey to bring up the next page of the "Joystick"

Pos: 66.22.37 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the menu.

key under the softkey to bring up the previous page of the "Joystick"

A representation of the joystick appears in the display. If a function is activated on the joystick, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated

Broken cable

Short circuit

222

Pos: 66.22.38.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 „Bedienei nheit Konsol e“ (1/2) Bild BM 420 @ 338\mod_1430905189915_78.docx @ 2567736 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 182

Pos: 66.22.38.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 „Bedienei nheit Konsol e“ (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197963604168_78.docx @ 31756 @ @ 1

Both the release switches and the keys on the console can be checked for their functionality in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu when the release switches or keys are activated.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Control unit console diagnostics appears.

Pos: 66.22.38.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüer kärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.38.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vor herige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

• Press the

• Press the

Pos: 66.22.38.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key to bring up the next page of the menu. key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

223

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.38.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 Bedi enkonsole Fr eigabeschalter (2/2) BM 420 @ 338\mod_1430906118546_78.docx @ 2567926 @ @ 1

Fig. 183

Release switch (1) activated inactive Release switch

Road/field

Autopilot

Parking brake

Foot pedal

Traction drive

Axle separation

Swath hood

Seat switch

Door switch

Front guard flaps (optional)

Pos: 66.22.38.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/Anzeig e der Spannungen Konsol e @ 30\mod_1251791240708_78.docx @ 296666 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.38.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Display of voltages (2)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 1)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 2)

Display (voltage – electronics)

Display (fixed voltage regulator)

224

Pos: 66.22.38.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/Di agnose Sitzschal ter @ 60\mod_1298014175977_78.docx @ 563611 @ @ 1

Diagnostics seat switch

Pos: 66.22.38.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 1-16/Bedieneinhei t Konsole Seite 2 Bild BigM 420 @ 277\mod_1404827971515_78.docx @ 2079543 @ @ 1

KMC1

Smart

Drive m V

1736 m V

1870

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0 113_1

Fig. 184

Pos: 66.22.38.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/M ögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter @ 132\mod_1349418754035_78.docx @ 1172189 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the activated key

Switch not activated

Switch activated

Cable break

Short circuit

Pos: 66.22.38.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/M ögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter Di agnose Sitzschal ter zeitverzögert @ 277\mod_1404896265122_78.docx @ 2080335 @ @ 1

Seat switch time delay

Pos: 66.22.39 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

225

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.40 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1- 17 /Menü 4-1-17 „Display“ @ 0\mod_1197973595090_78.docx @ 31795 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.17 Menu 4-1-17 Display

The "Display" diagnostics menu is used to check key functions , the rotary potentiometer and the key next to the rotary potentiometer.

Fig. 185

Note

When bringing up the "Display" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when keys are activated in the "Display" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-17 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Display diagnostics" appears.

A representation of the display appears in the display. If a function is activated on the display, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated

Pos: 66.22.41 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

226

Pos: 66.22.42.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/M enü 4- 2 „Fehl erliste“ @ 31\mod_1251804579052_78.docx @ 298124 @ 2 @ 1

8.14 Menu 4-2 Error list

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 186

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Error list" appears.

= Current error

= Fault storage

= Current error, diesel engine

= Error storage, diesel engine

Current errors

The display shows the fault list with the current faults. The time, status, error number and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.2 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/D urch Drücken der Taste 7 bzw. 8 für Softkey die allgemeinen Infomel dung en aufrufen. @ 31\mod_1251798076490_78.docx @ 297679 @ @ 1

or for

Pos: 66.22.42.3 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key softkey

227

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.42.4 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/F ehlerspeicher @ 31\mod_1251804762302_78.docx @ 298179 @ @ 1

Error Storage

Fig. 187

• To display error storage, activate the key under the softkey.

Error storage is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/M enüsteuerung Pfeile er kl ären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

=

=

=

=

Activating the

Activating the

Activating the

Activating the

key allows you to scroll up.

key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

Pos: 66.22.42.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

228

Pos: 66.22.42.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/aktuelle Fehler Di eselmotor @ 278\mod_1404910087187_78.docx @ 2082333 @ @ 1

Current diesel engine errors

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0089_1

Fig. 188

Pos: 66.22.42.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• To display current errors of the diesel engine, press the

The display shows the error list with the current errors of the diesel engine. Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present. key under the softkey.

229

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.42.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/F ehlerspeicher Diesel motor @ 278\mod_1404973176571_78.docx @ 2083358 @ @ 1

Diesel engine error storage

Fig. 189

• To display diesel engine error storage, activate the softkey.

key under the

The display shows error storage for the diesel engine (in chronological order). Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

Status

1 = Error set

2 = Error deleted

Pos: 66.22.42.10 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can use the

• Pressing the

key down to the end of the list and the

• To display current errors, use the A key under the softkey.

key to scroll up.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

230

Pos: 66.22.42.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 2/Infomeldung en Allgemein/Ser vice Bild @ 31\mod_1251805475755_78.docx @ 298888 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 190

General information messages

Pos: 66.22.42.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 2/Status der Allgemei nen-Infomel dungen @ 31\mod_1251808882552_78.docx @ 298912 @ @ 1

Service information messages

General information messages

The general information message is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

Status:

C = Error has come

G = Error has gone

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 2/Status der Service-Infomel dungen @ 31\mod_1251809979693_78.docx @ 299120 @ @ 1

Service information messages

Service information messages are arranged chronologically. The date, time, error number and designation are shown.

Pos: 66.22.42.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 2/M enüsteuer ung Pfeile er klär en @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

=

=

Activating the

Activating the

key allows you to scroll up.

key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

=

Activating the

Activating the

key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

=

Pos: 66.22.42.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 2/Blätern über di e T asten A bis D @ 31\mod_1251809467021_78.docx @ 298956 @ @ 1

• Activating the key brings up the basic screen

• By pressing the key

• By pressing key

you get back to menu “Error list”

the next page “Service information message” will be displayed

• By pressing key

Pos: 66.22.42.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Mit Dr ehpoti M enüebene zur ück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.43 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the

the previous page “General information message” will be displayed

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

231

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.44 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-3/M enü 4- 3 „Ser viceebene“ @ 0\mod_1197981326387_78.docx @ 32370 @ 2 @ 1

8.15 Menu 4-3 "Service level"

Fig. 191

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the Krone service staff.

Pos: 66.22.45 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

232

Pos: 66.22.46.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4- 4 „Informati on“ @ 175\mod_1372233541022_78.docx @ 1497183 @ 2 @ 1

8.16

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Menu 4-4 Information

The “Information” main menu is divided into up to 4 menus, depending on how the machine is equipped:

4-4-1

Main Menu 4 Information

Designation

Joystick

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Released Software packages

Fig. 192

Pos: 66.22.46.2 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 4 “Information”.

• Select “Information” main menu with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

233

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4- 4-1 „Joystick“ F endt @ 41\mod_1271398876524_78.docx @ 371280 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.1 Menu 4-4-1 Joystick

Fig.193

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-1 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick information" appears.

Pos: 66.22.46.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

234

Pos: 66.22.46.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4- 4-2 „ Software“ Bild BM 400 @ 278\mod_1404993740275_78.docx @ 2084754 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.2 Menu 4-4-2 Software

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 194

Pos: 66.22.46.6 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4- 4-2 „ Software“ T ext BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251872307697_78.docx @ 299807 @ @ 1

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-2 "Software" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

"Software information" appears. The display shows the software versions of the various controllers.

Pos: 66.22.46.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/Seite 1 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251867821525_78.docx @ 299652 @ @ 1

Page 1

= Terminal

Note

If the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbers appear in red.

= SmartDrive

= KMC1

Note

If the KMC1 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers appear in red.

Pos: 66.22.46.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the second page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer

235

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4- 4-2 Seite (1/2/3/4) Bild BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372234964494_78.docx @ 1497335 @ @ 1

Fig. 195

Pos: 66.22.46.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 4/Seite 2 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868059010_78.docx @ 299677 @ @ 1

Page 2

= Joystick

= CU

• Activating the

Pos: 66.22.46.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 4/Seite 3 MFR /EDC /ISOBU S BM 420 @ 348\mod_1435759116820_78.docx @ 2618886 @ @ 1 key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Page 3

= ECU (Engine Control Computer)

= ISOBUS ECU (ECU = Electronic Control Unit)

= EDC (Electronic Diesel Control)

• The fourth page is displayed by actuating the potentiometer.

Pos: 66.22.46.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 4/Seite 4 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868464775_78.docx @ 299727 @ @ 1

Page 4

key or by turning the rotary

= DIOM

• Activating the

Pos: 66.22.46.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Mit Dr ehpoti M enüebene zur ück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the first page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 66.22.46.14 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

236

Pos: 66.22.46.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 4/M enü 4-4- 3 M aschine @ 0\mod_1197985621606_78.docx @ 32485 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.3 Menu 4-4-3 Machine

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.16 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 196

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-3 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Machine information" appears. The display shows machine information.

237

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4- 4/M enü 4-4- 8 Anzeige Software- Pakete @ 338\mod_1430913061586_78.docx @ 2568469 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.4 Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages

Fig. 197

Main menu “Information” is called.

• Select menu 4-4-8 “Display Software Packages” using the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display “Software Packages” is shown.

The display shows the software packages of the machine.

Status displays:

Software is released

Software is not released

Pos: 66.23 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Menü 5 Gr undbild/M enü 5 „Grundbild“ BM 420 @ 279 \mod_1405004140595_78.docx @ 2085877 @ 2 @ 1

8.17 Menu 5 Basic Screen

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 66.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 198

The main menu is active.

• Select menu 5 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The “Basic Screen” is shown.

238

Pos: 66.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFehler meldungen @ 39\mod_1268635505910_78.docx @ 360426 @ 3 @ 1

8.17.1 Error Messages

Pos: 66.26 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Menü 5 Gr undbild/Fehler meldung @ 39\mod_1268635725222_78.docx @ 360450 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 199

If an error occurs on the machine, the error message appears in the display. The error message and the fault code are displayed.

• The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

• The acoustic signal can be turned off with the key under the softkey .

Pos: 66.27 /BA/Bedienung /F alscher U mgang mi t F ehl ermel dungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

Note

For a list of error messages, error description and possible cause of error and remedy of error, see Appendix A – Error Messages.

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

Pos: 66.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

239

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.29 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / 420 / 500/H auptmenüs/Menü 5 Gr undbild/Infomeldung @ 0\mod_1197986377200_78.docx @ 32543 @ 3 @ 1

8.17.2 Information message

Pos: 67 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 200

If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an action, the information message will be displayed in the information section of settings (IV). The information message and the information code are displayed.

Acknowledging the information message

The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

240

Pos: 68.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Erstinbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196314201498_78.docx @ 5855 @ 1 @ 1

Commissioning

9 Commissioning

Pos: 68.2 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Gefahr - Fehlende Schutztücher @ 0\mod_1196314289764_78.docx @ 5874 @ @ 1

Danger! - Missing guard cloths

Pos: 68.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchutztücher monti eren @ 35\mod_1257494335719_78.docx @ 329260 @ 2 @ 1

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• The machine may be taken into operation only after all the safety devices have been installed.

9.1 Fitting the guard cloths

Pos: 68.4 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Schutztücher montier en @ 0\mod_1196314517108_78.docx @ 5913 @ @ 1

Pos: 68.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSeitliche Mähwerke abklappen @ 0\mod_1196407512074_78.docx @ 7929 @ 2 @ 1

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the guard cloths.

9.2 Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units

Pos: 68.6 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anl assen: Vorraussetzung Bil d_M AN @ 349\mod_1436350344464_78.docx @ 2625551 @ @ 1

1.

2.

3.

120 s

27 018 234 0

1

Fig. 201

1)

2)

Main battery switch

Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 68.7 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anl assen: Vor aussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 68.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

241

Commissioning

Pos: 68.9 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Absenken des M ähwer ks in Arbeitsstell ung BiGM 400 @ 0\mod_1196315401623_78.docx @ 5993 @ @ 1

Danger! - Lowering mowing unit into working position

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.

Pos: 68.10 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M ähwer ke absenken BM 420 Bild @ 49\mod_1287043334531_78.docx @ 464528 @ @ 1

Fig. 202

Pos: 68.11 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Motor Starten / Fr eigabeschalter Str aße/F eld i n Posi tion F eldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 68.12 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M ähwer ke absenken BM 420_Cater pillar/MAN Text @ 143\mod_1358846761095_78.docx @ 1278854 @ @ 1

Pos: 68.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Right lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 6) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (6) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

Left lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 4) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (4) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

242

Pos: 68.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K-O/MM ontag ebeschrei bung @ 0\mod_1196317382342_78.docx @ 6137 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.1 Description of Installation

Pos: 68.15 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - U nvor hergesehene Inbetriebnahme ( 2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 68.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/D arstellung Schutztuchmontage Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196317641342_78.docx @ 6175 @ 3 @ 1

Commissioning

Fig. 203

1  Side guard cloths

2  Front guard cloths

3  Mowing Unit

243

Commissioning

9.2.2

Fig. 204:

Fit the guard cloths (1) to the mowing unit (5) using the enclosed strip (2), washer (3) and bolt

(4).

Note

The hem of the guard cloths should always face the inside.

Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)

Pos: 68.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Abb. 205

244

Pos: 68.18 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Warntafeln ei nstellen @ 348\mod_1435840615495_78.docx @ 2621281 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.3 Setting the Warning Panels

Commissioning

Fig. 206

• Before transporting the vehicle on public roads, make sure that the rear warning panels (1) are mounted in the outermost position. Change their position, if necessary (countryspecific).

• Mount rear reflector (2) on lamp support (3).

Note

Pos: 68.19 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/EEinbau der Mähkling en @ 0\mod_1196318620905_78.docx @ 6255 @ 2 @ 1

The rear reflectors with mounting parts can be found in the storage compartment on left-hand machine side.

9.3 Installation of Cutter Blades

Pos: 68.20 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - U nvor hergesehene Inbetriebnahme ( 2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Pos: 68.21 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Einbau der Mähkling en @ 0\mod_1196318744030_78.docx @ 6274 @ @ 1

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the cutter blades.

See chapter on initial start-up "Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units".

To install cutter blades:

See the chapter on maintenance of mowing units "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Blade

Screw Connection" and "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Quick Blade Release"

Pos: 68.22 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/RR eifenl uftdruck pr üfen / ei nstellen @ 181\mod_1377003713882_78.docx @ 1553241 @ 2 @ 1

9.4 Checking / Setting the Tyre Pressure

Pos: 68.23 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Reifenluftdr uck/R eifenl uftdr uck prüfen / einstellen BM 420 @ 181\mod_1377000810830_78.docx @ 1553183 @ @ 1

The air pressure in the tyres is increased ex works to prevent so called base plates on the machine.

• Measure the tyre pressure with instrument.

If the tyre pressure is higher than the values in the table of technical data:

• Set the tyre pressure with the instrument according to the table, refer to chapter “Technical

Data of the Machine”.

Pos: 69 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

245

Start-up

Pos: 70.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Inbetri ebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327075811_78.docx @ 6375 @ 3 @ 1

10

Pos: 70.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/PPr üfung en vor Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327145451_78.docx @ 6394 @ 2 @ 1

Start-up

10.1 Check before Start-up

Pos: 70.3 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Ei nstellarbeiten / Ei nstellungen/Gefahr - Ei nstellar beiten Sel bsfahr er @ 0\mod_1196327276045_78.docx @ 6432 @ @ 1

Pos: 70.4 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/Tägliche Prüfungen @ 0\mod_1196327023811_78.docx @ 6451 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill!

• Switching off the engine

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back

• Remove the ignition key.

• Switch off the main battery switch.

10.2 Daily checks

Pos: 70.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To perform daily tests, the lateral mowing units and the front mowing unit must be in working position.

Note - Daily checks

Effect: Ensures the safety of the machine and extends the machine‟s service life

Regular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantly extend the machine‟s service life.

246

Pos: 70.6 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An der Grundmaschi ne @ 91\mod_1326187209992_78.docx @ 777317 @ 2 @ 1

10.2.1 On the Basic Machine

• Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly

• Check the protective equipment and replace it, if necessary

• Check the fuel level

• Check the urea level

• Make certain screws are in place and tight

• Coolant check

• Clean engine compartment and intake sieve

• Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks

• Check the tyre pressure

• Pilot lamp test

• Test of light function

• Check the brakes for functionality

• Check the oil level on

• Hydraulic tank

• Engine

• Transfer gearbox

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

"Maintenance of Basic Machine" and "Maintenance – Engine".

Pos: 70.7 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An den M ähwer ken BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378823722425_78.docx @ 1581410 @ 3 @ 1

Start-up

10.2.2

Pos: 71 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

On the Mowing Units

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

• Make certain screws are in place and tight.

• Check safety devices and guard cloths for wear and damage and replace, if necessary.

Checking oil level on:

• Main gearbox lateral mower

• Angular gear/front mower

• Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)

• Shifting gear/front mower (CV)

• Angular gear/front mower (CRI)

• Gearbox for upper roller drive (CRI)

• Cutter bar/front mower (CV / CRI)

• Cutter bar/lateral mower

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

“Maintenance - Mowing Units”

247

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/F ahr en und Transport @ 0\mod_1196330049217_78.docx @ 6553 @ 1 @ 1

11

Pos: 72.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/TTr ansport Str aßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330270405_78.docx @ 6572 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

11.1 Transport / Road Travel

Pos: 72.3 /BA/F ahren und Tr ansport/Sel bstfahrer/Zum Transport müssen die M ähwer ke hochgekl appt sein. @ 0\mod_1196330402389_78.docx @ 6591 @ @ 1

The mowing units must be folded up for transport.

Pos: 72.4 /BA/Sicher heit/Fahren und Transport/Gefahr Str aßenfahrt,Mitfahren,F ahr verhalten BM 400 @ 0 \mod_1196330503498_78.docx @ 6611 @ @ 1

Danger! - Road travel, passengers and handling

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The mowing units must be in transport position.

• Move the side guards of the front mowing unit right and left to transport position.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position I (road travel).

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position II (travelling gear on).

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations must be adhered to (lighting, identification).

• To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines the total height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).

• When driving on public roads, lower the front axle to achieve a transport height of max. 4 m.

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

Pos: 72.5 /BA/F ahren und Tr ansport/Sel bstfahrer/Hi nweis U m den Antrieb der Maschi ne zu schützen, steht 5 Sekunden nach dem @ 181\mod_1376988666990_78.docx @ 1552865 @ @ 1

Pos: 72.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

To protect the drive of the machine, the work hydraulics is not available five seconds after the diesel engine has been started.

248

Pos: 72.7 /BA/F ahren und Tr ansport/Sel bstfahrer/Vorbereitung für di e Transport- /Straß enfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330928139_78.docx @ 6630 @ 2 @ 1

11.2.1 Folding Up the Guards

Driving and Transport

11.2 Preparation for transport/road travel

Pos: 72.8 /BA/F ahren und Tr ansport/Sel bstfahrer/Schutze hochkl appen @ 0\mod_1196331136248_78.docx @ 6733 @ 3 @ 1

• Fold up the guards on the mowing units.

• Lower the hydraulic axle suspension. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic

Axle Suspension".)

• Fold up the mowing units. (See chapter "Operation – Mowing Units" (Transport Position).)

• Move the front mowing unit to centre position. (with sideshift option)

• Make certain the lock has engaged.

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position (I) (road travel).

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position (II) (travelling gear on).

Caution! - Effect: Damage to the machine

Check every time before transport to make certain the outer side guards (2) of the lateral mowing units right/left have automatically folded up into transport position.

If they have not, repeat the process for folding up the lateral mowing units. It may be necessary to move the outer side guards into transport position manually before the lateral mowing units are folded up.

Pos: 72.9 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 207

Always move the side guard (1) of the front mowing unit from the right and left sides to the transport position before road travel.

249

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.10 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Fr ontmähwer k in Mi ttelstell ung bring en BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286974134093_78.docx @ 464223 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.2 Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option)

Pos: 72.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.208

Activate the (24,25) keys on the multi-function lever to move the front mowing unit to central position.

Note

The front mower is in central position as soon as the arrow (1) is aligned to the centre of the top link (2).

250

Pos: 72.12 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFehler meldung 1414 bzw. 1415 @ 185\mod_1379514238841_78.docx @ 1597203 @ 3 @ 1

Driving and Transport

11.2.3 Error Message 1414 or 1415

Pos: 72.13 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Warnung F ehler mel dung 1414 bzw. 1415 miß achtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 72.14 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Verrieg elung pr üfen BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

Pos: 72.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 209

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

251

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.16 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Absperrhahn am Fr ontausleg er sperren @ 0\mod_1196333122498_78.docx @ 6832 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

Pos: 72.17 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Straß e/F el d @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 210:

• Set the shut-off valve (1) on the front to the closed position (position B). The shut-off valve is located under the front guard.

11.2.5 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 72.18 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Fr eigabeschalter Str aße/F eld i n Posi tion bringen @ 0\mod_1196333385858_78.docx @ 6851 @ @ 1

1 II

Pos: 72.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

Fig. 211

• Set the road safety switch to "Road travel" position. (Position I)

252

Pos: 72.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter F ahr antrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.6 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 72.21 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/Fr eigabeschalter Fahrantrieb i n Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333615201_78.docx @ 6870 @ @ 1

1 II

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

Fig. 212

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position (II) (travelling gear on).

253

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.23 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM otor anl assen @ 0\mod_1196338713030_78.docx @ 6889 @ 2 @ 1

11.3 Starting the engine

Pos: 72.24 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Motor nicht i n g eschl ossenen R äumen laufen lassen. (2012-08-15 08:36:40) @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.docx @ 6915 @ @ 1

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

• Activate the horn.

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Pos: 72.25 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 349\mod_1436350344464_78.docx @ 2625551 @ @ 1

1.

2.

3.

120 s

27 018 234 0

1

Fig. 213

1) Main battery switch

2) Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 72.26 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 72.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

254

Pos: 72.28 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Motor anlassen M AN @ 123\mod_1345016421408_78.docx @ 1126693 @ @ 1

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 214

• Turn the ignition key to “III” position.

If the engine does not start within 20 seconds:

• Release the ignition key and turn the ignition key to “0” position.

• Repeat the starting process after 2 minutes.

If the engine starts:

• Release the ignition key and check the “engine failure” indicator lamp.

If the engine failure indicator lamp goes out:

• Allow the engine to run at idle speed until the cooling water temperature display rises.

If the “engine failure” indicator lamp does not go out:

• Switch off the engine and remove the fault.

255

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.30 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Abwürgen des Motors ( 2012-08-10 11:02:16) @ 0\mod_1196345072451_78.docx @ 7033 @ 3 @ 1

11.3.1 Killing the engine

Pos: 72.31 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SStarten mit einer Hilfsbatterie @ 0\mod_1196345290139_78.docx @ 7052 @ 3 @ 1

Caution! - Killing the engine

Effect: Damage to the machine

• If an engine at operating heat stalls, immediately restart the engine to avoid an excessive heat accumulation at functionally important parts. Allow the engine to run at idle speed for approx. 1 to 2 minutes before finally turning it off.

11.3.2 Starting with an Auxiliary Battery

Pos: 72.32 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Batteri egase si nd hochexpl osi v Versi on 2 (2012-08-15 11:14:52) @ 0\mod_1196345356733_78.docx @ 7071 @ @ 1

Danger! -

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.

• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

Pos: 72.33 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Sel bstfahrer/kalte Jahr eszeit @ 0\mod_1196345438248_78.docx @ 7090 @ @ 1

The machine can be started with an additional 12-V battery in the cold season. The auxiliary battery must be connected in parallel with the machine batteries.

Pos: 72.34.1 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Anfahren ( 2012- 08- 15 11:44:06) @ 0\mod_1196345912842_78.docx @ 7109 @ 2 @ 1

11.4 Starting to Drive

Pos: 72.34.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Starting to Drive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

256

Pos: 72.34.3 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Beschl eunigungsver hal ten einstell en Fahrhebel N EU @ 41 \mod_1271309857175_78.docx @ 369255 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.1 Setting the Acceleration Behaviour

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.4 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/A/Allgemei nes zum F ahr en @ 8\mod_1219066297300_78.docx @ 109057 @ 3 @ 1

Fig.215

Four different acceleration stages can be selected while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).

With constant operation of the multi-function lever (1) in a direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage IV.

• Move the selector switch (2) to the desired acceleration stage.

11.4.2 General on Driving

Pos: 72.34.5 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemei nes zum F ahr en Heckl enkung BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320312716900_78.docx @ 744545 @ @ 1

Fig. 216:

Observe the following instructions when driving:

• Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering

• The machine handles differently in level I and II

• In the case of an error message in the Info centre immediately stop and remove the error. If you cannot rectify the fault inform the customer service or your KRONE dealer

Pos: 72.34.6 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemei nes zum F ahr en Notl enkkräfte @ 87\mod_1320313253096_78.docx @ 744601 @ @ 1

Pos: 72.34.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Emergency steering forces

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

257

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.8 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Ü ber hitzen des H ydr ostatsystems @ 349\mod_1436257074042_78.docx @ 2623886 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.3 Overheating of Hydrostatic System

The hydraulic system may overheat, e.g. due to overload of traction drive (steep hill ascent, getting stuck on the field).

If the hydraulic system overheats an acoustic warning signal sounds and a warning message appears in the display.

When hydraulic system is overheated:

• Stop traction drive.

• Stop all work functions.

• Allow the diesel engine to continue running.

• Determine the cause of overheating. Depending on the reason of overheating, possible measures to solve the problem are as follows: e.g. tow the machine or move it to flatter ground.

• Then continue to drive at lower speed. Thus oil temperature declines.

Note

If the traction drive has been killed, never wait longer than 5 seconds to reset the control lever to “neutral”; subsequently select a lower speed.

The drive torque which acts on the drive wheels depends on the oil pressure in the hydrostatic drive system. If the pressure requirement becomes higher than the pressure in the hydrostatic system, the overpressure valve will open and the self-propelled high performance mowerconditioner will reduce speed or not move.

As soon as the required drive torque decreases (this is reached by selecting a lower speed), the machine will drive on again.

Pos: 72.34.9 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vor wärtsfahr en F ahr hebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271311435596_78.docx @ 369305 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.4 Driving Forwards

Pos: 72.34.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.217

Starting forwards from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the machine starts to move forwards and accelerates.

• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

• If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear while travelling, the machine decelerates; it is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.

258

Pos: 72.34.11 /BA/Fahren und Transport/M odulgruppe/Big M 400/500/R ückwärtsfahren F ahrhebel N EU (2012- 08- 24 10:10:00) @ 41\mod_1271312002784_78.docx @ 369355 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.5 Reversing

Driving and Transport

Fig.218

Starting in reverse from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear; the machine starts to move in reverse and accelerates.

• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

• If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until it comes to a stop by friction.

Pos: 72.34.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.

259

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.13 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahr er/Tempomat F ahr hebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312183893_78.docx @ 369410 @ 2333 @ 1

11.5

11.5.1

Cruise Control

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When the cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed stored for the cruise control mode.

Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode

The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field) the machine is currently in. One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.

Fig.219

• Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the middle position.

The momentary travelling speed is stored.

The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.

260

11.5.2 Activating Cruise Control

Driving and Transport

Fig.220

• While driving, move the multi-function lever (2) to the right without the activation key. The saved speed is reached and the

Centre display.

icon for cruise control becomes active in the Info

11.5.3 Deactivating Cruise Control

Pos: 72.34.14 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, operating the operating brake and switching off the travelling gear.

If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display switches to the value that is saved for the currently selected operating mode (field or road speed).

261

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.15 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahr er/Anhalten F ahr hebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312895643_78.docx @ 369460 @ 23 @ 1

11.6

11.6.1

Stopping

The machine can be brought to a stop either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.

Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever

Fig.221

Stopping from forward travel:

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Note -

Alternative

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the left during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Stopping from reverse travel:

Pos: 72.34.16 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.222

If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during reverse travel, the machine decelerates.

It is braked until is comes to a stop.

262

Pos: 72.34.17 /BA/Fahren und Transport/M odulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Anhalten mit F uß bremsen (2012-08-15 13:21:18) @ 0\mod_1196350380076_78.docx @ 7512 @ 3 @ 1

11.6.2 Stopping with Foot Brakes

Driving and Transport

Danger!

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly

Fig. 223:

Brake the machine slightly:

• Depress the foot brake slightly

• When you release the brake pedal, the machine accelerates and returns to its original driving speed.

Pos: 72.34.18 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):

• Press the foot brake forcefully downwards.

The machine immedialety comes to a complete stop.

263

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.19 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/FF eststellbremse @ 6\mod_1214898864996_78.docx @ 96776 @ 2 @ 1

11.7 Parking Brake

Pos: 72.34.20 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahr er/Feststellbr emse @ 0\mod_1196350787826_78.docx @ 7531 @ @ 1

Danger! - Leaving the Cab

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Before leaving the cab, always apply the parking brake.

• Release the parking brake each time before starting to drive.

Fig. 224:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

Pos: 72.34.21 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

- Parking brake released

II

- Parking brake engaged

264

Pos: 72.34.22 /BA/Fahren und Transport/M odulgruppe/Big M 400/500/M otor abstell en Cater pillar/M AN @ 142\mod_1357814095362_78.docx @ 1263522 @ 2 @ 1

11.8 Switching Off the Engine

Driving and Transport

Note

To protect the engine from overheating after operation under load, the engine must run for at least three minutes in lower idle before the engine is switched off.

Fig. 225

• Bring the machine to a complete stop.

• Let the engine run at lower idle for three minutes to cool off the engine.

• Turn the ignition key (1) to “0” position.

• Activate the parking brake release switch in “II” position (engaged).

• Activate the traction drive release switch in “I” position (off).

Pos: 72.34.23 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Maschi ne abstellen ( 2012-08-13 10:28:52) @ 0\mod_1196352108780_78.docx @ 7590 @ 2 @ 1

11.9 Switch off the machine

Pos: 72.34.24 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Leaving the machine

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Move the mowing units into transport position.

• Move the "Road/Field" release switch to the road position.

• Apply the holding brake.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key.

• If necessary, fit wheel chocks in place.

265

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A- E/AAbschleppen der M aschine @ 35\mod_1256130365838_78.docx @ 326611 @ 2 @ 1

11.10 Towing

Pos: 72.34.26 /BA/Fahren und Transport/M odulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Abschleppen (2012- 08- 13 11:06:10) @ 0\mod_1196352293795_78.docx @ 7609 @ @ 1

Caution!

Only move machine out of the danger zone. Never tow over longer distances.

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure for releasing the parking brake, then the parking brake must be released manually.

Pos: 72.34.27 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FF eststellbremse manuell lösen @ 0\mod_1196352596201_78.docx @ 7628 @ 3 @ 1

11.10.1 Releasing the holding brake manually

Pos: 72.34.28 /BA/Sicher hei t/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012- 08- 13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Pos: 72.34.29 /BA/Fahren und Transport/U nterleg keile anbri ngen @ 0\mod_1196352858998_78.docx @ 7647 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Fitting wheel chocks

• Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front axle).

• Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the machine cannot roll away.

• Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and place then close up against the drive wheels.

Pos: 72.34.30 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahr er/Feststellbr emse lösen Bild BM 420 @ 58 \mod_1297059948584_78.docx @ 554750 @ @ 1

Fig.226

Pos: 72.34.31 /BA/Fahren und Transport/M odulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Feststellbr emse lösen (2012- 08- 13 11:56:33) @ 0\mod_1196353036858_78.docx @ 7666 @ @ 1 The spring (1) must be set on a block to release the parking brake.

To do this:

• Loosen the nuts (2)

• Set the spring (1) to block.

• Tighten the nuts (2) and counter.

Note - Towing

• Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard warning flasher) and brake lights function.

• Switch the road/field release switch into the road travel position.

• Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.

Pos: 73 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

266

Pos: 74.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Bedienung M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196403531183_78.docx @ 7808 @ 1 @ 1

12 Operation

– Mowing Units

Pos: 74.2.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBesti mmungsgemäße Ver wendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

Operation – Mowing Units

12.1 Intended use

Pos: 74.2.2 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Sel bstfahrer/Besti mmungsgemäß er G ebr auch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 74.2.3 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Z ur besti mmungsgemäßen Ver wendung gehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.docx @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 74.2.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVer nüftiger weise vor hersehbare Fehl anwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

12.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 74.2.5 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Sel bstfahrer/Vernünftiger weise vor hersehb are Fehlanwendung T 1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 74.2.6 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Sel bstfahrer/Auflistung von F ehl anwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 74.2.7 /BA/Einl eitung/Besti mmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht besti mmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.3 /BA/Bedi enung /Fal scher U mgang mit F ehler mel dung en @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

Pos: 74.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

267

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBedi enung der Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404785480_78.docx @ 7850 @ 2 @ 1

12.3 Operation of Mowing Units

Pos: 74.6 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, H eben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.7 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Warnung Quetschg efahr durch Zeitverzögertes H eben / senken von Baut eilen @ 184\mod_1378886868212_78.docx @ 1582523 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.8 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke BiG M /Bedi enung der Mähwer ke Bild BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271766652336_78.docx @ 372975 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Crushing hazard due to a time delayed lifting / lowering of parts.

In the first five seconds after starting the diesel engine, the work hydraulics is still not available. The function for lifting / lowering is executed with a time delay to activate the function within this period.

• There must be no persons in the crushing zone .

• Before starting the diesel engine, make certain there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine .

Pos: 74.9 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke BiG M /Bedi enung der Mähwer ke Text @ 0\mod_1196406980386_78.docx @ 7910 @ @ 1

Fig.227

Operation of mowing units is divided into three areas.

1 Operating panel

The operating panel contains switches that are needed to operate the mowing units. (for example "Road/Field" release switch)

2 Multi-function lever

The multi-function lever combines all functions needed to operate the mowing units. (this includes lifting, lowering, folding up, switching to working position, transport position or headland position and turning on the mowing unit drives)

3 Info Centre

All settings/specifications for automatic sequences are stored in the Info Centre. (for example time/path control, overcut, automatic cleaning time)

For further information, please refer to the Chapter "Info Centre".

Pos: 74.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

268

Pos: 74.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähwer ke abkl appen @ 31\mod_1252577545091_78.docx @ 306348 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.4 Folding Down the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/War nung - Abkl appen, Senken, H eben, Abkl appen der M ähwer ke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.13 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 349 \mod_1436350344464_78.docx @ 2625551 @ @ 1

1.

2.

3.

120 s

27 018 234 0

1

Fig. 228

1) Main battery switch

2) Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 74.14 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142 \mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 74.15 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Frontmähwer k/Neuer Fahrhebel/U m das Fr ontmähwer k anzuheben bzw. abzusenken muss der Absperr hahn am Frontausleger g eöffnet sein. @ 185\mod_1379577347672_78.docx @ 1598041 @ @ 1

The shut-off valve on the front outrigger must be opened to lift or lower the front mowing unit.

Pos: 74.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Motor Starten / Fr eigabeschalter Str aße/F eld i n Posi tion F eldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 74.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

269

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.18.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Tr ansport- i n Vorgewendestellung abkl appen @ 184\mod_1378965588422_78.docx @ 1583436 @ 3 @ 1

12.4.1 Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.18.2 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Tr ansport- in di e Vorgewendestellung abkl appen @ 184\mod_1378975780492_78.docx @ 1586544 @ @ 1

Fig. 229

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (4).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (6).

Pos: 74.18.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke gleichzei tig von Tr ansport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378976607099_78.docx @ 1586573 @ 3 @ 1

12.4.2 Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position

Pos: 74.18.4 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Gleichzeitig von Transport- i n Vorgewendestellung abkl appen BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378964225850_78.docx @ 1583408 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 230

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (10).

270

Pos: 74.20.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähwer ke absenken @ 184\mod_1378976759848_78.docx @ 1586601 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.5 Lowering Mowing Units

Pos: 74.20.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/War nung - Abkl appen, Senken, H eben, Abkl appen der M ähwer ke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.20.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k von Transpor t- / i n Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378977108393_78.docx @ 1586659 @ 3 @ 1

12.5.1 Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 74.20.4 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Frontmähwer k/N euer Fahrhebel/Fr ontmähwer k in Ar beitsstellung absenken BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378903895858_78.docx @ 1582742 @ @ 1

Fig. 231

• Press the key (11) briefly.

The front mowing unit is in float position.

Pos: 74.20.5 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Vorg ewende- i n Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978650013_78.docx @ 1586715 @ 3 @ 1

12.5.2 Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working

Position

Pos: 74.20.6 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Vorgewende- i n Ar bei tsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978862252_78.docx @ 1586744 @ @ 1

Fig. 232

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (4) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

Pos: 74.20.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (6) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

271

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.20.8 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle M ähwer ke von Vorgewende- in Ar beitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978192744_78.docx @ 1586687 @ 3 @ 1

12.5.3 Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 74.20.9 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /All e M ähwer ke/N euer F ahr hebel/All e M ähwer ke von Vorgewendestell ung i n die Arbeitsstellung senken BM 400/500 @ 184\mod_1378979949854_78.docx @ 1586773 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 233

• Press the key (10) briefly.

All mowing units are in float position.

To this end, the lateral mowing units are lowered according to the set mode (time / distance control) into working position.

The mowing units are lowered in the following order.

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay)

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting of the Machine”

272

Pos: 74.22.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähwer ksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196415953651_78.docx @ 8154 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.6 Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 74.22.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/War nung - Abkl appen, Senken, H eben, Abkl appen der M ähwer ke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.22.3 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500Motor anlassen: Vorr aussetzung Bild_M AN @ 349\mod_1436350344464_78.docx @ 2625551 @ @ 1

1.

2.

3.

120 s

27 018 234 0

1

Fig. 234

1)

2)

Main battery switch

Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 74.22.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/M otor anlassen: Motor Starten / Fr eigabeschalter Str aße/Fel d i n Posi tion F eldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 74.22.5 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Mähwer ksantir eb/Vorraussetzung en Teil 2_Mähwer ksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416105979_78.docx @ 8173 @ @ 1

• Move the mowing units at least to the headland position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch (4) to position (II) "Travelling gear on".

Pos: 74.22.6 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Mähwer ksantir eb/Hinweis M ähen_M ähwer ksantrieb @ 0 \mod_1196416325666_78.docx @ 8192 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.22.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Mowing

To be able to switch on the mowing unit drives, the mowing units must be in at least the headland position or lower.

273

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.22.8 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Mähwer ksantir eb/Mähwerksantriebe ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 151\mod_1362490438725_78.docx @ 1350655 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.1 Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives

Note

The cross switch lever is used to switch on or switch off the mowing unit drives.

Always actuate the cross switch lever beyond the second resistor when switching on and switching off.

To switch on the mowing unit drives, press key (17) additionally and hold it down. Only return the cross switch back to central position when the mowing unit drives are started.

Pos: 74.22.9 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Mähwer ksantir eb/Neuer Fahrhebel /Mähwer ksantrieb li nks ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362650623161_78.docx @ 1355181 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.2 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 74.22.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 235

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor until the left mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor to switch off the left mowing unit drive.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

274

Pos: 74.22.11 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Bi G M /Mähwer ksantireb/N euer F ahrhebel/M ähwer ksantrieb rechts ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651402841_78.docx @ 1355387 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.3 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 236

To switch on:

Pos: 74.22.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor until the right mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor to switch off the right mowing unit drive.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

275

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.22.13 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Bi G M /Mähwer ksantireb/N euer F ahrhebel/M ähwer ksantrieb fr ont ein-/ ausschal ten @ 152\mod_1362651275097_78.docx @ 1355358 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.4 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front

Pos: 74.22.14 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 237

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor until the mowing unit drive front switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor to switch off the mowing unit drive front.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

276

Pos: 74.22.15 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Bi G M /Mähwer ksantireb/N euer F ahrhebel/Alle M ähwer ksantriebe ei n-/ ausschal ten @ 152\mod_1362651081570_78.docx @ 1355270 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.5 Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 238

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) back (M) beyond the second resistor until all mowing unit drives are switched on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after all mowing unit drives are switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the rear (M) beyond the second resistor to switch off all mowing unit drives.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

Pos: 74.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Switch off all mowing unit drives

• Pressing the key (1) on the multi-function lever also switches off all mowing unit drives.

277

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.24.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähwer ke anheben @ 184\mod_1378980436932_78.docx @ 1586831 @ 2 @ 1

12.7 Lifting the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.24.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/War nung - Abkl appen, Senken, H eben, Abkl appen der M ähwer ke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.24.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k von Ar beits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994644037_78.docx @ 1587527 @ 3 @ 1

12.7.1 Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.4 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Frontmähwer k/N euer Fahrhebel/Fr ontmähwer k von Ar beit s- in Vorgewendestell ung BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378904181676_78.docx @ 1582801 @ @ 1

Fig. 239

Inching

• Press the key (8) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Pos: 74.24.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Automatically

• Press the key (8) briefly into the second gear and release it.

278

Pos: 74.24.6 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Arbeits- i n Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378984035421_78.docx @ 1587008 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.7.2 Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.7 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Arbeits- i n Vorgewendestellung heben Big M 500 @ 184\mod_1378985126507_78.docx @ 1587124 @ @ 1

Fig. 240

Lateral mowing unit left

Inching

• Press the key (5) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (5) briefly to the second gear and release it.

Lateral mowing unit right

Inching

• Press the key (7) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Pos: 74.24.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Automatically

• Press the key (7) briefly to the second gear and release it.

279

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.24.9 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle M ähwer ke von Ar beits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994442717_78.docx @ 1587434 @ 3 @ 1

12.7.3 Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.10 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Bi G M /Alle Mähwer ke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwer ke gleichzeitig von Ar beits- in Vorgewendestell ung heben @ 184\mod_1378965937846_78.docx @ 1583494 @ @ 1

Fig. 241

• Press the key (9) briefly.

All mowing units are lifted to the headland position according to the set mode (time / distance control).

Lift the mowing units in the following order:

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay).

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting Machine”.

Pos: 74.25 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Opti nal tastend von Arbeitsstellung i n VGStell ung heben @ 346\mod_1434955237353_78.docx @ 2610989 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Inching (option)

• Press the key (9) to the first shift step.

The function is executed as long as the key is held down.

Automatically

• Press the key (9) briefly to the second shift key and release it.

According to the set mode, all mowers are raised from working position to headland position.

280

Pos: 74.27.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähwer ke ankl appen @ 31\mod_1252561666154_78.docx @ 305965 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.8 Folding up the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.27.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Ausheben_Senken_Ankl appen der Mähwer ke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.docx @ 8665 @ @ 1

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

• After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 74.27.3 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Warnung F ehler mel dung 1414 bzw. 1415 miß achtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 74.27.4 /BA/F ahr en und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verrieg elung pr üfen BM 420 @ 185 \mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.27.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 242

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

281

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.27.6 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Vorg ewende - i n Tr ansportstellung ankl appen @ 184\mod_1378984034421_78.docx @ 1586979 @ 3 @ 1

12.8.1 Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position

Pos: 74.27.7 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Arbeits- i n Vorgewendestellung ankl appen Bil d @ 41\mod_1271326036815_78.docx @ 370665 @ @ 1

Fig.243

Pos: 74.27.8 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwer ke/N euer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwer ke ei nzeln von Vorgewende- i n Transpor tstellung ankl appen @ 184\mod_1378990006653_78.docx @ 1587409 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (5).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (7).

Pos: 74.27.9 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer ke gleichzei tig von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378984036264_78.docx @ 1587037 @ 3 @ 1

12.8.2 Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to

Transport Position

Pos: 74.27.10 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Bi G M /Seitliche M ähwer ke/N euer F ahr hebel/Seitenmähwer ke gleichzeitig von Vorgewende- in Tr ansportstellung ankl appen BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378965937127_78.docx @ 1583465 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 244

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

• Press the key (12) and hold it.

• Press the key (9).

282

Pos: 74.29 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM ähen @ 0\mod_1196426120010_78.docx @ 8839 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.9 Mowing

Pos: 74.30 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Gefahr - U ner wartete Bewegung fortschl eudern von Steinen @ 0\mod_1196425801338_78.docx @ 8820 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected motion of cutting tools or mowing units and forcibly ejected stones during operation.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The mowing units are suitable for and intended for cutting crops growing on the ground!

• To prevent any of the mowing units from overloading, when operating a single mowing unit do not drive faster than you would if you were operating all mowing units simultaneously.

• The mowing units are not suitable for mowing embankments!

• The support skids must rest on the ground before start-up and during work!

• Always check the protective devices for damage before the machine is used. Replace damaged protective devices immediately.

• Move the protective devices into their protective positions.

• Do not use the machine until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone of the mowing units.

Pos: 74.31 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Reparatur_Wartung _Rei nigungs @ 0\mod_1196426193026_78.docx @ 8858 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Work on the cutter blades or their fastenings must only be performed with the drive stopped and the cutting discs and drums stopped.

• Switch off the mowing unit drives

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until the cutting discs and/or drums have come to a complete stop

• Remove the ignition key!

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Support the lifted mower bed! Never step under suspended loads!

• Safe operation is only guaranteed if the blades have been fitted according to the instructions!

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Pos: 74.32 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Hinweis abschalten der Schwi mmstellung während des Mähens @ 49\mod_1287055607937_78.docx @ 464739 @ @ 1

Note!

During mowing the mowing units are in “float position” so they can adapt to the ground contours during mowing process. If the machine is switched off when the mowing units are in working position, the float position will be deactivated. When starting again in working position the float position will stay deactivated. Only after the key for the function “lower all mowers” is shortly actuated, the mowing units will be in float position again (alternately the float position can be individually activated with the accordant key for each mowing unit).

Pos: 74.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

283

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.34 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Ei nheit Zetterprall blech bzw. Ei nheit Schneckenquerför derer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 74.35 /BA/Bedienung /Wil dschutz Sel bstfahrer @ 46\mod_1283864895734_78.docx @ 451321 @ 2 @ 1

12.10 Game animal protection

Pic. 245

After the first switching on of the mowing unit drive an information picture with the correct mowing performance appears temporarily on the display.

When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes it away.

A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.

In doing so, you drive directly into the centre of the parcel without mowing the boundary area and mow anticlockwise from “inside to outside”. Therefore the animal can leave the field in compliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.

Pos: 74.36 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Vor aussetzung zum Mähen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427018838_78.docx @ 8878 @ @ 1

Precondition for mowing:

• Open the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• Starting the engine

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the mowing units to the working position.

• The guard cloths must be in the working position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position II (on).

• Switch on the mowing unit drives.

• Move the "Parking brake" release switch to position I (released).

• Increase rpms to working speed.

• Drive into the crop.

• The travel speed during mowing is determined by usage conditions (soil conditions, height, density and nature of the crop)

Pos: 74.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note -

The disc mowers are designed to travel forwards. If the road safety switch is in field position, the mowing units are automatically lifted out when the machine is reversed.

284

Pos: 74.38 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSchutze in Ar beitsstellung bri ngen @ 35\mod_1258461422738_78.docx @ 335195 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.1 Moving the guards into the working position

Pos: 74.39 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Schutze i n Arbeitsposition bringen BM 400 @ 83 \mod_1317286459496_78.docx @ 728207 @ @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 246

• Switch off the engine. Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling

• Check the guard cloths (1,3) regularly

• Replace worn or damaged guard cloths

• The guard cloth (3) must be tightened each time before using the mower so that it cannot be caught by the conditioner auger

Note

The protective equipment on the mowing units, e.g. cloths and hoods, protects against flying stones and similar objects and also prevents access to dangerous parts.

Fold down the side plates (1) before operation and secure with the rotary tops (2).

Pos: 74.40 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /M ähwer ksantir eb/Mähen mi t einzelnen M ähwer ken @ 0\mod_1196428174510_78.docx @ 8956 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.2 Mowing with Individual Mowing Units

Pos: 74.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The following options are available for mowing remaining pieces.

• Lift the mowing units that are no longer required for mowing into headland position. To do this, activate the appropriate keys on the multi-function lever.

• The front mowing unit alone can be used to mow small parcels of crop or narrow sections in open fields. The lateral mowing units then remain in transport position.

285

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.42 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Schnellstopp F ahr hebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329582862_78.docx @ 370790 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.3 Quick Stop

Fig.247

Activating quick stop

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving.

The machine decelerates to a complete stop.

Pos: 74.43 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Schneller F ahrtrichtungswechsel (Schnellreversier ung) F ahrhebel N EU @ 41\mod_1271329848065_78.docx @ 370815 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.4 Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)

Pos: 74.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.248

Activating fast reversing

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the middle position.

The machine decelerates down to standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to approx.

70% of the previous travelling speed.

Note

Fast reversing is possible only in the field mode.

286

Pos: 74.45 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Achstrennung ei n- /ausschalten @ 349\mod_1436258212824_78.docx @ 2623917 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.5

Operation – Mowing Units

Switching On/Off Axle Separation

Switch on axle separation to prevent the wheels from spinning on slippery surfaces. Axle separation is only available in field mode.

Note

The temperature in the hydrostat may increase if axle separation is permanently switched on.

Therefore axle separation must not be used over an extended period of time.

Prerequisites for activation of axle separation:

• The road/field release switch must be in the field mode.

• Traction drive release switch must be switched on.

• The driving speed must not exceed 14 km/h.

Fig. 249

Switching on axle separation

Actuate the axle separation button (1) - axle separation is switched on.

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of the info centre.

Switching off axle separation

• Actuate axle separation key (1) again.

Pos: 74.46 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of info centre.

287

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.47 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke BiG M /Bodenkl appen abbauen @ 186\mod_1379937412099_78.docx @ 1604291 @ 2 @ 1

12.11 Removing the Ground Flaps

For cross conveyor design

Pos: 74.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 250

To prevent blockages in the conveyor channel on stony grounds, the ground flaps can be removed.

Detaching

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Loosen the screw connections (2).

• Open the ground flap and detach it to the top.

Keep the removed ground flaps for a later reinstallation in a secure place.

Attaching

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Hook in the ground flap.

• Close the ground flaps and tighten the screw connections (2).

288

Pos: 74.49 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/D eakti vier en der Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1196677719369_78.docx @ 10840 @ 2 @ 1

12.12 Deactivating the axle suspension

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 251:

The BiG M front axle has a hydro-pneumatic suspension. If axle suspension is active, the two ball valves (1) and (2) are open, as illustrated in the figure.

Pos: 75 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 252:

The front axle suspension can be deactivated.

• To deactivate the front axle suspension, shut the ball valve (1) for the left hydraulic cylinder and the ball valve (2) for the right hydraulic cylinder .

Note - Lowering / lifting the front axle

The front axle can be moved both with activated and deactivated axle suspension.

289

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Ei nstellungen der M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196660315463_78.docx @ 9095 @ 1 @ 1

13

Pos: 76.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSpeziell e Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

13.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 76.3 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - R epar atur _Wartung_R einigungs_3 @ 0\mod_1196660613260_78.docx @ 9153 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!

• After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

290

Pos: 76.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstell en der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196660879619_78.docx @ 9191 @ 2 @ 1

13.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.5.4 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Schni tthöhe/Schnitthöhe am Frontmähwer k Bild @ 0\mod_1196661320135_78.docx @ 9250 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

13.2 Adjusting the cutting height

Pos: 76.5.2 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Schni tthöhe/Allgemein Schnitt höhe Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196661001853_78.docx @ 9210 @ @ 1

The cutting height can be adjusted to different soil conditions. Each of the mowing units is adjusted individually for height.

Before making settings for cutting height, the hydraulic axle suspension must be in the mowing position. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Pos: 76.5.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Note -

For a good cutting pattern, adjust the cutting height to the same height on all mowing units

Fig. 253:

Pos: 76.5.5 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Schni tthöhe/Schnitthöhe größ er_geri nger @ 0\mod_1196661562478_78.docx @ 9269 @ @ 1

The cutting height is adjusted via the top link (1).

To do this:

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Rotate the top suspension arm (1)

Pos: 76.5.6 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

291

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.5.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Aushubhöhe ei nstellen @ 0\mod_1196675396916_78.docx @ 10668 @ 3 @ 1

13.2.2

Pos: 76.5.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196674467494_78.docx @ 10628 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Lifting Height

13.2.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.5.9 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Aushubhöhe des Fr ontmähwerks einstell en @ 0\mod_1196661830291_78.docx @ 9309 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.5.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 254:

The front mowing unit can be suspended in several positions by means of the „Weiste‟ triangle.

This causes the front mower to lift up to a higher or lower position.

• In the upper position (1), the front mower lifts to a higher position

• At mid position (2) the mower is in the normal position

• In the lower position (3), the front mower lifts to a lower position

By linking the upper rod into the lower positions (2, 3) on the ‘Weiste’ triangle, it is possible to obtain a smaller adjustment to the front mower inclination. This keeps the cutting height constant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land

292

Pos: 76.5.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstell en der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196674202135_78.docx @ 10608 @ 3 @ 1

13.2.3

Pos: 76.5.12 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675520994_78.docx @ 10687 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the cutting height

13.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.5.13 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schnitthöhe/Einstell ung der Schnitthöhe am Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196664319228_78.docx @ 10095 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 255

• Lower the lateral mowing unit into working position.

• Remove the linch pin (1).

• Put the locking clip (2) to one side.

• Set the direction of rotation for the setting ratchet (4) on the lever (3).

Lengthen threaded spindle = smaller cutting height

Shorten threaded spindle = bigger cutting height

• Twist the threaded spindle (3), until the locking clip (2) can be inserted.

• Secure the locking clip (2) with the linch pin (1).

Pos: 76.5.14 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schnitthöhe/Hi nweis Ratsche Verlängerung @ 348\mod_1435826551180_78.docx @ 2620505 @ @ 1

If necessary, the lever ratchet can be extended. To do this, you can find an extension with cotter pin in the storage compartment.

Pos: 76.5.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

293

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.5.16 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Wasser waage @ 348\mod_1435827049713_78.docx @ 2620536 @ @ 1

Fig. 256

Display (e.g.) Theoretical cutting height

Suitable for operating conditions

+6°

+3°

+0°

-3° approx.

11 cm approx.

8cm approx.

6cm approx. 4 cm

High cut field crops: dry ground moist ground field crops dry conditions normal conditions increasing low cut

-5° approx.

3 cm risk of sward damage

The desired cutting height can be set and read off by means of spirit level.

• Loosen wing screw (1).

• Set indicator (2) to the required angle on the angle scale (3).

• Tighten wing screw.

• Change the mower setting on the setting ratchet until the bubble (4) is in the centre.

Pos: 76.5.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

One revolution of the top suspension link sleeves on the side mounted mowers (12 ratchet settings) corresponds to approx. 4 revolutions of the top link sleeve on the front mounted mower.

Additional high-cut skids must be mounted.

294

Pos: 76.5.18 /BA/Sonderausstatung/EasyC ut / AM M ähwer ke/Hochschnittkufen EasyCut @ 3\mod_1204783761105_78.docx @ 72974 @ 2 @ 1

13.3 Adjusting Skids

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 257

Adjusting skids can be used to increase the cutting height (see chapter entitled "Adjusting the cutting height")

To do this, insert the adjusting skids (3) into the glide skids (2) and screw them in place. The adjusting skids must always be mounted underneath the mowing discs that run next to the mower drum.

Pos: 76.6.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstell ung der Entl astungsfeder n ( 2015-10-19 15:05:29) @ 0\mod_1196666659447_78.docx @ 10133 @ 2 @ 1

13.4 Adjusting the Compensation Springs

Pos: 76.6.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Ei nstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Ei nstellung an den Entl astungsfeder n nur i n Tr ansportstellung Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196666898416_78.docx @ 10171 @ @ 1

DANFER! – Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs should be adjusted only while the front mower is in the transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 76.6.3 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/EasyC ut/Bodendruck/Bodendruck allgemeiner T ext all e EC @ 0 \mod_1196667271181_78.docx @ 10190 @ @ 1

The ground pressure for the cutter bar is adjusted to local conditions by means of the compensation springs. In order to protect the sward the load on the mowing spar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

Pos: 76.6.4 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

295

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.6.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.6.6 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Entlastungsfeder n am Frontmähwer k BM 420 @ 87 \mod_1320318060758_78.docx @ 744886 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.6.7 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 258

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre Chapter entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

• With the sideshift option, the front mowing unit must be in the central position (see Chapter entitled Driving and Transport “Move the mowing unit to the central position”).

• The front mowing unit must be put into the transport position before you adjust the adjusting piece (1)

• Unscrew linch pin (3)

• Unhook the spring assemblies (2)

• Insert the adjustment piece (1) into the required hole

• Insert the spring assemblies (2) and secure with linch pin (3)

• The spring assemblies (2) are fitted on the side of the mower into the fourth hole (6) from the top

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the upper position (4), this means there is less spring tension, and thus, increased ground pressure

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the lower position (5), this means there is greater spring tension, and thus, reduced ground pressure

296

Pos: 76.6.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.6.9 /BA/Einstell ung en/Mähwer ke/Einstellung der Entl astungsfedern an den seitlichen M ähwer ken @ 0\mod_1196667911275_78.docx @ 10228 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 259:

The load on the lateral mowing units is compensated by means of the four tension springs (1) on the left and right outriggers. The ground pressure can be adjusted by reinstalling the bolts

(2).

• Lift the lateral mowing units over the headland position, so that the compensation springs are not under tension.

• Support the lateral mowing unit

• Pull out the bolts (2) after you have removed the linch pin.

• If the bolts are moved further to the left: lower ground pressure

• If the bolts are moved further to the right: the ground pressure is increased

• Insert the bolts (2) and secure with the linch pin.

Note

When driving on the road fit the maximum spring compensation bolts at level 3 (centre hole)

297

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstell ung der Zetterdr ehzahl @ 0\mod_1196668564463_78.docx @ 10266 @ 2 @ 1

13.5 Adjusting the Tedder Speed

Pos: 76.9 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Ei nstellarbeiten / Ei nstellungen/Gefahr - Ei nstellungen an der M aschine @ 0\mod_1196668628056_78.docx @ 10285 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.10 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Settings on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill! Remove the ignition key!

13.5.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.11 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/An den seitlichen Mähwer ken BiG M 420 @ 348\mod_1435827291681_78.docx @ 2620597 @ @ 1

Fig. 260

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. This influences the efficiency of the conditioner and power consumption.

Minimum operation: 700 rpm

Maximum operation: 1000 rpm

• Screw out the screw (2) on the actuating lever (1).

• Twist actuating lever by 180°.

• Secure actuating lever again using the screw (2).

To synchronize the gearwheels during switching operation, loosen the screws (3), open the flap

(4) and turn the gear shaft using a suitable tool.

Pos: 76.12 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Hi nweis Verschleiß an der Z etter walze mini mier en @ 348\mod_1435827443295_78.docx @ 2620628 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The wear on conditioner auger is minimized at a speed of 1000 rpm.

298

Pos: 76.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k (C V) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 3 @ 1

13.5.2 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 76.15 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Z etterdr ehzahl Bild Big M 420/500 @ 88 \mod_1321523259351_78.docx @ 754238 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

BM 420 0076

Fig. 261

Pos: 76.16 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Z etterdr ehzahl einstell en 700/1000 @ 0\mod_1196670462416_78.docx @ 10380 @ @ 1

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the speed gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Minimum speed: 700 rpm.

Maximum speed: 1000 rpm.

• Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

• Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees. (in doing so turn the mower drum (3) so that the complete actuating lever can be turned.

• Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

Pos: 76.17 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Hi nweis Verschleiß an der Z etter walze mini mier en @ 348\mod_1435827443295_78.docx @ 2620628 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The wear on conditioner auger is minimized at a speed of 1000 rpm.

299

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.19.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/EEi nstellen des Aufbereitungsbl echs @ 0\mod_1196670615681_78.docx @ 10399 @ 2 @ 1

13.6 Adjusting the conditioner plate

Pos: 76.19.2 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsblech Bild (BiG M C V)_1 @ 186\mod_1379926689284_78.docx @ 1601595 @ @ 1

(BiG M CV)

Fig. 262

Pos: 76.19.3 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsbleches T ext EasyC ut @ 3\mod_1204713282555_78.docx @ 72125 @ @ 1

The conditioning of the mowed crop can be influenced by adjusting the conditioning plate through the crank (1). The adjustment depends on the desired degree of conditioning of the crop.

+: Degree of conditioning is increased

-: Degree of conditioning is decreased

Always check the tedder for damaged tines before the machine is used:

Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

Pos: 76.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

300

Pos: 76.21 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/R ollen-Condi tioners/Roll en-C onditi oners @ 0\mod_1196673043650_78.docx @ 10513 @ 2 @ 1

13.7

Adjusting the mowing units

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI)

Fig. 263

General

The roller conditioner is supplied for use with leguminous vegetation or other leaf crops.

The conditioning intensity is adjusted by the setting spindle (1). The setting spindle (1) is used to change the distance or contact pressure of the rollers. The minimum distance (x) between the rollers must always be at least 4 mm.

Pos: 76.22 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/R ollen-Condi tioners/Ei nstellen des Roll enabstandes @ 0\mod_1196673207822_78.docx @ 10532 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.1 Adjusting the roller distance

Pos: 76.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 264:

• Loosen the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

• Turn the adjusting nut (2) on the threaded spindle with a hex key (W/F 46).

Clockwise rotation: Roller distance is reduced.

Anticlockwise rotation: Roller distance is increased.

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

301

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.24 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/R ollen-Condi tioners/Ei nstellen des Roll endruckes Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196673373025_78.docx @ 10551 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.2 Adjusting the roller pressure

Fig. 265

• Loosen the locknut (2) with a hex key (W/F 41).

• Turn the spindle on the screw head (1) with a hex key (W/F 55).

Pos: 76.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 41).

Note - Optimising crop flow

• Dimension "a" must be within the range 60 - 75 mm. If the distance is set to less than 60 mm, the upper roller will not be able to swing out far enough, which will impede crop flow.

• Reset the roller distance each time you make an adjustment.

302

Pos: 76.26 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Abstreiferbl ech am Querför der er opti onal ( BM 500) @ 0 \mod_1196673648681_78.docx @ 10570 @ 2 @ 1

13.8 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional)

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 266

The scraper (1) on the cross conveyor (right and left) are used to scrape off crop and prevent the cross conveyor from becoming clogged.

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of

X= 0-2 mm must be maintained.

To adjust the scraper:

• Loosen the screw (1)

• Push the scraper into the oblong hole until a dimension of

X= 0-2 mm is reached.

• Tighten the screw (1) again.

303

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/EEinstellen Schwadbreite @ 0\mod_1196673972744_78.docx @ 10589 @ 2 @ 1

13.9 Adjusting the swath width

Pos: 76.29 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Allgemei ner T ext @ 0 \mod_1196676313885_78.docx @ 10726 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.30 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 267:

The swath width is adjusted by means of the swath plates at the rear of the disc mowers.

13.9.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.31 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Achtung: F alsch eingestellte Schwadbleche @ 186\mod_1379930719612_78.docx @ 1602505 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

With the sideshift version, incorrectly set swath plates may damage the front wheels of the machine.

• With the sideshift version, the swath plates must always be moved to the position which is marked by the label.

Pos: 76.32 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Einstellen Schwadbreite Fr ontmähwerk @ 0 \mod_1196676466135_78.docx @ 10745 @ @ 1

Set the swath width so that the mower track is kept free.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Swath width setting: with the swath grouping option (BSS), the swath width of the front mowing unit must be set as narrow as possible. This ensures that there is enough free space available to hold the crop of the lateral mowing units.

Pos: 76.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

304

Pos: 76.34 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

13.9.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.35 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Einstellen Schwadbreite Sei tenmähwer k @ 0 \mod_1196676735025_78.docx @ 10764 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 268:

Adjust the swath width.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Set more free space for overcut.

The narrower the swath width setting on the outer swath boards (2) of the lateral mowing units, the more free space for overcut is achieved.

305

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.37.1 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/An-/Abbau der Verlänger ung BSS Schwadbreite @ 348\mod_1436170787680_78.docx @ 2622445 @ 23 @ 1

13.10

13.10.1

Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG M CV

The following work steps must be performed for the right and left cross conveyor each.

Removing Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right

1 2

3

2

BM 420 0178

Fig. 269

3

2

Fig. 270

2 1

2 1

BM 420 0179

2

BM 420 0180

Fig. 271

• Remove the linch pins (1) on the three quick release fasteners (2) of the extension on the cross conveyor.

• Open quick locks.

• Pull the both spring cotter pins (3) out of the locking bolts at the underside of the cross conveyor.

306

Adjusting the mowing units

1

BM 420 0183

Fig. 272

• Remove extension (1) from cross conveyor.

Pos: 76.37.2 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Z usatzräumer demonti eren @ 349\mod_1436187933892_78.docx @ 2623062 @ 2 @ 1

13.10.2 Dismounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right

1 2

BM 420 01081

Fig. 273

• Remove the linch pin (1) from the profile shaft of the auger.

• Remove additional scraper to the front from the shaft.

1

2

Pos: 76.37.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 420 0182

Fig. 274

• Slide shaft guard (1) over the profile shaft and screw with hexagon head screws M10 x 20

A3G (2).

307

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.37.4 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Verlänger ung BSS Schwadbreite anbauen @ 349 \mod_1436189108802_78.docx @ 2623183 @ 2 @ 1

13.10.3 Mounting Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right

2

1

BM 420 0186

Fig. 275

• Push extension (1) over the auger tray. To do this, insert the locking bolts (2) into the existing boreholes.

1 2

3

2

BM 420 0178

Fig. 276

3

2

2 1

BM 420 0179

Fig. 277

308

Adjusting the mowing units

2 1

2

BM 420 0180

Fig. 278

• Tighten the extension by means of three tensioning devices (2) and secure using linch pins

(1).

• Fill the locking bolts by means of discs d = 10 and secure by means of spring cotter pins (3).

Pos: 76.37.5 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Z usatzräumer monti eren @ 349\mod_1436191091206_78.docx @ 2623335 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.4 Mounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right

1

2

BM 420 0182

Fig. 279

• Unscrew hexagon head screws (2) and remove shaft guard (1) from profile shaft.

1 2

Pos: 76.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 420 01081

Fig. 280

• Slide additional scraper (2) onto profile shaft and secure using the linch pin (1).

309

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.39 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Einstell ung der Querlenker an den Seitenmähwer ken @ 348\mod_1435827993573_78.docx @ 2620659 @ 2 @ 1

13.11 Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted Mowers

Caution!

If the cutting height is 0°, the distance dimension “a” between side sheet (4) and outrigger arm

(5) must not be less than 70 mm.

3

1 a

Pos: 76.40 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLeitbl eche @ 0\mod_1196677535025_78.docx @ 10802 @ 2 @ 1

2

4 5

BM 400 0155

Fig. 281

The side mounted mowers (3) are aligned by means of transverse links (1).

• Loosen counter nut (2) on transverse link (1).

• Adjust the transverse links (1) until dimension is 70 mm between side mounted mower (4) and outrigger arm (5).

• Tighten counter nut (2) on transverse link (1).

13.12

Pos: 76.41 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Deflector Plates

13.12.1

Pos: 76.42 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Leitbl eche Fr ontmähwer k BM 400/420 @ 0\mod_1196677613072_78.doc x @ 10821 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

1

3

2

4

Pos: 77 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 400 0156

Fig. 282

Deflector plates are located on the front mowing unit (3) in the swath former area (2); these are fitted to the housing with fastening screws (1).

• If the swathing is uneven examine the deflector plates (4) for deformation, and straighten them if necessary.

310

Pos: 78.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sonder ausstattung- Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196678406869_78.docx @ 10859 @ 1 @ 1

14 Special Equipment

– Mowing Units

Pos: 78.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/UU mbau der Einheit Z etterpr allbl ech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196679637806_78.docx @ 10918 @ 2 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor

Pos: 78.1.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Gefahr - Es können Antriebsel emente i n Bewegung geraten @ 0\mod_1196679836822_78.docx @ 10937 @ @ 1

Danger! -

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Pos: 78.1.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Einhei t Z etterpr allbl ech bzw. Einhei t Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Pos: 78.1.5 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Vorsätze/Z ugelassene H ebezeug e ver wenden @ 15\mod_1233070508790_78.docx @ 177993 @ @ 1

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

DANGER! – Detaching!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Use only suitable and approved lifting gear to assemble and disassemble the parts..

Pos: 78.1.6 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetterprall blech auf Schneckenq uerförder er/U mbau Z etterpr allblech auf Schneckenquerför der er @ 0\mod_1196678706338_78.docx @ 10879 @ @ 1

Pos: 78.1.7 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The following description shows the installation of the auger-type cross conveyor on the right hand mower side. The installation on the left-hand mower side has to be carried out in an analogous way.

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the "tedder deflector plate" can optionally be converted to an "auger-type cross conveyor" or vice versa.

The process for converting the "tedder deflector plate" to an auger-type cross conveyor is described below.

Prerequisite:

• Lower all lateral mowing units (1) on to a firm subsoil.

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

311

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.1.8 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetterprall blech auf Schneckenq uerförder er/Zetterprall blech i n H ebezeug häng en @ 349\mod_1436335137323_78.docx @ 2624945 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.1 Hooking Conditioner Baffle Sheet into Hoist

Fig. 283

• Hook the fastening chains (2) of a suitable hoist into the ring screws (3) and (4) of conditioner baffle sheet (1).

Pos: 78.1.9 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetterprall blech auf Schneckenq uerförder er/Spannschlösser l ösen @ 0\mod_1196684641931_78.docx @ 11036 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks

3

1

3

4

2

5

BM 400 0216

Pos: 78.1.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 284

Release the tension jacks (1) and (2) located at the outer side of the mower (3).

Release the inner tension jacks (3) and (4) of the mowing unit (3).

312

Pos: 78.1.11 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Z etter prallbl ech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Z etter prallbl ech entfernen @ 0\mod_1196686072900_78.docx @ 11055 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 285

• Slightly raise the tedder deflector plate (1) and remove it sideways from the mowing unit (2).

Pos: 78.1.12 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/Zi nken pr üfen @ 0\mod_1196686894088_78.docx @ 11074 @ 3 @ 1

Note -

Store the tedder deflector plate (1) in a secure and dry place.

14.1.4 Checking the Tines

Pos: 78.1.13 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Achtung - gebrochene Zinken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.docx @ 10437 @ @ 1

Caution! - Damaged or missing tines

Effect: Damages to the machine.

• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.

• Straighten any bent tines.

• Replace any broken tines.

Pos: 78.1.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Z etter prallbl ech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zi nken pr üfen @ 349\mod_1436255930667_78.docx @ 2623824 @ @ 1

3

2

Pos: 78.1.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1

BM 420 0187

Fig. 286

• Check V-shaped tines (1) and retaining bolts (2) on mower (3) for damage.

313

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.1.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Z etter prallbl ech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Schutzbl ech demontier en @ 0\mod_1196688190822_78.docx @ 11112 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.5 Removing the guard

Pos: 78.2 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 287:

• Remove the hexagon head cap screws (1).

• Remove the guard (2) and store it in a secure place.

314

Pos: 78.3.1 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Schneckenquerför der er anbauen @ 349\mod_1436345329814_78.docx @ 2625242 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.6 Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor

3

1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

1

5

2

4

BM 400 0157

Fig. 288

• Mount securing chains (1) of hoist on the ring screws (2) and (3) of auger-type cross conveyor (4).

• Slowly lower the auger-type cross conveyor (4) onto the mower (5).

Fig. 289

• Lower auger-type cross conveyor into guide pins (1) and (2).

Pos: 78.3.2 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The surfaces (3) and (4) have to be flat against either side of the mower.

315

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.3.3 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Spannschl össer schließ en @ 0\mod_1196689498291_78.docx @ 11209 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.7 Locking the tension jacks

Fig. 290

• Lock the tension jacks (1) and (2) located on the inner side of the mowing unit (3).

• Also lock the outer tension jacks (4) and (5).

Note

Pos: 78.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/KKeilriemen spannen @ 349\mod_1436278111352_78.docx @ 2624872 @ 3 @ 1

Be sure the tension jacks (1) and (2) are under tension when locked; retighten as required.

14.1.8

Pos: 78.5 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690564916_78.docx @ 11266 @ @ 1

Tensioning the V-belt

1

3

4

2

Fig. 291

• Use the mounting lever (1) to raise the idler pulley (2).

• Place the V-belt (3) on to the pulley (4).

• Lower the idler pulley (2) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (1).

Use the mounting lever (1) supplied in the on-board tool box.

Pos: 78.6 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Schutzblech montier en @ 0\mod_1196690733244_78.docx @ 11285 @ 3 @ 1

With the V-belt under tension, dimension X has to be equal to approx. 80 mm.

BM 400 0159

316

14.1.9 Installing the guard

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.7 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Dr ehzahlsensor anschli eßen @ 186\mod_1379935617862_78.docx @ 1603133 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 292

• Install the guard (1) on to the mowing unit (3) using the hexagon head cap screws (2).

14.1.10 Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics

Pos: 78.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 293

• Connect speed sensor cable (1) with speed sensor cable (2) of the auger-type cross conveyor.

• Insert the hydraulic plug of the auger-type cross conveyor into the hydraulic bushing of the lateral mowing unit.

317

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.9 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Schmierlei tungen umlegen @ 0\mod_1196695905681_78.docx @ 11909 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.11 Relaying the Lubrication Lines

Fig. 294

When the machine is converted from a "Tedder deflector plate unit" to an "Auger-type cross conveyor", the lubrication lines must be relaid as described below.

• Loosen lubrication line (1) at the T-screw connection (2).

• Loosen the sealing screw (3) on the lubricating point connection.

• Unto the lubrication connection (1) to the auger bearing (BSS).

• Install the sealing screw (2) on the T-screw connection

Pos: 78.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/M ontageanleitung der Pralltücher für Big M 400 mit BSS @ 0\mod_1196746211375_78.docx @ 11935 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.12 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS

Pos: 78.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 295

Placing bulge bags on the right and left auger hoods reduces the amount of dirt in the cooling air.

Installation instructions:

• Screw bulge bags securely onto the auger hoods (1). (Install coach bolts from below.)

• Pull the rod (2) through the eyes of the bulge bag (3)

• Insert the rod (2) from behind into the hole on the frame (4). Insert the rod (2) into the hole on the mowing unit support from above in front (5) and secure it with the spring cotter pin

(6).

318

Pos: 78.12.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSchneckenkontr olle ei nschalten @ 0\mod_1196746530468_78.docx @ 11954 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment

14.1.13 Switching on the auger monitoring mode

Pos: 78.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Motor nicht i n geschl ossenen R äumen laufen lassen. (2012-08-15 08:36:40) @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.docx @ 6915 @ @ 1

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

• Activate the horn.

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Pos: 78.12.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Schneckenkontroll e einschalten @ 349\mod_1436422425815_78.docx @ 2626296 @ @ 1

Auger control must be activated as follows in the info centre:

• Move ignition key to position I or II

• Wait for the self test to run down

– Mowing Units

319

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Note

After the ignition has been switched on, the start screen “Road Travel or Field Mode” appears in the display

Fig. 296

• Use key to bring up menu level on rotary potentiometer

• Use rotary potentiometer to choose main menu 1

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

“Settings”.

• Select menu 1-2 “Machine Setting” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level “Machine Setting”.

• The basic screen is called by actuating the key.

• Use rotary potentiometer to choose the desired setting, the selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Press rotary potentiometer to jump into the selection box (5).

• Set the desired value in the selection box (5) by using the rotary potentiometer.

Both augers on

Right auger on

Left auger on

Both augers off

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 78.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Schneckenq uerför der er auf "Ei nheit Z etter prallbl ech" @ 349\mod_1436346064886_78.docx @ 2625273 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.14 Conversion Augertype Cross Conveyor to “Conditioner Baffle Sheet Unit”

The conversion process is in the in reverse order.

DANGER! - Stones are hurled up during operation

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After having removed the auger-type cross conveyor, the conditioner baffle sheets must be mounted again! (refer to chapter “Mounting Auger-type Cross

Conveyor”). However, keep in mind that they must be mounted in reverse order)

Otherwise operating licence becomes void

320

3

2

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

1

BM 420 0187

Fig. 297

Pos: 78.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Ei nheit Zetterprall blech bzw. Ei nheit Schneckenquerför derer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Pos: 78.15 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Z usatzausrüstung- Mulchgerät @ 0\mod_1196750242750_78.docx @ 12454 @ 2 @ 1

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

14.2 Additional Equipment – Mulching Device

Mulching devices can be used as additional equipment. For further information, please ask the mulching device dealer

Address:

Van Wamel BV

Energieweg 1

Pos: 78.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

NL-6658 AE Beneden-Leeuwen

Note

Only attachment and detachment of mowing units is described below.

For information on operation, service, attaching, and detaching mulching devices, please consult the mulching device manufacturer.

321

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.17.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/AAbbau der Mäheinheiten @ 0\mod_1196750875734_78.docx @ 12492 @ 2 @ 1

14.3 Removing Mowing Units

Pos: 78.17.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - U mbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Pos: 78.17.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

14.3.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 78.17.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinhei ten/Vorr aussetzung am Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196751006250_78.docx @ 12530 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met in advance on the BiG M:

• The front mowing unit is in transport position

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

• Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off)

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode)

• Close the shut-off valve for the front outrigger

Pos: 78.17.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinhei ten/Abbau Schutztuch @ 0\mod_1196751259531_78.docx @ 12549 @ @ 1

Removing the Guard Cloth

Pos: 78.17.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 298

• Detach the guard cloth (1) with the expander band (2)

322

Pos: 78.17.7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/D /Demontag e der Entlastungsfeder n @ 0\mod_1196751819984_78.docx @ 12594 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.3.2 Removing of the compensation springs

Pos: 78.17.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Ei nstellung an den Entl astungsfeder n @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 78.17.7.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/D emontage Entlastungsfeder n BM 420 @ 86\mod_1319617657714_78.docx @ 739404 @ @ 1

Fig. 299

Note

Detach the compensation spring (1) only in transport position.

Pos: 78.17.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To do this:

• Release the cotter pin (2)

• Detach the compensation springs (1) and set down the front mowing unit

With hydraulic front guard flap option:

• Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (3) and put them down on front mowing unit

323

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.17.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinhei ten/Abbau der Gel enkwelle: @ 0 \mod_1196752140328_78.docx @ 12651 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.3 To remove the PTO shaft:

Fig. 300

• Open the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Detach the support chain (1)

• Remove the screw (2) from the PTO shaft

• Pull the PTO shaft (3) off the front mower

• Connect the PTO shaft (3) with support chain (1) to the "Weiste" triangle (4).

Pos: 78.17.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Schmi erleitung am Verteiler trennen @ 149\mod_1361518645841_78.docx @ 1332151 @ @ 1

Fig. 301

• Disconnect the lubrication line (1) to the distributor (2).

Pos: 78.17.11 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If the pressure on the lubrication lines is too high, loosen a lubrication point first to reduce the pressure. Do not close the line (1)! (Grease under high pressure)

324

Pos: 78.17.12 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Abbau des Weistedrei ecks BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320145370002_78.docx @ 741555 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.4 Remove the Weiste Triangle

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 302

• Raise the front lifting gear slightly inching with the (8) key (first gear) on the multi-function lever

This will relieve the locking bolts (1) on the Weiste triangle.

• Dismount the locking bolt (1) and remove it

• Adjust the top suspension arm (2) until it is free of tension

CAUTION! - Do not lower the front mowing unit too far

Effect: Damage to the machine

In the following work step, make certain not to lower the front lifting gear too far. Doing so will damage the front mowing unit.

• You can use the (11) key on the multi-function lever to lower the front lifting gear until the front lifting gear is under the Weiste triangle

• Press the (8) key on the multi-function lever briefly (up to the first gear) to stop the lowering process

325

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Caution! - The front lifting gear is raised in reverse travel.

Effect: Damage to the machine

The (Road/Field) release switch must be in "Road Travel" position.

Fig. 303

Switch the (Road/Field) release switch into "Road Travel" position.

Note

This prevents the front lifting gear from automatically being raised during reverse travel.

Move the machine in reverse in Road mode.

Pos: 78.17.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Anbau des Frontmähwer ks BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289230198187_78.docx @ 502516 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit

Fig.304

The front mowing unit is attached in the reverse order.

Pos: 78.17.14 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The lifting gear can be raised by inching operation (first step) with the (8) key on the multifunction lever.

Connect the cardan shaft (1) high on the Weiste triangle (2) to avoid a collision with the front mower plate

326

Pos: 78.17.15.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A- E/A/Abbau der sei tlichen Mähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196757669828_78.docx @ 12767 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.3.6 Removing the Side Mowing Unit

Pos: 78.17.15.2 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - U mbau_Wartungsar beiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.17.15.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M ähei nheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 186\mod_1379945215196_78.docx @ 1605173 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following prerequisites must be met:

– The traction drive release switch must be in position I, switched off.

– The road/field release switch must be in position II, field mode.

• The hydraulic axle suspension must be in mowing position, refer to chapter Info Centre

“Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”.

Pos: 78.17.15.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M ähei nheiten/Schritt 2 Abbau seitl. Mähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196758043531_78.docx @ 12805 @ @ 1

Step 2: for standard equipment:

Pos: 78.17.15.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 305

Set spring compensation to minimum.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing units out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Move the socket pin (1) to and secure it with a linch pin.

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.

327

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.17.15.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M ähei nheiten/Schritt 3 Abbau seitl. Mähei nheit @ 46\mod_1283840472171_78.docx @ 451109 @ @ 1

Step 3:

Fig. 306

With hydraulic spring compensation design (optional):

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.

• Pressing the compensation. or key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

• Pressing the to "zero bar". keys and the key reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units

• Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Pos: 78.17.15.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M ähei nheiten/Schritt 4 Abbau seitl. Mähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196758874468_78.docx @ 12843 @ @ 1

Step 4:

Fig. 307

• Insert the clamping plate (1) (Item No. 233 505 0) from above into the right and left spring assemblies (2)

Pos: 78.17.15.8 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Both clamping plates on the right and left sides are also required for dismantling just one mowing unit to make the outrigger arm free of tension.

328

Pos: 78.17.15.9 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 78.17.15.10 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M äheinheiten/Schritt 5 Abbau seitl. M äheinheit @ 0\mod_1196759083031_78.docx @ 12862 @ @ 1

Step 5:

Fig. 308

The spring assembly can be fitted to the outrigger arm instead of clamping plates.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing unit (1) out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (2) and remove the fastening bolt (2).

• Use a suitable and reliable tool to secure the spring assemblies.

Note

Pos: 78.17.15.11 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The weight of a spring assembly is about 100 kg.

329

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.17.15.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mäheinhei t ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.17.15.13 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M äheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seit enmähwer ke T 1 @ 186\mod_1379943341269_78.docx @ 1605055 @ @ 1

Step 6:

Fig. 309

The mowing unit must be in the working position to be removed.

• Move the opposite mower unit into headland position and support it there.

• Connect the retaining chains (1) on the mowing unit (2).

Pos: 78.17.15.14 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M äheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwer ke T 2 @ 186\mod_1379941554180_78.docx @ 1604958 @ @ 1

Fig. 310

• Detach the spring (1), only for the right lateral mowing unit.

Detaching the top link (2)

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the lower attachment bolts (3) and remove the attachment bolt with disc.

• Remove the cube plug (I).

• Remove the lubrication line (II and (III).

• Expose all lines (lubrication lines; electrical lines; hydraulic lines) in the universal joint mount area. To do this, cut the relevant cable ties.

For cross conveyor design

• Disconnect the plug connection (V), speed sensor auger.

• Remove the hydraulic plug (V) from the hydraulic bushing.

Pos: 78.17.15.15 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Detaching the top link (4)

• Screw out fastening screws (5) and press the top link off the bolts.

• Screw out fastening screw (6).

330

Pos: 78.17.15.16 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen M äheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwer ke T 3 @ 186\mod_1379939898882_78.docx @ 1604759 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 311

• Align the double joint (2). To do this, turn the mowing unit manually on the outer blade drum until the attachment bolt (1) of the double joint is positioned vertically.

• Raise the mowing unit slightly with lifting equipment until the bolts of the universal joint mount have come out of the universal joint bracket.

• Move the mowing unit back to guide the double joint down from the shaft.

• Move the mowing unit away from the machine with lifting equipment and set it down securely.

Caution! - Lift the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Never raise the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

331

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.19.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/A/Anbau der seitlichen M äheinheit @ 0\mod_1196760080906_78.docx @ 12900 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.7 Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 78.19.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - U mbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.19.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinhei ten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 186 \mod_1379945215196_78.docx @ 1605173 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following prerequisites must be met:

– The traction drive release switch must be in position I, switched off.

– The road/field release switch must be in position II, field mode.

• The hydraulic axle suspension must be in mowing position, refer to chapter Info Centre

“Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”.

Pos: 78.19.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mähei nheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.19.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinhei t/S chritt 2 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196763875859_78.docx @ 13000 @ @ 1

Step2:

Pos: 78.19.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 312

• Remove the belt guard (1) on the outrigger arm

• Connect the mowing unit to the retaining chains and guide up to the outrigger arm

• Align the universal joint bracket (2) of the mowing unit to the universal joint mount (3) of the outrigger arm.

332

Pos: 78.19.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinhei t/Schritt 3 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196764155312_78.docx @ 13019 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Step 3:

Caution! -

Effect: Elevated danger of crushing hands

• Make certain when guiding in the double joint that the lifting equipment is not adjusted or moved. Only the technician is permitted to move the mowing unit manually on the front guard tube.

Fig. 313

• Align the double joint (2) until the attachment bolts (1) of the double joint are positioned vertically.

• Guide the double joint onto the drive PTO shaft

Note

To make it possible to lock in the profile toothing, the drive shaft can be turned by moving the power belt (4) on the outrigger arm.

• Installation of the Belt Guard on the Outrigger Arm

Pos: 78.19.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinhei t/Die wei ter e M ontage erfolgt i n umgekehrter R eihenfolg e wie der Abbau @ 0\mod_1196764466359_78.docx @ 13038 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure.

Pos: 79 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution!

Clamping plates not removed. (When using clamping plates)

Effect: Damages to the machine

• After attaching the mowing units, make certain the clamping plates have been removed

After the mowing unit has been attached, lower the mowing unit down to the ground and remove the two clamping plates on the right and left side.

333

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Motor @ 0\mod_1196765008937_78.docx @ 13058 @ 1 @ 1

15 Maintenance

– Engine

Pos: 80.2 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Aktionen an der M aschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196765298062_78.docx @ 13096 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.3 /BA/Wartung/M otor /M otor Übersicht M AN BM 420 @ 348\mod_1435834990827_78.docx @ 2620873 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• When working on the engine, always switch off the main battery switch!

• Store lubricants and fuels in suitable containers and make certain they are disposed of properly.

• Exercise caution when draining hot oil or fluid - danger of burns!

15.1.1 Engine Overview

5

9

1

2 3

Fig. 314

1 Alternator

2 Oil dipstick

3 Fuel filter system

Pos: 80.4 /BA/Wartung/M otor /Wartungsübersicht (MAN) Auszug @ 52\mod_1289284826828_78.docx @ 502545 @ 2 @ 1

4 Air compressor

5 Electronic Diesel Control (EDC)

4 6 7

6 Starter

7 Oil sump

8 Refrigerant compressor

9 Oil filter

15.2 Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt

Pos: 80.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The purpose of this overview of maintenance is to provide quick orientation. Information is not considered binding. The information in the operating instructions and list of consumables is authoritative.

Only consumables approved in the MAN list of consumables may be used.

Engine maintenance schedule

• All maintenance work on the engine must be performed according to the intervals of the maintenance schedule in the MAN operating instructions.

Oil change intervals

• See maintenance schedule in accompanying document MAN.

8

334

Pos: 80.6 /BA/Wartung/M otor /Allgemei n Kühlflüssigkeit_Keilriemen_Sauber keit @ 0 \mod_1196765525515_78.docx @ 13115 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Cooling water and air intake hoses

Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air intake system every 2 years.

Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.

Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory. The coolant consists of 50 % anti-corrosion antifreeze and 50 % water.

Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately -37° C. See also the engine manufacturer's specifications.

Belts

All belts must be kept continuously under the proper tension.

For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3 operating hours. If necessary, retighten.

Cleanliness

To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine area and especially the exhaust system as well as the areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.

If the crop is very dry and there is a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if necessary.

335

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.8 /BA/Wartung/M otor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor T eil 1 BM 420 @ 80\mod_1315485013866_78.docx @ 706053 @ 2 @ 1

15.3 Maintenance Table – Engine

Maintenance work Maintenance interval

Engine

1 Clean the engine compartment, radiator and radiator screen

2 Engine - oil level check

3 Engine oil change

4 Replacing the engine oil filter

5 Ribbed V-belt

6 Inspection of seal and general condition

7 Check valve play, adjust as needed

8 Drain water separator

Fuel system

1 Replace fuel filter

2 Fuel filter insert

3 Fuel level

4 Add fuel

5 Vent the fuel system

Cooling system

1 Engine coolant - checks and controls

2 Change engine coolant

3 Air filter – main cartridge

4 Air filter – safety cartridge

5 Check the anti-freeze in the cooling system; top up with anti-freeze, if and when necessary.

Check hose connections

1 Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction and cooling system for tight fit.

2 Check the fuel injection pipe for loose connections.

3 Check the turbo charger screw connections and hose connections for tight fit.

Have the starter checked.

1 Have the three-phase generator checked.

Pos: 80.9 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

X

X

X

X

X X

See MAN engine operating instructions

See MAN engine operating instructions

X

X

See MAN engine operating instructions

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

336

Pos: 80.10 /BA/War tung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle M otor T eil 2 BM 420 / BM 500 @ 80 \mod_1315485162066_78.docx @ 706081 @ @ 1

Maintenance work Maintenance interval

Maintenance – Engine

Compressed Air System

1 Check compressed air system for density and corrosion

2 Check / clean drain valve

3 Check compressed air reservoir 1)

4

5

6

Drain condensation water

Tighten the tightening straps

Replace air dryer 1)

1) Every two years

Pos: 80.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

X

X

X

X

337

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.12 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SSchmutzabl agerung i m M otorraum @ 0\mod_1196766936875_78.docx @ 13173 @ 2 @ 1

15.4 Contamination in the engine compartment

Pos: 80.13 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung Schmutzablager ung i m M otorraum (2012- 08- 10 08:26:39) @ 0\mod_1196769316921_78.docx @ 13154 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Bild Motorraum Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320058149049_78.docx @ 740962 @ @ 1

Caution! -

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

Fig. 315

Pos: 80.15 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM otorraum mit Dr uckl uft säuber n @ 0\mod_1196769980062_78.docx @ 13192 @ 2 @ 1

15.5 Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air

Pos: 80.16 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Warnung - R einig ung mit Druckl uft_alt @ 0\mod_1196770018125_78.docx @ 13211 @ @ 1

Warning! -

Effect: Loss of eyesight!

• Keep people well away from the working area.

Pos: 80.17 /BA/War tung/Motor /Verschmutzungen mit Druckl uft weg blasen @ 0\mod_1196770153625_78.docx @ 13230 @ @ 1

• Wear suitable work clothes to perform cleaning jobs with compressed air (for example eye protection).

When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

Pos: 80.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

338

Pos: 80.19 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM otorölstand @ 41\mod_1272372368436_78.docx @ 376890 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance

15.6 Engine oil level

Pos: 80.20 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/M otorölstand Achtung! - Ölstand zu niedrig (2012-08-22 09:27:58) @ 41\mod_1272372487467_78.docx @ 376965 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.21 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor öl/Motor ölstand Bild BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289462193250_78.docx @ 504325 @ @ 1

Caution! - The oil level is too low.

Effect: Engine damage

• It is absolutely essential for the life of the engine that you observe this oil level.

• Check the oil level when the machine in at a horizontal position.

• Do not start the engine if the level is below the bottom mark of the oil dipstick.

– Engine

Fig. 316

Pos: 80.22 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor öl/Motor ölstand T ext @ 40\mod_1270034947332_78.docx @ 365736 @ @ 1

• Before pulling out the oil dip stick, its environment must be thoroughly wiped clean.

• The oil level must be between the min. and max. marks.

• After the oil level has been checked, reinsert the oil dipstick.

Pos: 80.23 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/M otoröl und Filter wechsel ( 2012-08-22 08:27:22) @ 40\mod_1270034903316_78.docx @ 365711 @ 3 @ 1

15.6.1 Engine oil and filter replacement

Pos: 80.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to the engine manufacturer‟s operating instruction included with delivery (chapter on Engine oil and Filter replacement)

339

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/KKr aftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider @ 41\mod_1272367873905_78.docx @ 376586 @ 2 @ 1

15.7 Fuel filter/water separator

Pos: 80.26 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffvorfilter/Kr aftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabschei der Bild BM 420_M AN @ 181\mod_1377159448574_78.docx @ 1556204 @ @ 1

4

5 6

Fig. 317

1) Fuel pre-filter

3) Fuel supply valve

5) Viewing glass

Pos: 80.27 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffvorfilter/Kr aftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabschei der Anbri ngungsort Text @ 181\mod_1377159258528_78.docx @ 1556175 @ @ 1

2)

4)

6)

Flap

Filter pan

Drain plug

The fuel pre-filter is located front right behind the flap over the front wheel.

Pos: 80.28 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffvorfilter/Kr aftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabschei der Text_M AN @ 181\mod_1377162969471_78.docx @ 1556376 @ 33 @ 1

The fuel pre-filter cleans fuel. The fuel supply valve can be used to interrupt the fuel supply from the tank to the engine, e.g. for maintenance and repairs of the fuel system and for replacing the fuel pre-filter.

15.7.1 Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter

• Turn the fuel supply valve to the right to close the fuel supply.

• Unscrew the filter pan.

• Clean filter pan and filter insert.

Replace the filter insert if there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace it, if necessary.

• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it, if necessary.

• Wet the seal ring with diesel and set it in place.

• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan onto the filter housing.

• Turn the fuel supply valve to the left to open the fuel supply.

15.7.2 Emptying the Water Separator

Pos: 80.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The water that is present in the fuel is collected in the inspection glass. Check every day if water has accumulated in the viewing glass. Drain the collected water and collect it in a suitable container.

Collect draining water in a suitable container.

• Open the drain plug (4).

• Close the drain plug (4).

Dispose of the water according to the applicable provisions.

340

Pos: 80.30 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/KKr aftstoff-Filterei nsatz ersetzen @ 57\mod_1295937605015_78.docx @ 547945 @ 2 @ 1

15.8 Replacing the fuel filter insert

Pos: 80.31 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffvorfilter/Kr aftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen Bild BM 420 @ 271\mod_1402928480707_78.docx @ 2045857 @ @ 1

2

1

Maintenance – Engine

4

3

BM 420 0032_2

Fig. 318

Pos: 80.32 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffvorfilter/Kr aftstoff-Filtereinsatz T ext allgemein @ 271\mod_1402920673519_78.docx @ 2045596 @ @ 1

• Open tank cover to prevent excess pressure in the fuel tank.

• Close the fuel supply valve (2) at the preliminary fuel filter (1).

• Before opening the drain plug (3) on the diesel filter housing, place a suitable container under the outlet nozzle.

• Unscrew the screw cover (4) with filter insert and pull out a piece from the filter housing.

Allow the fuel to run out.

• Remove screw cover with filter insert. Replace filter insert and seal ring.

• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.

• Screw on the screw cover (4) with filter insert and tighten it. Tightening torque 25 Nm.

• Close drain plug at the bottom of the diesel filter housing.

• Open fuel supply valve (2) at the preliminary fuel filter.

• Vent the fuel system.

Pos: 80.33 /BA/War tung/Motor /Hinweis N ähere Informati on siehe BA des M otorherstellers @ 57 \mod_1295937787078_78.docx @ 547997 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

341

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.35 /BA/War tung/Motor /Filter i n H andpumpe wechsel n @ 57\mod_1295940657968_78.docx @ 548130 @ 3 @ 1

15.8.1 Replacing the filter in the hand pump

Pos: 80.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.319

• Screw on the handwheel for fuel supply (2)

• To block the fuel supply, pull the handwheel (2) all the way up

• Remove the filter pan (1).

• Clean the filter pan and filter insert. If there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the filter insert

• Check the sealing ring for the filter pan and replace it if necessary

• Wet the sealing ring with diesel fuel and set it in place

• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing

• Press the handwheel (2) down again to release the fuel supply

• To vent, perform pump movements with the handwheel (2)

• Screw handwheel (2) in again.

342

Pos: 80.37.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/H Har nstoff-Filterei nsatz wechseln @ 60\mod_1297752166282_78.docx @ 560277 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

15.9 Replacing Urea Filter Inserts

Pos: 80.37.2 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Hi nweis Bei Ver wendung von H arnstofflösung kann Ammoniak entstehen @ 60\mod_1297763415497_78.docx @ 560539 @ @ 1

Note

Ammonia may be produced when urea solution is used. Therefore whenever changing filters, always wear globes and safety goggles and work in a well ventilated area. If the filters have been opened, all seals must be replaced.

Pos: 80.37.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/H arnstoffilter Einführungstext @ 60 \mod_1297763580418_78.docx @ 560565 @ @ 1 A total of three filters are installed: One main filter (1) and two pre-filters (in the feed module / supply line)

Note

The filter inserts must be replaced every time the engine oil is changed. The two pre-filters must also be replaced when necessary (if there are problems with clogging).

Pos: 80.37.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Hi nweis mindestens 2 Minuten warten @ 60\mod_1297763173171_78.docx @ 560487 @ @ 1

Note

After the engine is shut off, wait at least 2 minutes to ensure that suction of the urea solution has stopped

Pos: 80.37.5 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Hi nweis Gebrauchte Har nstofffilter sind Sonder müll @ 60\mod_1297762624204_78.docx @ 560356 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 80.37.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/H auptfilter @ 60\mod_1297765689498_78.docx @ 560591 @ @ 1

Used urea filters are special waste.

Main filter

Pos: 80.37.7 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/H arnstoff-Filter Hauptfilter Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297763293529_78.docx @ 560513 @ @ 1

Fig. 320

Pos: 80.37.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/H arnstoff-Filter wechsel H auptfilter Text @ 60\mod_1297762963438_78.docx @ 560434 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine and secure the machine from rolling away

• Loosen the drain screw (1), collect the urea solution as it runs out and dispose of it properly

• Unscrew the housing cover (2); replace the filter insert (3), half-moon seal (4), O-ring seals

(5) and the O-ring seal of the drain screw (1)

• Tighten the housing cover (

25+5Nm

)

• Tighten the drain screw (

4+1Nm

)

• Check the system for leaks

Pos: 80.37.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

343

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.37.10 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/Vorfilter i m F örder modul @ 60\mod_1297765901759_78.docx @ 560644 @ @ 1

Pre-filter in the feed module

Pos: 80.37.11 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/H arnstoff-Vorfilter im För dermodul Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297765822832_78.docx @ 560617 @ @ 1

Fig. 321

Pos: 80.37.12 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/H arnstoff-Vorfilter im För dermodul T ext @ 60\mod_1297762778782_78.docx @ 560408 @ @ 1 The pre-filter (2) rests in the supply connection on the bottom of the feed module. It can be unscrewed with a screwdriver.

• Loosen the supply line at the in-connection of the feed module. To do this, press the white release key (3). (Make certain that no liquid runs out from the supply line.)

• Rinse the exposed opening with water to clean it

• Unscrew the old pre-filter anticlockwise with a screwdriver

• Insert a new pre-filter and tighten it with a screwdriver to 0.4 ±0.1 Nm

• Connect the supply line again

Pos: 80.37.13 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/Vorfilter i n Versorgungsl eitung wechsel n @ 60\mod_1297766921822_78.docx @ 560698 @ @ 1

Changing the Pre-filter in the Supply Line

Pos: 80.37.14 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/Vorfilter i n Versorgungsl eitung wechsel n Bild BM 420 @ 60 \mod_1297767076227_78.docx @ 560725 @ @ 1

Fig. 322

Pos: 80.37.15 /BA/Wartung/M otor /T anken/H arnstoffl ösung/H arnstoff-Vorfilter wechseln (Versorgungsleitung) @ 60\mod_1297762687329_78.docx @ 560382 @ @ 1 The pre-filter (2) is located directly in front of the feed module in the supply line.

• To remove the filter, press the white release key (4) and take out the connection piece

• Remove and replace the prefilter insert

• Before connecting, place a new O-ring seal in the connection piece

Pos: 80.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

344

Pos: 80.39 /BA/War tung/Motor /Hinweis N ähere Informati on siehe BA des M otorherstellers @ 57 \mod_1295937787078_78.docx @ 547997 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.40 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoff ( 2012-08-09 14:23:58) @ 0\mod_1196779500703_78.docx @ 14656 @ 2 @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

15.10 Fuel

Pos: 80.41 /BA/War tung/Motor /Zul ässige Kr aftstoffe @ 173\mod_1371110979826_78.docx @ 1486158 @ 3 @ 1

Warning! -

• Never fill tank while the engine is running.

• No smoking!

Handle fuel carefully. It is readily flammable. Do not smoke when adding fuel to the machine and make certain there are no open flames or sources of sparks in the vicinity.

Fuel must only be added outdoors. Prevent fires by keeping the machine free of dirt and grease residue. Always dispose of spilled fuel.

Quality and purity of fuel are very important for consistent performance and a long engine service life.

For temperatures under 10°C (50°F), always use winter fuel.

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on fuels)

• The engine manufacturer‟s fuel specification, included with delivery

15.10.1 Permissible Fuels

Use commercial diesel fuels (DIN EN 590) only. An authorization is needed if you want to use other fuels.

CAUTION! High sulphur content (>0.5% ) in the diesel fuel (outside EU countries):

Damage to the engine due to high corrosion and a strong lifetime reduction.

• Fuels with sulphur content >0.5% are not permissible.

• If the sulphur content is greater than 0.2%, the oil change intervals must be halved. At the same time, the engine oil must only be used according to company standard M 3277.

• If you need any further information, please refer to document MAN consumables chapter

Fuel “ High Sulphur Content in the Diesel Fuel“.

Pos: 80.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

As the engines are filled with engine oil in the factory according to company standard M

3477, the oil must be changed before use.

345

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.43 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/TT anken @ 41\mod_1271676291625_78.docx @ 372060 @ 2 @ 1

15.11

Pos: 80.44 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Kr aftstoff tanken Bil d BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196779964656_78.docx @ 14675 @ @ 1

Tanks

Fig. 323

Pos: 80.45 /BA/F ahr en und Transpor t/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/T anken T ext ( 2012-08-09 14:45:20) @ 41\mod_1271676476609_78.docx @ 372085 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1).

• Open the tank cover.

• Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter the fuel before adding it to the tank.)

• Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info Centre display.

• Seal the tank cover tightly.

• Dispose of spilled fuel.

Pos: 80.46 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 700 Liter @ 41\mod_1271832241976_78.docx @ 373233 @ @ 1

Note

Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing operation to prevent condensation water from forming and freezing in cold weather.

• Capacity: about 700 litres

Pos: 80.47 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

346

Pos: 80.48 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/TT anken von AdBlue H arnstofflösung @ 41\mod_1271679313562_78.docx @ 372210 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

15.12 Tanks of urea solution

Pos: 80.49 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Gefahr Ammoniakdämpfe durch H arnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1289999067218_78.docx @ 508455 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Ammonia vapours

Pos: 80.50 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Achtung H arnstoffl ösung @ 53\mod_1289999578671_78.docx @ 508501 @ @ 1

Irritation of the skin, eyes and mucous membranes

If the tank cover of the container for the urea solution is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may emerge. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate the skin, eyes and mucous membranes in particular. This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes. Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

CAUTION!

Make certain that

• children do not reach the area of urea solutions

• the urea solution does not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

In case of eye contact, rinse the eyes immediately with large amounts of clear water

In case of skin contact, rinse the places on the skin immediately with large amounts of clear water.

If urea solution is ingested, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink large amounts of water.

Seek medical attention if necessary.

Pos: 80.51 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Hinweis unsachgemäßerger auch von H arnstoffl ösung @ 53\mod_1290000893796_78.docx @ 508527 @ @ 1

Note

Improper handling of urea solutions causes hazards for the environment.

Do not allow the urea solution to reach the sewer system, bodies of surface water, the ground water or the soil in large quantities.

Pos: 80.52 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Har nstoffl ösung (AdBlue) Informati onstext @ 41\mod_1271739758758_78.docx @ 372315 @ @ 1 The machine is equipped with a MAN exhaust gas treatment system ( MAN SCR system). This is necessary to be able to observe the legally required exhaust gas limit values. In the MAN

SCR system, exhaust gas is cleaned with the aid of an injected urea solution in a downstream controlled diesel catalytic converter (CD-cat).

The urea solution is a synthetic solution of urea and water. (32.5% urea, 67.5% water in accordance with DIN V 70070). The urea solution is sold by the fuel dealer.

The urea solution is injected in a partial exhaust gas flow upstream from the mixer. It is converted into ammonia, mixes with the rest of the exhaust gas and then goes into the SCR catalytic converter (reduction catalytic converter) where the ammonia and the nitrogen oxides

Pos: 80.53 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Har nstoffl ösung Z usatztank Einfüllstutzen r echts @ 174\mod_1371458613539_78.docx @ 1487824 @ @ 1 The filler neck is located on the right-hand side of the machine. It is marked accordingly with a label.

Pos: 80.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

(NOX) in the exhaust gas are converted into nitrogen and water vapour and are then expelled.

There is an additional tank on the machine for this synthetic urea water solution.

The filling level of the urea solution in the tank is indicated in the info centre display.

347

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.55 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Tanken Bild AdBlue BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320059407403_78.docx @ 741019 @ @ 1

Fig.324

Pos: 80.56 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Har nstofflösung/Tanken Har nstoffl ösung ( AdBlue) T ext @ 41\mod_1271678707828_78.docx @ 372185 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1)

• Open the tank cover

• Fill with urea solution (DIN70070)

• Fill only until the fuelling nozzle shuts off!

• Seal the tank cover tightly

• Eliminate spilt urea solution

Pos: 80.57 /BA/War tung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 70 Li ter @ 41\mod_1271831862695_78.docx @ 373209 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on consumables).

• Capacity: about 70 litres

Pos: 80.58 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

348

Pos: 80.59 /BA/War tung/Motor /Kr aftstoffanl age entlüften @ 0\mod_1196780180531_78.docx @ 14694 @ 2 @ 1

15.13 Venting the fuel system

Maintenance – Engine

Note

For further information please refer to :

• Engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on venting the fuel system).

The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a lengthy standstill.

Pos: 80.60 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor kühl mittel/M otor kühl mittel- Allgemei n @ 186\mod_1380000935141_78.docx @ 1605955 @ 2 @ 1

15.14 Engine Coolant

Warning!

Cooling system density additives may not be used.

Pos: 80.61 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling system is filled ex works with a special coolant. This coolant protects against corrosion and provides frost protection up to –37° C. The cooling system must always be filled with engine coolant, independently of the season.

If no coolant is available, then - depending on the season -, you should use a mixture of 50 % ethylene glycol antifreeze/anticorrosion agent and 50 % clear, soft water. This mixture also provides corrosion and freezing protection up to –37 ° C.

Note

Follow the engine coolant regulations of the engine manufacturer. For further information please refer to:

• The engine manufacturer‟s fuel specification.

349

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.62 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/MM otor kühl mittel – Kontr olle @ 57\mod_1295938314140_78.docx @ 548023 @ 2 @ 1

15.15 Engine coolant – checks and controls

Pos: 80.63 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweis e/Warnung! - Heiß er Verschlussdeckel (2012- 08- 10 07:46:51) @ 57\mod_1295938377734_78.docx @ 548049 @ @ 1

Warning! - Hot cover

Effect: Hand burns

• Never open the cover (1) while the engine is hot. Switch off the engine and wait until the engine has cooled down.

Pos: 80.64 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor kühl mittel/M otor kühl mittel Kontr olle Bild BM 420 @ 130 \mod_1346853756868_78.docx @ 1157837 @ @ 1

Fig.325

Pos: 80.65 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor kühl mittel/M otor kühl mittel - Kontrolle Text allgemei n @ 57\mod_1295882421968_78.docx @ 547854 @ @ 1

Fill:

• Turn the cover (1) to the first notch and wait until the overpressure reduces

• Open the cover (1) completely and fill with engine coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).

• Close the cover (1) again.

Pos: 80.66 /BA/War tung/Motor /Motor kühl mittel/M otor kühl mittel - F üll menge: si ehe Kapitel T echnische D aten „ Betriebssstoffe“ @ 186\mod_1380002297744_78.docx @ 1606014 @ @ 1

Filling quantity: refer to chapter Technical Data “Consumables”.

Check:

• Check the level of engine coolant every day.

• The engine coolant level must reach up to the middle of the control eye (2)

• If necessary, top up the engine coolant

Pos: 80.67 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

350

Pos: 80.68 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLuftfilter @ 41\mod_1271407012930_78.docx @ 371355 @ 2 @ 1

15.16

Pos: 80.69 /BA/War tung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Bil d BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320066795785_78.docx @ 741136 @ @ 1

Air filter

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.70 /BA/War tung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Text mit Kl ammer n @ 86\mod_1320066913243_78.docx @ 741164 @ @ 1

Fig. 326

Pos: 80.71 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Perform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least when the error message filter appears in the Info Centre Display. for a dirty air

Clean the air filter

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away

• Unlock the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1)

• Pull out the filter insert (3) carefully with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside

• Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years ago must also be replaced.

• Install the filter insert again

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps

351

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.72 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSicher hei tspatr one @ 0\mod_1196781597406_78.docx @ 14812 @ 3 @ 1

15.16.1

Pos: 80.73 /BA/War tung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatr one Bild BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359551968912_78.docx @ 1297174 @ @ 1

Safety cartridge

Pos: 80.74 /BA/War tung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatr one Text BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359552426105_78.docx @ 1297203 @ @ 1

Fig. 327

Pos: 81 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Replace safety cartridge

Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and used again!

• Remove the filter insert (3)

• Pull out the safety cartridge (4) with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Install the new safety cartridge

• Install the cleaned or new filter insert (3)

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps (2)

352

Pos: 82.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Druckl uftanlag e @ 52\mod_1289386214984_78.docx @ 503224 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – compressed air system

16 Maintenance

– compressed air system

Pos: 82.2 /BA/Wartung/Dr uckluftanl age/Gefahr Dr uckluftanl age steht unter Druck @ 52\mod_1289379943171_78.docx @ 503146 @ @ 1

Pos: 82.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/DDruckl uftbehälter @ 12\mod_1224144256075_78.doc x @ 150965 @ 2 @ 1

DANGER! – Compressed air system is under high pressure.

Death or serious injuries.

Before maintenance work on the compressed air system:

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Decrease the pressure in the compressed air system

16.1 Compressed-air reservoir

Pos: 82.4 /BA/Wartung/Dr uckluftbehälter/Dr uckl uftbehälter Bil d + Leg ende Big M 420 @ 186 \mod_1379922842747_78.docx @ 1601147 @ @ 1

1

4

2

Fig. 328

1) Compressed air reservoir

3) Tensioning straps

5) Regeneration container

3

2) Drain valves

4) Nuts

Pos: 82.5 /BA/Wartung/Dr uckluftanl age/Dr uck abbauen @ 83\mod_1317301940569_78.docx @ 728962 @ @ 1

Release pressure

• Set the vehicle securely down

• Activate the drain valve (2) on the compressed air reservoir (1) until excess pressure is built up

Pos: 82.6 /BA/Wartung/Dr uckluftanl age/Dr uckl uftbehälter kontr ollieren ( 2014-04-22 11:21:17) @ 52\mod_1289380276328_78.docx @ 503276 @ 3 @ 1

16.1.1 Checking the compressed air reservoir

Pos: 82.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Compressed air reservoir corroded or damaged

Death or serious injuries

• Observe test intervals

• Have damaged compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a specialist's workshop

Have the interior area of the compressed air reservoir (1) checked in accordance with national requirements. A check is recommended at intervals of 2 years.

353

Maintenance – compressed air system

Pos: 82.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Entwässerungsventil kontr ollieren @ 52\mod_1289391310593_78.docx @ 503391 @ 3 @ 1

16.1.2 Checking the drain valve

Pos: 82.9 /BA/Wartung/Dr uckluftbehälter/Entwässerungsventil ( 2014- 04-22 11:31:20) @ 83\mod_1317301026024_78.docx @ 728934 @ @ 1

Caution! - Water in the system

Pos: 82.10 /BA/War tung/Druckl uftbehälter/Spannbänder nachziehen @ 52\mod_1289385925093_78.docx @ 503198 @ 2 @ 1

Damage due to corrosion

• Check and clean drain valve (according to Maintenance Table - Engine)

• Replace the defective drain valve immediately

• Switch off and secure the machine

• Open the drain valve and allow the condensation water to run out

• Check the drain valve, clean it and screw it in again

16.1.3 Retighten tensioning belts

Pos: 82.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLufttr ockner wechseln @ 186\mod_1379923903048_78.docx @ 1601354 @ 2 @ 1

• Check the tensioning belts (3) of the compressed air reservoir to ensure they are properly seated

• If necessary, retighten the tensioning belts with the nuts (4)

16.2 Replace Air Dryer

Pos: 82.12 /BA/War tung/Druckl uftanlag e/Lufttr ockner wechseln Bild BM 420 @ 186\mod_1379925526440_78.docx @ 1601531 @ @ 1

Fig. 329

Pos: 82.13 /BA/War tung/Druckl uftanlag e/Lufttr ockner wechseln T ext BM 420 @ 130\mod_1346907659525_78.docx @ 1157995 @ @ 1

The container (1) must be replaced every 2 years. The container must be replaced earlier if the dirt rate of the compressed air is too high.

Note

The container (1) must be disposed correctly.

• Switch off and secure the machine

• Release pressure

• Loosen and unscrew the container by using the band key

• Clean the housing seat and the threaded journal of the air dryer and check for function

• Grease the seal of the container and the threaded journal slightly

• Unscrew the container manually onto the air dryer housing until the seal rests on the housing. Tighten manually with half a turn afterwards (max. 15 Nm)

• Vent the air dryer and check for density

• Tighten container, if necessary (vent them before tightening)

Pos: 83 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

354

Pos: 84.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196781956937_78.docx @ 14832 @ 1 @ 1

17

Pos: 84.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSpeziell e Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance

– Mowing Units

Maintenance – Mowing Units

17.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 84.3 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Akti onen an der M aschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196782315875_78.docx @ 14851 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning.

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Pos: 84.4 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Bei unregel mäßiger Kontr olle der Messer kli ngen und H altebolzen @ 0\mod_1196782406281_78.docx @ 14870 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger! - When checking the cutter blades and retaining bolts only sporadically

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

355

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/PPr obel auf @ 0\mod_1196833698843_78.docx @ 15023 @ 3 @ 1

17.1.1 Test run

Pos: 84.7 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Probel auf M ehrzahl @ 0\mod_1196782825187_78.docx @ 14889 @ @ 1

Danger! - Testing the machine after repair, maintenance or cleaning work and after technical intervention.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The mowing unit must be in working position

• Do not switch on the drives until the mowing units are resting on the ground and you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone.

• Start a trial run of the machine only from the driver‟s seat.

Pos: 84.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EErsatzteile @ 0\mod_1196782991234_78.docx @ 14927 @ 2 @ 1

17.2 Spare Parts

Pos: 84.9 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer keWARNUN G - Verwendung von nicht zugel assenen Ersatzteil en @ 308\mod_1417011577394_78.docx @ 2392925 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.10 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/WWer kzeug kasten @ 0\mod_1196832731327_78.docx @ 14985 @ 2 @ 1

Warning! - Using non-approved spare parts.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or loss of warranty claims as well as exclusion of liability

• Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer.

The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.

17.3

Pos: 84.11 /BA/War tung/Wer kzeugkasten/Wer kzeug kasten Bild Big M 420 @ 87\mod_1320314522580_78.docx @ 744658 @ @ 1

Tool box

Pos: 84.12 /BA/War tung/Wer kzeugkasten/Wer kzeug kasten Text @ 87\mod_1320314730733_78.docx @ 744686 @ @ 1

Fig.330

Each one tool box is located behind the flaps (1) on the right and left machine side.

The on-board tool as well as the mounting parts for the first installation are located in the left tool box.

Pos: 84.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

356

Pos: 84.14 /BA/War tung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle- M ähwer ke BIG M 420 @ 86\mod_1320145802321_78.docx @ 741583 @ 2 @ 1

17.4 Maintenance Table – Mowing Units

Maintenance work

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Maintenance interval

Pos: 84.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

13

11

12

9

10

4

3

1

2

Main gearbox

Oil level check

Oil change

– CV lateral mowing units

Angular gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

Oil change

Input gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

Oil change

Front mower speed gearbox (CV)

5

Oil level check

Oil change

Angular gearbox for front mower CR

8

Oil level check

Oil change

6

Gearbox for top roller drive CRi (optional)

Oil level check

Oil change

7

Front mower cutter bar CV + CRi

Oil level check

Oil change

Cutter bar for lateral mowing units

Oil level check

Oil change

Cutter blades

Check screw

Mowing discs / mower drum

Check

Screw

Rotary hub

Check

Screw

Conditioner belt drive

Clean

Screw

V-shaped tines and retaining bolts

Check

Screw

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

357

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.16 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/A/Anziehdr ehmomente @ 202\mod_1385711894606_78.docx @ 1693123 @ 2 @ 1

17.5 Tightening torques

Pos: 84.17 /BA/War tung/Drehmomente / AnziehdrehmomenteAnziehdr ehmomente Metrische Gewi ndeschrauben mit Reg elgewinde Tabelle @ 321\mod_1424760222607_78.docx @ 2477725 @ @ 1

NOTICE

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagonal socket.

A = thread size

Tightening torque in Nm (unless otherwise stated)

(stability class can be seen on screw head)

A

Pos: 84.18 /BA/War tung/Muttern und Schrauben ( 50h) anzi ehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.docx @ 15293 @ @ 1

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

M22

M24

M27

M30

Stability class

29

42

5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

Tightening torque (Nm)

3.0

5.9

4.4

8.7

5.1

10

10

25

49

85

15

36

72

125

18

43

84

145

135

210

425

571

730

200

310

610

832

235

365

710

972

1050 1220

1100 1550 1800

1450 2100 2450

Pos: 84.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

358

Pos: 84.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/A/Anziehdr ehmomente über Innensechskant @ 202\mod_1385711834702_78.docx @ 1693094 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

17.6 Tightening torques (countersunk screws)

Pos: 84.21 /BA/War tung/Drehmomente / AnziehdrehmomenteAnziehdr ehmomente Metrische Gewi ndeschrauben mit Senkkopf und Innensechskant Tabelle @ 321\mod_1424843938347_78.docx @ 2480155 @ @ 1

NOTICE

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket and metric thread which are tightened via hexagonal socket.

Tightening torque in Nm (unless otherwise stated)

A = thread size

(stability class can be seen on screw head)

A

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

Pos: 84.22 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/AAbweichendes Dr ehmoment (2015- 09- 03 07:34:15) @ 0\mod_1196950054171_78.docx @ 15312 @ 3 @ 1

Stability class

23

34

5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5

4.7

3.5

7

4.1

8

8

20

39

68

12

29

58

100

15

35

67

116

108 160 188

168 248 292

340 488 568

A

BM 400 0234

17.6.1 Deviating Torque

Pos: 84.23 /BA/War tung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Abweichendes Dr ehmoment Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196949184374_78.docx @ 15274 @ @ 1

Screws / nuts

Nut for shear protection (rotary hub)

Bearing housing for cutting disc

MA [Nm]

300

42

Pos: 84.24 /BA/War tung/Muttern und Schrauben ( 50h) anzi ehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.docx @ 15293 @ @ 1

Bearing housing for blade drum 42

Pos: 84.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

359

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.26 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/FFrontschutz öffnen @ 40\mod_1270558849981_78.docx @ 367142 @ 2 @ 1

17.7 Opening the Front Guard

Pos: 84.27 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k li nks / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 3 @ 1

17.7.1 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 84.28 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Frontschutz öffnen an den Seitenmähwer ken BiG M 420 @ 87\mod_1320316791589_78.docx @ 744802 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 331

The front guard (2) on the cutter bar can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

To do this:

• Use the special tool (1) (located in the tool box) to release the lock of the front guard (2).

• Push the front guard (2) as far forward as it will go and the swivel it up.

• Secure the front guard (2) against folding down with a tension spring (3).

Note

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (2) and push it in until the interlocks (4) have engaged (right and left).

360

Pos: 84.30 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

17.7.2

Pos: 84.31 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Frontschutz öffnen Fr ontmähwer k @ 87\mod_1320315334038_78.docx @ 744714 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Fig. 332

The front guard (1) on the front mowing unit can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

A screw driver is used to open the front guard. Use the screw driver to push in the ratchet mechanism.

Note

Pos: 84.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Z Zetterg ehäuse reinig en @ 182\mod_1377502069378_78.docx @ 1562430 @ 2 @ 1

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (1) again.

17.8

Pos: 84.33 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Z ettergehäuse rei nigen Bild @ 182\mod_1377502729488_78.docx @ 1562518 @ @ 1

Cleaning the Tedder Housing

Pos: 84.34 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Z ettergehäuse rei nigen @ 182\mod_1377499400184_78.docx @ 1562402 @ @ 1

Fig. 333

For cleaning work in the inside of the tedder, folding ground flaps (1) are mounted on the lateral mowing units.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Loosen the screw connections (2).

• Open the ground flap.

• Clean the inside of the tedder (a).

• Close the ground flaps and tighten the screw connections (2).

Pos: 84.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

361

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.36 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/VVerstopfung en am Querförderer besei tigen @ 13\mod_1226557103071_78.docx @ 166210 @ 2 @ 1

17.9 Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor

Pos: 84.37 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Inbetriebnahme/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme_2 @ 13\mod_1226501654990_78.docx @ 166160 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of the machine, moving parts of the machine and / or unexpected movement of the machine.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until machine parts that are still in motion have coasted down to a stop.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by means of wheel chocks.

Pos: 84.38 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Verstopfung en am Querförderer besei tigen @ 13\mod_1226500830396_78.docx @ 166140 @ @ 1

Pos.I

Pos.II

Pos: 84.39 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 400 0233

Fig. 334

The hydraulic auger hood (1) must be secured against folding down during maintenance, cleaning and repair work on the augers by means of the spring cotter pins (2).

To do this:

• Lower all mowing units to the ground.

• Open the hydraulic auger hoods (1).

• Secure the hydraulic auger hood (1) by moving the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) from pos. I to pos. II.

• After the fault is eliminated, move the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) back to their original positions (from pos. II to pos. I).

• Close the hydraulic auger hood.

362

Pos: 84.40 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SScher bolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264082884090_78.docx @ 341094 @ 2 @ 1

17.10

Pos: 84.41 /BA/War tung/Scherbolzen/Scher bolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264062362856_78.docx @ 340785 @ @ 1

Shear pins on the conditioner

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 335

The conditioners of the front mowing units and lateral mowing units (right / left) on

BiG M 400 CRI / BiG M 420 CRI are each secured with a shear pin (1). The shear pin shears off as soon as an overload occurs.

The shear pin is located on the flange (2) between the gearbox tower and the conditioner rollers. The spare shear pins (3) and spare shear bushings (4) are located on the conditioner housing.

Replacement of shear pins

• Front mowing unit and lateral mowing units right / left must be placed on the ground

• Switch machine off, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key; wait until the machine parts which keep on rotating stopped completely; secure the machine with wheel chocks against rolling.

• If necessary, turn the cutter bar manually until the grooves of the flanges are positioned next to each other

• Take the spare shear pin (3) with the two bushings (4) and preassemble the bushings with a distance of 5mm

• Place the preassembled shear pins with bushings (3, 4) into the grooves of the flange

• Tighten the shear pins

363

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.43 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/FFüll meng en und Schmier mittel bezeichnungen der Getriebe @ 0\mod_1196951094046_78.docx @ 15335 @ 2 @ 1

17.11 Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes

Pos: 84.44 /Abkürzungen /C V-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 84.45 /BA/War tung/Tabellen_F üll mengen/M ähwer ke/T echnische D aten Betriebsstoffe Füll meng en Frontmähwer k BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Filtered oils

Pos: 84.46 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 84.47 /BA/War tung/Tabellen_F üll mengen/M ähwer ke/T echnische D aten Betriebsstoffe Füll meng en Frontmähwer k BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.48 /BA/War tung/Zei tinter valle an den Getrieben 200 h @ 0\mod_1196951919921_78.docx @ 15373 @ 3 @ 1

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Cutter bar

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

Brand name

SAE 90

** = lateral mowing units

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

Bio-degradable lubricants lubricants

Brand name

On request

Bio-degradable

Brand name

On request

17.11.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)

Pos: 84.49 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Oil level check and oil change (gearboxes) and lubricating the machine

Effect: Long expected service life of machine

• First oil change on all gearboxes after 50 operating hours, then every 200 operating hours

(but at least once a year).

• Before using the machine always check the oil level.

• With bio-degradable oils the changing intervals must be complied with absolutely because of ageing of the oils.

364

Pos: 84.50.1.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/HH auptgetri ebe @ 0\mod_1197005740033_78.docx @ 15416 @ 2 @ 1

17.12

Pos: 84.50.1.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Main gearbox

17.12.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 84.50.1.3 /Abkürzungen /C V-Ausführ ung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 84.50.1.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild H auptgetriebe seit. Mähwer ke @ 272\mod_1403246305250_78.docx @ 2049365 @ @ 1

2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2 4

3

1

BM 420 0174

Fig. 336

Pos: 84.50.1.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Öl kontr olle H auptgetriebe seitl. M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1197006270283_78.docx @ 15473 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Pos: 84.50.1.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle_ALT/Öl wechsel H auptg etriebe seitl. M ähwer ke @ 0 \mod_1196952482749_78.docx @ 15393 @ @ 1

Changing the oil

:

• Unscrew the measuring rod (2).

• Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

• Fit the oil screw plug with a new seal.

• Top up the oil from above (the dip stick hole); screw the dip stick (2) back in.

Pos: 84.50.1.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

365

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.1.8 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 84.50.1.9 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild H auptgetriebe seit. Mähwer ke CRi @ 347\mod_1435231232372_78.docx @ 2614560 @ @ 1

1 2

3

BM 420 0177

Fig. 337

Pos: 84.50.1.10 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Öl kontroll e H auptgetriebe sei tl. M ähwer ke @ 0 \mod_1197006270283_78.docx @ 15473 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Pos: 84.50.1.11 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Öl wechsel CRi Öl absaugen @ 348\mod_1435738140372_78.docx @ 2617755 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For information on time intervals, see chapter entitled “Time Intervals for Oil Level Check and Oil Change on the Gearboxes”.

• Screw measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox and clean it by using absorbent paper or cloth.

• Extract waste oil through the opening and collect it in a suitable container.

• Top up new oil.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw out measuring rod and check whether the oil level is between the markings (3), top up oil (SAE 90) or withdraw it by suction, if necessary.

Pos: 84.50.1.12 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Ölq ualität /Öl meng e: si ehe Kapi tel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.1.13 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

366

Pos: 84.50.3.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/WWinkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 2 @ 1

17.13

Pos: 84.50.3.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k (CV+CR I) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.docx @ 15609 @ 3 @ 1

Angular gearbox

17.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 84.50.3.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Wi nkelg etriebe Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197008732315_78.docx @ 15629 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Fig. 338:

Pos: 84.50.3.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle_ALT/Öl kontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.50.3.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel Bel üftungsfilter Öl absaugen @ 0\mod_1197009428424_78.docx @ 15668 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew venting filter (3) and extract the oil

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Top up oil from above (oil level up to bore hole (1)).

• Screw in the ventilation filter (3).

Pos: 84.50.3.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe K apitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.3.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

367

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.5.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/EEi ngangsgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005979596_78.docx @ 15454 @ 2 @ 1

17.14

Pos: 84.50.5.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k (CV+CR I) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.docx @ 15609 @ 3 @ 1

Input gearbox

17.14.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 84.50.5.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Eing angsgetriebe Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197009824221_78.docx @ 15727 @ @ 1

EC-0-040

Fig. 339:

Pos: 84.50.5.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle_ALT/Öl kontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.50.5.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel_ALT/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfil ter) @ 0 \mod_1197010026283_78.docx @ 15747 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 84.50.5.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.5.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

368

Pos: 84.50.7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SSchal tgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197010889455_78.docx @ 15766 @ 2 @ 1

17.15

Pos: 84.50.7.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwer k (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 3 @ 1

Speed gearbox

17.15.1 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 84.50.7.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Schaltg etriebe C V-Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197012856815_78.docx @ 15805 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-1-041

Fig. 340:

Pos: 84.50.7.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle_ALT/Öl kontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.50.7.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel_ALT/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfil ter) @ 0 \mod_1197010026283_78.docx @ 15747 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 84.50.7.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.7.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

369

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.9.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/WWinkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 2 @ 1

17.16

Pos: 84.50.9.2 /Abkürzungen /CR-Ausführung @ 194\mod_1383299073254_78.docx @ 1647987 @ @ 1

Angular gearbox

Pos: 84.50.9.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/U nterteil @ 10\mod_1221640227712_78.docx @ 135712 @ 3 @ 1

CR design

17.16.1 Bottom part

Pos: 84.50.9.4 /BA/Wartung/Hinweis Ölstandskontroll e in Ar beitsstellung und in waager echter Stellung der M aschine vornehmen @ 194\mod_1383554973754_78.docx @ 1649577 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.50.9.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Wi nkelg etriebe CRI @ 0\mod_1197013688111_78.docx @ 15844 @ @ 1

Perform oil level check and oil change while the machine is in a horizontal position!

Fig. 341:

Pos: 84.50.9.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel / Öl kontroll e:Legende zu Gr afi k Kontr ollschraube / Abl assschr aube @ 194\mod_1383299451132_78.docx @ 1648045 @ @ 1

1) Inspection screw / control hole 2) Drain plug

Pos: 84.50.9.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel Ölqualität /Öl meng e: siehe Kapi tel Technische Daten ( 2015- 09-11 09:58:47) @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 84.50.9.8 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle / Ölwechsel Inter vall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabell e“ @ 134 \mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 84.50.9.9 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel Öl kontr olle N EU über Kontr ollschr aube ohne Ei nfüllschr aube @ 158\mod_1364483633589_78.docx @ 1391741 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Oil level up to control hole.

If the oil reaches the control hole:

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If the oil does not reach the control hole:

• Top up oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.50.9.10 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_WechselÖl wechsel N EU ohne Einfüllschraube @ 158 \mod_1364483760090_78.docx @ 1391770 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.50.9.11 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

370

Pos: 84.50.11.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/GGetriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 11\mod_1223618840051_78.docx @ 148283 @ 2 @ 1

17.17 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive

Pos: 84.50.11.2 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bil d Getri ebe für ober en Walzenantrieb @ 0\mod_1197016558018_78.docx @ 15923 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Fig. 342:

Pos: 84.50.11.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel / Öl kontr olle:Legende zu Grafi k Kontr ollschr aube / Ablassschraube @ 194\mod_1383299451132_78.docx @ 1648045 @ @ 1

1) Inspection screw / control hole 2) Drain plug

Pos: 84.50.11.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_WechselÖlqualität /Öl menge: si ehe Kapitel T echni sche D aten (2015- 09- 11 09:58:47) @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 84.50.11.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Öl kontroll e / Öl wechsel Inter vall: siehe Kapi tel Wartung „ War tungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 84.50.11.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Öl kontroll e N EU über Kontr ollschr aube ohne Ei nfüllschr aube @ 158\mod_1364483633589_78.docx @ 1391741 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Oil level up to control hole.

If the oil reaches the control hole:

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If the oil does not reach the control hole:

• Top up oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.50.11.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Öl wechsel NEU ohne Ei nfüllschr aube @ 158\mod_1364483760090_78.docx @ 1391770 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.50.11.8 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

371

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.13.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K- O/OÖlstandskontroll e und Öl wechsel am Mähhol m @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 2 @ 1

17.18

Pos: 84.50.13.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

17.18.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 84.50.13.3 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell rotier ende Messerteller /Messertr ommel n_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.13.4 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/MMähhol m ausrichten @ 0\mod_1197017956815_78.docx @ 16042 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

17.18.2 Aligning the Cutter Bar

Pos: 84.50.13.5 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Vorraussetzung Ausrichten M ähhol m Big M 400 @ 0 \mod_1197018894471_78.docx @ 16061 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.13.6 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M ähhol m ausrichten Big M 400 @ 348\mod_1435845703917_78.docx @ 2621777 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Fig. 343

Aligning the mowers in transverse direction

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bars.

Standard version:

• Align cutterbars horizontally (refer to chapter “Setting the Cutting Height on Front Mounted

Mower” or “Setting the Cutting Height on Side Mounted Mower”).

With hydraulic cutting height adjustment version:

• Align cutterbars horizontally (refer to chapter info centre “Aligning the Cutterbars”).

Pos: 84.50.13.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Lengthwise

• Place manual spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

• Use wedges to align the cutterbar horizontally.

372

Pos: 84.50.13.8 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/OÖl kontr olle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

17.18.3 Checking the oil level

Pos: 84.50.13.9 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell rotier ende Messerteller /Messertr ommel _2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 84.50.13.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell roti erende M esserteller/M essertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.50.13.11 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl kontrolle Mähhol m Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197026101830_78.docx @ 16184 @ @ 1

Allow the machine to run briefly. Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.50.13.12 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BMII-362

Fig. 344:

• Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar.

• The oil level must be up to the bore hole. If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.

373

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.13.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖl wechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 3 @ 1

17.18.4

Pos: 84.50.13.14 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl wechsel M ähhol m Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379669854604_78.docx @ 1600701 @ @ 1

Oil change

BMII-363

Fig. 345

1) Inspection screw / oil filling hole 2) Cover

• To lower the cutter bar to the cover, slightly raise the front mowing unit and set a wood beam underneath on the opposite side of the cover.

• Lower the front mowing unit until the cutter bar rests on the wood beam and is lower in the direction of the cover.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away.

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Screw out one of the both inspection screws on the cutter bar and top up oil via oil filling hole.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• To check the oil level, align the cutter bar crosswise and lengthwise (refer to chapter

“Aligning the Cutter Bar”).

Note

Pos: 84.50.13.15 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel /Ölqualität /Öl menge: si ehe Kapitel @ 0 \mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

• Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.13.16 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel /Hinweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.50.13.17 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

374

Pos: 84.50.13.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/OÖlstandskontrolle und Öl wechsel am Mähhol m @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 2 @ 1

17.19.2 Checking the oil level

Pos: 84.50.13.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl kontrolle / Öl wechsel Sei tenmähwer ke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186 \mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

17.19

Pos: 84.50.13.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

17.19.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 84.50.13.20 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell roti erende M esserteller/M essertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 84.50.13.21 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell roti erende M esserteller/M essertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.13.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖl kontroll e @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Fig. 346

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 84.50.13.24 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl kontrolle Seitenmähwer ke Big M 400 @ 186\mod_1379669908986_78.docx @ 1600730 @ @ 1

• Allow the lateral mowing units to run briefly in working position.

• Wait until cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it against rolling.

• Open the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

• Loosen the lower oil level inspection screw on the cutter bar slightly.

The oil level is OK if oil emerges from the hole.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If no oil leaks:

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• Close the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

Pos: 84.50.13.25 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel /Ölqualität /Öl menge: si ehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.50.13.26 /Layout M odule /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

375

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.50.13.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖl wechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 3 @ 1

17.19.3 Oil change

Pos: 84.50.13.28 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhi nweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell roti erende M esserteller/M essertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.50.13.29 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl kontrolle / Öl wechsel Sei tenmähwer ke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186\mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Fig. 347

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 84.50.13.30 /BA/Wartung/Mähwer ke/Öl wechsel Seitenmähwer ke Big M 420 @ 186 \mod_1379669463327_78.docx @ 1600563 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The lateral mowing units are folded up.

– The machine is turned off and secured against rolling away.

– The ground flap is opened, for the cross conveyor design

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Note

Pos: 84.50.13.31 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel /Ölqualität /Öl menge: si ehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

• Check the oil after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.50.13.32 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel /Hinweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.51 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

376

Pos: 84.52.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/KKontroll e der M ähklingen und Messer halterung @ 0\mod_1197265641329_78.docx @ 16323 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

17.20 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder

Pos: 84.52.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Fehl ende und beschädigte M ähklingen und M ähklingenhal ter ungen @ 0\mod_1197265722813_78.docx @ 16342 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.52.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K-O/MM ähkli ngen @ 0\mod_1197265959110_78.docx @ 16361 @ 3 @ 1

Warning! - Missing and damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or damage to the machine

• Check cutter blades at least once per day and check retaining bolts every time you change the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

• Immediately replace missing or damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers

17.20.1 Cutter Blades

Pos: 84.52.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Di e Bohrung der M ähklingen kann sich durch Verschleiß aufweiten. @ 10\mod_1221048982715_78.docx @ 131675 @ @ 1 The borehole on the cutter blades may spread due to wear.

Pos: 84.52.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/War nung - Z u geri nge M aterialstär ke an den Mähkling en_neu @ 312\mod_1418983956660_78.docx @ 2409555 @ @ 1

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the cutter blades.

Pos: 84.52.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/M ähklingen beidseitig verwenbar_neu @ 3\mod_1204728012601_78.docx @ 72608 @ @ 1

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The cutter blades must be replaced at the latest when the wear limit is reached (see mark

(1) on the cutter blade; dimension a less than or equal to 13 mm).

Fig. 348

Pos: 84.52.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - The cutter blades can be turned around and used on both sides.

• When cutter blades are missing or damaged, they must be replaced as a complete set.

This prevents dangerous unbalanced rotation

377

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.52.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/M esserschraub / M esserschnell verschl uss/M esserschraubverschluss H altebolzen 14 mm @ 0 \mod_1197267907375_78.docx @ 16425 @ 3 @ 1

17.20.2 Blade screw connection

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

Fig. 349

Pos: 84.52.9 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/M esserschraub / M esserschnell verschl uss/M esserschnell verschl uss H altebolzen 14mm @ 0 \mod_1197268087875_78.docx @ 16444 @ 3 @ 1

17.20.3 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

• The material thickness of the leaf spring must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 84.52.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 350

378

Pos: 84.52.11 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/R egel mäßige Kontr olle der Bl attfeder n @ 0\mod_1197268274609_78.docx @ 16464 @ 3 @ 1

17.20.4 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Worn application seam on the leaf springs.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the leaf springs for damages at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

• The abrasion limit of the leaf springs will be achieved if the application seam (1) is worn on one point.

Fig. 351

Pos: 84.52.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Use only original Krone spare parts to replace the leaf springs.

379

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.52.13 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/R egel mäßige Kontr olle der Messerteller bzw. -trommeln @ 0\mod_1197268487390_78.docx @ 16483 @ 3 @ 1

17.20.5 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Danger! - Deformed Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the cutting discs or blade drums for damages at least once per day or after contact with foreign objects.

• In case of deformed cuttings discs or drums, the dimension of A = 48 mm must never be exceeded.

EC-0-211

Fig. 352

Pos: 84.52.14 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The cutting discs or drums must be replaced by Original Krone spare parts only.

380

Pos: 84.52.15 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Verschlei ssgrenze für Auswaschungen @ 0\mod_1197268738875_78.docx @ 16502 @ 3 @ 1

17.20.6 Abrasion Limit

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Abrasion on the cutting discs / blade drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The abrasion limit (2) will be achieved if the min. material thickness of 3 mm is no longer given.

Pos: 84.52.16 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 353

Note

If cutting discs or blade drums show deformations or wear in form of abrasions (2) or similar, these components have to be replaced by Original Krone spare parts .

381

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.52.17 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K- O/MMesser wechsel an M essertell ern @ 0\mod_1197269068562_78.docx @ 16521 @ 2 @ 1

17.21 Blade Changing on Cutting Discs

Pos: 84.52.18 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell rotier ende Messer teller /Messertr ommel n_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.52.19 /BA/Sicher hei t/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - Sich lösende M ähklingen @ 0\mod_1197269483265_78.docx @ 16540 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.52.20 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Cutter blades coming loose

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After changing the blades check that they fit perfectly and that they can move freely.

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

382

Pos: 84.52.21 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/MMesserschr aubverschl uss @ 0\mod_1197270941296_78.docx @ 16578 @ 3 @ 1

17.21.1 Blade Screw Connection

Pos: 84.52.22 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M esserschr aub / M esserschnellverschluss/Beschr eibung M esser wechsel M esserschr aubverschl uss @ 47\mod_1285661949953_78.docx @ 456898 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pic. 354

• Fold up safety device

• Clean the area

• Remove damaged or worn blades

• To fit the blades, insert the blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1)

• Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid, the blade and the cutting disc

• Place the locknut (4) on the retaining bolt from above and tighten it firmly (tightening torque refer to chapter “Torques”)

• Repeat the process for all blades

• After fitting the blades, fold the safety device down again

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different to those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums

• The locknut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Pos: 84.52.23 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

383

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.52.24 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K- O/MMesserschnell verschluss @ 0\mod_1197271019859_78.docx @ 16597 @ 3 @ 1

17.21.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Pos: 84.52.25 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M esserschr aub / M esserschnellverschluss/Beschr eibung M esser wechsel M esserschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197271100500_78.docx @ 16616 @ @ 1

Fig. 355

• Clean the area.

• Remove damaged or worn blades.

• Push the special tool (1) {blade key} between the cutter disc (4) and leaf spring (3) and press down with one hand.

• Guide a new blade (2) onto the retaining bolt and allow the blade key to return upwards.

• After fitting the blades, fold the protective device down again.

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different than those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums.

• The hex nut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once.

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

Pos: 84.52.26 /BA/Wartung/Wer kzeug kasten/Hinweis - D as Spezi al wer kzeug befi ndet sich i m Wer kzeug kasten der Maschi ne. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.52.27 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

384

Pos: 84.52.28 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Stoß kanten erneuern @ 0\mod_1197271320468_78.docx @ 16636 @ 2 @ 1

17.22 Replacing the linings

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Caution! - If the linings are checked irregularly.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged linings prior to start-up and replace linings, if necessary!

• Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutter bar material and to the lining or carry out a trial welding if necessary.•

EC-0-012

Fig. 356

• Open the welding seams of the old lining.

• Remove the lining

• Deburr the contact surface.

Pos: 84.53 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 357

• Adapt the new lining (3).

• Weld short I seams on the upper surface of the cutter bar in the areas marked (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm).

• Do not weld the edges (2).

• On the

lower surface

of the cutter bar, weld the lining (3) to the cutter bar along the whole length in area (5).

• Do not weld the edges (4).

385

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.54.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/KKr eisel nabe mit Schersicherung @ 0\mod_1197272352468_78.docx @ 16655 @ 2 @ 1

17.23 Rotary hub with shear protection

Pos: 84.54.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/M ähwer ke/Gefahr - Schnell r oti erende M esserteller/M esser trommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver‟s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.54.3 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschrei bung Schersicher ung Bild BM 400 @ 349\mod_1436275248740_78.docx @ 2624690 @ @ 1

BiG M CV

4 b

3

2

1 a

BiG M CRI

4

3

2

1 b a

BM 400 0141_1

Fig. 358

Pos: 84.54.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschrei bung Schersicher ung T ext BM 400/420/500 @ 349\mod_1436275334775_78.docx @ 2624721 @ @ 1 To protect the mowers against overload, the rotary hubs (1) are secured by means of nuts (2) and shear pins (3).

If the machine strikes obstacles (for example stones), the both shear pins in the rotary hub shear off. The rotary hub and nut turn upward on the pinion shaft.

• Cutting discs or mower drums which transport the crop in the direction of travel to the left

(LE) have left-handed thread.

• Cutting discs or mower drums which transport the crop in direction of travel to the right (RE) have right-handed thread.

To distinguish between right-hand rotation (RE) and left-hand rotation (LE), the nuts (2) and pinion shafts (4) of left-hand rotation (LE) have a distinctive groove (a, b).

• Nuts (2) with left-handed thread (LE) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

• The pinion shafts (4) with left-handed thread (LE) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

Pos: 84.54.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

386

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.54.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Hinweis F ortsetzen der Arbeit nach Ansprechen der Schersicherung BiG M 400 @ 349\mod_1436276956773_78.docx @ 2624842 @ @ 1 To be able to work again as quickly as possible after a shear lock engages, you should have in stock two left and two right bearing units.

Pos: 84.54.7 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Nach dem Abscheren @ 4\mod_1211951454110_78.docx @ 84095 @ 3 @ 1

For order numbers of bearing units, refer to KRONE spare parts list.

17.23.1 After Shearing Off

Pos: 84.54.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution! - Correct installation position of the bearing housing not observed.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Right-hand (RH) cutting discs and drums always have right-handed pinion shafts and nuts

(no groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

• Left-hand (LH) cutting discs and drums always have left-handed pinion shafts and nuts (with groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

• Remove the cutting disc or drum.

• Completely remove the sheared off bearing housing.

• Install the replacement bearing housing after the cutter disc (BM 400 0141) is set up

• Install the cutting disc or mower drum.

387

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.54.9 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Reparatur der abgescherten Lag erei nheit @ 349\mod_1436271080417_78.docx @ 2624499 @ 3 @ 1

17.23.2 Repairing the Sheared off Bearing Unit a

7

8

9

3

2 3

3

1

10 d b

4 c

BM 400 0170_1

Fig. 359

• Remove retaining ring (7).

• Unscrew hexagon head screw (8).

• Use special key (10) included with delivery to dismount the nut (2).

• Dismount hub (1).

• Remove the damaged shear pins (3).

• Check nut and hub for damage.

• Fill the space above the taper roller bearing with grease (c).

• Place hub on the pinion shaft.

• Drive the new shear pins (3) through hub (1) and shaft (4).

Note - Observe position of shear pins!

• Drive the shear pins (3) from outside into the hole until the end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).

• The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally (see detail

(I)).

• Install the nut (2) using the special key (10) included with delivery (tighten to a tightening torque of 300 Nm).

• Mount and tighten hexagon head screws (8) with detent edged washers.

• Mount retaining ring (7).

Pos: 84.54.10 /BA/Wartung/Wer kzeug kasten/Hinweis - D as Spezi al wer kzeug befi ndet sich i m Wer kzeug kasten der Maschi ne. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

Pos: 85 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

388

Pos: 86.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Gr undmaschi ne @ 0\mod_1197277779213_78.docx @ 16847 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

18 Maintenance

– Basic Machine

Pos: 86.2 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Mähwer ke/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Akti onen an der M aschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197278033978_78.docx @ 16866 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Maintenance and repair work on safety-related components such as steering or brakes must only be performed by authorised workshops.

Pos: 86.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBremsen @ 0\mod_1197278385463_78.docx @ 16886 @ 2 @ 1

18.1 Brakes

Pos: 86.4 /BA/Sicher heit/Br emsen/Gefahr - Bremsen ni cht in Ordnung @ 0\mod_1197279276510_78.docx @ 17044 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HH ydrauli kanlag e @ 0\mod_1197278455041_78.docx @ 16905 @ 2 @ 1

Danger! - Problem with brakes

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly.

• Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by professional workshops or recognised brake services!

18.2 Hydraulic system

Pos: 86.6 /BA/Sicher heit/2. Vor angestellte Warnhi nweise/Warnung - Fl üssig keiten unter Druck / U mg ang mit Leckagen @ 273\mod_1403616315353_78.docx @ 2053221 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury as a result of incorrect handling of liquids under high pressure.

Effect: Escaping high-pressure liquids can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury.

Repair work on the hydraulic system may only be performed by authorised KRONE professional workshops.

• Depressurise the system before disconnecting lines.

• When searching for leaks, use suitable aids and wear protective goggles.

• High-pressure liquid that is escaping from a small opening is virtually invisible. Therefore, you should use a piece of cardboard or something similar when searching for leaks. Protect your hands and body.

• If liquid penetrates the skin, consult a doctor immediately. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible. Danger of infection! Physicians who are not familiar with this area must consult appropriate information from a competent medical source.

• Check hydraulic hoses regularly and replace if there are any signs of damage or ageing!

The replacement lines must comply with the requirements of the device manufacturer.

• Ensure that all line connections are tight before the pressure in the system builds up again.

389

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.8 /BA/Wartung/M otor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle - Gr undmaschine BM 420 M AN und C aterpillar @ 145\mod_1359647075822_78.docx @ 1301267 @ @ 1

Maintenance Work Maintenance Interval

Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil level check

Change the hydraulic oil

Replace the hydraulic oil filter

High pressure filter steering hydraulics

High pressure filter work hydraulics

Checking pressure filter (every 1500 h)

Pressure filter, leakage oil pipe for wheel motors

Supply pump pressure filter

Transfer gearbox

Oil level check

Oil change

Cabin

Replace fresh air filter

Clean fresh air filter

Replace circulation filter

Clean circulation filter

Windshield wiper system

Pilot lamp test

Light function test

Check the foot brake setting.

Readjust parking brake Bowden cable if necessary.

Air conditioning system / heating

Collector / dryer

Refrigerant condition and filling quantity

Checking the capacitor

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

18.2.1.1.1.1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

390

Maintenance Work

Maintenance

Maintenance Interval

– Basic Machine

Belt drives

Fan wheel drive

Drive for outrigger arms

Drive for lateral mowing units

Cross conveyor drive

Tyres

Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks

Inspect tyre air pressure visually

Measure tyre air pressure with instrument: weekly

Tighten wheel nuts front wheel/rear wheel with 630

Nm

(466 lb-ft).

Tightening screws

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the rear axle.

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the wheel hubs.

Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod

Tighten fastening screws of the outriggers on the frame.

Battery

Check the acid density of the battery; charge the battery, if and when necessary, and top up with distilled water.

Pos: 86.9 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

391

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.10 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Systemaufbau Ar beits- und Bremshydr aulik Big M 420 @ 52\mod_1289463554046_78.docx @ 504352 @ 23 @ 1

18.3

18.3.1

Maintenance - hydraulic system

System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics

Pos: 86.11 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Pumpen Big M 420 @ 57\mod_1295941050328_78.docx @ 548156 @ 3 @ 1

18.3.2 Pumps

Pos: 86.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.360

1. Brake and work hydraulics

2. Steering pump

392

Pos: 86.13 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/H auptblock @ 0\mod_1197292256400_78.docx @ 17161 @ 3 @ 1

18.3.3 Main block

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 361

NO. Designation

1

2

Suspension pressure control

Drive pressure control

3 Master control valve pressure control

Y6 Switching to front axle

Y7 Switching to rear axle

Y8 Front drive

Y9 Right drive

Y10 Left drive

Y11 Parking Brake

Y15 Lift suspension

Y16 Lower suspension

Y19 Main valve

Y20 Lift front

Y21 Lower front

Y22 Lift right

Y23 Lower right

Y24 Lift left

Y25 Lower left

Y26 Push off left

Y27 Push off right

393

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.15 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Ü ber druckventil e an Ventilbl öcken @ 126\mod_1345640123475_78.docx @ 1140855 @ 3 @ 1

18.3.4 Over-Pressure Valves

 NOTE

Over-pressure valves set in the factory.

Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out only by the customer service department.

The valve blocks have been equipped with over-pressure valves. These valves were set at the factory and must not be changed.

Pos: 86.16 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstell bar e Dr osseln @ 0\mod_1197295918463_78.docx @ 17218 @ 3 @ 1

18.3.5 Adjustable Throttles

Pos: 86.17 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Fr ontmähwer k Zuschaltgeschwi ndigkeit @ 13 \mod_1225784997962_78.docx @ 163013 @ @ 1

Speed of moving the front mowing unit into operating position

Pos: 86.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 362

The adjustable throttle (1) to set the speed to move the front mowing unit is located next to the hydraulic tank, on the left-hand side in direction of travel.

394

Pos: 86.19 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Dr osseln Seitliche H ubzylinder und Si ebantrieb @ 349\mod_1436355844300_78.docx @ 2625804 @ @ 1

Lateral lifting cylinders

Maintenance – Basic Machine

1

Fig. 363

The adjustable throttle (1) for lifting height of lateral lifting cylinders is located on the outrigger arms of the lateral mowing units.

Sieve drive

1

Fig. 364

The adjustable throttle (1) for sieve drive speed is located behind the tailgate.

Pos: 86.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Settings on the throttles are only allowed to be performed by an authorized workshop!

395

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.21 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/HH ydr auli köl @ 0\mod_1197296812478_78.docx @ 17265 @ 2 @ 1

18.4 Hydraulic oil

Pos: 86.22 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - H ydrauli kanlag e: nur freig egebene Öl e einsetzen @ 126\mod_1345640514595_78.docx @ 1140944 @ @ 1

 CAUTION

Damage to the hydraulic system if a not approved oil or oil mixture has been used!

The hydraulic system may get damaged when using not approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils which is not approved.

• NEVER use engine oil for the hydraulic system.

• NEVER mix different types of oil.

• Before changing types of oil please consult the customer service.

Pos: 86.23 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Aufstellung von Mi ner alöl en für di e H ydr auli kanl age @ 257\mod_1398240822712_78.docx @ 1970671 @ @ 1

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that decompose quickly.

Pos: 86.24 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschineT echnische Daten Betriebsstoffe Aufstell ungs_Tabelle von Mineral ölen @ 324\mod_1425453178898_78.docx @ 2491935 @ @ 1

ISO viscosity class HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

AVIA

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

DEA

ELF

ENGEN

ESSO

FINA

FRAGOL

FUCHS

Houghton

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUI MOLY

Mobil

SHELL

SRS

Stuart

Theunissen

TOTAL

TRIBOL

Pos: 86.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46

Econa PG 46

Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

Hydraulic TR 46

Renolin PGE 46

Syntolubric 46

Fluid BD 46

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

Ultrasyn PG 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

OSO 46

Aral Vitam GF 46

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Astron HLP 46

ELFOLNA 46

ELFOLNA DS 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

HYDRAN 46

RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46

LAMORA HLP 46

Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46

Hydraulics S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

Shell Tellus oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol 772

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

Vesta HLP 46

396

Pos: 86.26 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/HH ydr auli kölstand @ 0\mod_1197297631728_78.docx @ 17342 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance

18.5 Hydraulic oil level

Pos: 86.27 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Akti onen an der M aschi ne_2 @ 0\mod_1197297750885_78.docx @ 17361 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• When working on the hydraulic system, always switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 86.28 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/H ydrauli köl tank Kontrolle_Wechsel BM 400 @ 13 \mod_1225787591212_78.docx @ 163063 @ @ 1

– Basic Machine

Fig. 365

Before checking oil level:

• Park the machine horizontally

• Lower all mowing units and switch off the engine.

Oil level check:

• Time interval: Daily

• The oil must be visible in the inspection window (1).

• Refill oil if necessary (2)

Oil change:

• Time intervals: every 500 hours or when the filter warning indicator lights, but at least once a year

• Drain oil with suitable hose via plug-in connection (3)

• Collect the used oil in a suitable collection vessel.

• Top up the oil (2)

• Oil level (oil must be visible in inspection window (1)).

Capacity: approx. 80 l (approx. 21 U.S. gal)

Pos: 86.29 /BA/War tung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel/Hi nweis - Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

397

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.31 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/H ydrauli köl filter ersetzen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225788077446_78.docx @ 163114 @ 2 @ 1

18.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter

Pos: 86.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 366

Note

Ensure total cleanliness when changing the filter

Properly dispose of filter cartridge that was removed

• Replace the filter element (3) the first time after 50 operating hours, then every 500 operating hours or after each mowing season (at the same time as changing the hydraulic oil).

• Release the filter (2) and unscrew it from its holding.

• Replace the filter with a new filter.

Screw on new filter as follows:

• Moisten the sealing surface of the filter with oil.

• Once the filter seal touches the sealing surface of the filter housing, tighten the filter manually making a 3/4 to 1-1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.

• Check the filter for leaks while the engine is running and tighten if necessary.

398

Pos: 86.33.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/H Hochdruckfilter @ 26\mod_1245836423991_78.docx @ 264126 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.7 High-pressure filter

Pos: 86.33.2 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Mitteldr uckfilter mit elektr. Verschmutzungsanzeig e @ 91\mod_1326192916928_78.docx @ 777827 @ @ 1 The filter takes up depositions of solid particles of the hydraulic system. The filtering of the hydraulic circuit serves as a prevention of damages on components of the circuit. The filter is equipped with an electrical contamination indicator. If the degree of contamination is too high, an appropriate error message appears in the display.

Pos: 86.33.3 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Hinweis F ehl er mel dung „1501 Druckfilter Lenkhydrauli k 1502 Dr uckfilter Arbeitshydra ulik @ 145\mod_1359645603295_78.docx @ 1301176 @ @ 1

Note

If the error message “1501 pressure filter steering hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter steering hydraulics must be replaced.

If the error message “1502 pressure filter work hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter work hydraulics must be replaced.

Pos: 86.33.4 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Hochdruckfilter bei Komfort_H ydraulik Bil d_BM 420 @ 174\mod_1371630955909_78.docx @ 1491454 @ @ 1

Fig. 367

Pos: 86.33.5 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /6) H ochdr uckfilter Lenkhydrauli k / 7) H ochdr uckfilter Arbeitshydraulik @ 145\mod_1359645719424_78.docx @ 1301239 @ @ 1

6) High pressure filter steering hydraulics

Pos: 86.33.6 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Filter element wechsel n @ 26\mod_1245841608710_78.docx @ 264205 @ @ 1

7) High pressure filter work hydraulics

Replacing the Filter Element

Pos: 86.33.7 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Ort H ochdruckfilter Arbeitshydrauli k BM 420_Cater pillar @ 145\mod_1359644287555_78.docx @ 1300813 @ @ 1

The filter (6,7) of the hydraulic circuit is located on the left machine side on the engine.

Pos: 86.33.8 /BA/Wartung/U mwelt/Hinweis Entsorgen / Lag ern von Öle und Ölfilter U mwelt @ 32 \mod_1253101375171_78.docx @ 311770 @ @ 1

ENVIRONMENT! - Disposal and storage of used lubricants and oil filters

Effect: Environmental damage

Store or dispose used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

Pos: 86.33.9 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter /Mitteldr uckfilterel ement wechseln( mit Verschmutzungsanzeige) T ext @ 175\mod_1372656347161_78.docx @ 1501445 @ @ 1

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Relieve all pressure from the hydraulic system.

• Unscrew the bottom part of the filter (4) from the top part of the filter (1), clean it and make certain that it is not damaged.•

• Remove the filter element (3) and replace it by a new one with identical properties.

• Push a new filter element (3) onto the valve sleeve (5).

• Check the O-ring seal (2) and, if necessary, replace it by a new one with identical properties.

• Screw the bottom part of the filter (4) onto the top part of the filter until the stop is reached and turn it back one quarter of a revolution.

• Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and check it for leaks.

Pos: 86.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

399

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.35.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/VVerteilergetriebe @ 2\mod_1202991526780_78.docx @ 64104 @ 2 @ 1

18.8 Transfer gearbox

Pos: 86.35.2 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel/Selbstfahr er/Verteilergetri ebe Bild BM 420 C aterpuillar/M AN @ 181\mod_1376999399451_78.docx @ 1553125 @ @ 1

2) Inspection screw / control hole

Fig. 368

1) Filler plug / filling hole

3) Drain plug

Pos: 86.35.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel/Ölsorte PAO SHC M obil 630 verwenden @ 142\mod_1357727534047_78.docx @ 1262085 @ @ 1

Note

Only use gearbox oil (PAO Mobil SHC 630).

Pos: 86.35.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel Ölqualität /Öl meng e: siehe Kapi tel Technische Daten ( 2015-09-11 09:58:47) @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 86.35.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel/Öl kontrolle / Öl wechsel Inter vall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabell e“ @ 134 \mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 86.35.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel Öl kontr olle N EU über Kontr ollschr aube @ 140\mod_1355141753680_78.docx @ 1244582 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Oil level up to control hole.

Pos: 86.35.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel Ölwechsel NEU @ 140\mod_1355142057277_78.docx @ 1244610 @ @ 1

If the oil reaches the control hole:

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If the oil does not reach the control hole:

• Screw out filler plug.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and the filler plug and tighten them securely.

Pos: 86.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw and filler plug.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via oil filling hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and the filler plug and tighten them securely.

400

Pos: 86.37 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Luftansaugung und -Verteil ung @ 0\mod_1197299076041_78.docx @ 17457 @ 2 @ 1

18.9 Air intake and distribution

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-217

Fig. 369

Pos: 86.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 370

401

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.39 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/FFrischl uftfilter @ 52\mod_1289402342234_78.docx @ 504132 @ 3 @ 1

18.9.1 Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter

Pos: 86.40 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Frischluftfilter defekt oder falsch eingebaut WARNUN G ( 2012-08-23 13:28:27) @ 52\mod_1289402772703_78.docx @ 504186 @ @ 1

WARNING! – Fresh air filter faulty or incorrectly installed

Dust gets into the cab, is inhaled, and causes health damage.

• Make certain the filter is seated to form a seal.

• Replace faulty fresh air filters immediately.

Pos: 86.41 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Frischluftfilter Bild BM420/500/BigX @ 134\mod_1351070195091_78.docx @ 1194065 @ @ 1

2 1

4

3

4

Pos: 86.42 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Frischluftfilter text @ 134\mod_1351070370414_78.docx @ 1194152 @ @ 1

Fig. 371

A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Check the fresh air filter for soiling prior to any operation.

Pos: 86.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If filters are not properly maintained they may become very soiled, no longer ensuring that sufficient fresh air is passed into the cab.

• Open the closing devices (1) by turning 90° clockwise.

• Reverse the locking lever (4) to the left in order to unlock the filter.

• Pull out the fresh air filter (3), check it for soiling and clean it, if necessary.

Clean the fresh air filter (3) by knocking it, never clean with compressed air. In case of severe soiling, the fresh air filter (3) must be replaced.

402

Pos: 86.44 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/U ml uftsi eb @ 0\mod_1197299889400_78.docx @ 17546 @ 3 @ 1

18.9.2 Circulation filter

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX200550

Fig. 372

Note

If the circulating air filter (1) is very dirty, the output of the air conditioning system may be reduced and it may heat up.

• Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.

403

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.46 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SSchei benwaschanl age @ 0\mod_1197300179760_78.docx @ 17565 @ 2 @ 1

18.10 Windscreen washer system

Pos: 86.47 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Schei benwaschanlag e Bil d Big M 420 @ 181\mod_1377170490274_78.docx @ 1557794 @ @ 1

Fig. 373

1) Reservoir for windscreen washer system

Pos: 86.48 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Schei benwaschanlag e auffüll en @ 126 \mod_1345727954351_78.docx @ 1144110 @ @ 1

3) Cover

2) Flap

The reservoir for the windscreen washer system is located front right behind the flap over the front wheel. It is filled from above via the opening in the right platform.

Pos: 86.49 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

• To obtain a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add some screen cleaner/anti-freeze for the windscreen washer system to the water.

• In winter empty the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze agent.

Check the level of the windscreen washer system every day.

• Open the flap.

The liquid level is OK if the windscreen liquid in the reservoir can be seen.

• Close the flap.

The windscreen liquid must be refilled if there is no windscreen liquid in the reservoir.

• Close the flap.

• Put a ladder on the platform.

• To free the opening in the platform, push the protection cover to the side.

• Remove the cover of the reservoir.

• Make sure that the windscreen liquid does not escape from the reservoir when refilling it.

• Attach the cover to the reservoir to close the reservoir.

• Close the opening in the platform with the protection cover.

• Put away the ladder.

404

Pos: 86.50 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/R einigen des Vor abs cheiders @ 74\mod_1308831609629_78.docx @ 658490 @ 2 @ 1

18.11

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator

Access to the pre-separator

Warning! – Steep ladder!

Danger of falling

• Always be directed towards the machine when climbing or descending

• Use the handle

• Do not step onto the engine cover of the machine

The pre-separator (1) for the intake air of the engine is maintenance-free. Under specific operating conditions, dirt accumulations on the adjustment plate (2) may arise. These have to be removed if necessary.

Pos: 86.51 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 374

The pre-separator (1) can be accessed via the auxiliary ladder (3) (left machine side).

CAUTION!

Only effect the cleaning of the area around the pre-separator and the cleaning of the adjustment plate (2) of the pre-separator from the auxiliary ladder. Stepping on the machine

(engine cover) is not permitted.

405

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.52.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sensoren (linke M aschinensei te) @ 114\mod_1338796047381_78.docx @ 1004692 @ 2 @ 1

18.12 Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side)

Pos: 86.52.2 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren LH BM 420 @ 349\mod_1436348300871_78.docx @ 2625460 @ @ 1

406

Fig. 375

21

20

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos. Sensors Sensor type

Pos: 86.52.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1

2

6

7

8

9a

9b

Air filter contamination

Moisture / temperature

Negative pressure switch

Side mounted mower locking Namur sensor

Spring relief

Flush valve temperature

Auger speed

Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

14 Position of outrigger arm

16 Brake tank pressure

17

20

21

22

Excess pressure/negative pressure air conditioning

Hydraulic oil tank level

Pressure sensor driving hydraulics

Steering angle

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Pressure switch

Pressure switch

Filling level sensor

Pressure sensor

X

Optional Tightening torque

17 Nm

70 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

407

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.52.4 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sensoren (rechte M aschinensei te) @ 114\mod_1338795965308_78.docx @ 1004663 @ 2 @ 1

18.13 Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side)

Pos: 86.52.5 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren RH BM 420_M AN @ 186\mod_1379654891950_78.docx @ 1599481 @ @ 1

408

Fig. 376

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.52.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pos. Sensor designation

5

6

3

4

Filling level, fuel

Suction return air filter

Service brake

Lateral mowing unit locking

7

8

Spring compensation

Temperature flush valve

9a Auger speed

9b Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

10 Cutting height lateral mowing units

11 Front mowing unit speed

12 Axle suspension position

13 Cutting height front mowing unit

14 Position of the outrigger arm

15 Service brake switch

18 Feedback - drive pumps

19

23

24

Urea filling level sensor

NOx sensor

Temperature sensor exhaust gas

Sensor type

Dipstick sensor

Manometric switch

Pressure sensor

Namur sensor

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

Namur sensor

Rotation angle potentiometer

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Path measurement

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Captive washer potentiometer

X)

(optional) Tightening torque

60 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

X

X

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a=2mm)

409

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.52.7 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstell ung der Sensor en @ 0\mod_1199962173428_78.docx @ 37635 @ 3 @ 1

18.13.1

Pos: 86.52.8 /BA/Wartung/Sensor en/Namursensor d = 12 mm BM 400 @ 35\mod_1258362555125_78.docx @ 335159 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Sensors

18.13.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm

3

1 a

2

BP-VFS-088-1

Fig. 377

The dimension “a” between the encoder (2) and the sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (see table “Position of the sensors”)

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor

Pos: 86.52.9 /BA/Wartung/Sensor en/Namursensor d = 30 mm BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380180316348_78.docx @ 1611365 @ 4 @ 1

• Turn the nuts until dimension

• Tighten the nuts again

(see table “Position of the sensors”) is reached

18.13.1.2 Namur Sensor d = 30 mm

Pos: 86.53 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 378

The dimension “a” between transmitter (2) and sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (refer to table “Position of the Sensors”).

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor.

• Turn the nuts until the dimension reached.

• Tighten nuts again.

(refer to the table “Position of the sensors”) is

410

Pos: 86.54.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/WWartung Klimaanl age und H eizung @ 0\mod_1197301016697_78.docx @ 17643 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance

18.15.1 Air conditioning components

A Compressor on engine at the left-hand side of the vehicle, driven via V-belt

B Capacitor behind the radiator unit, accessible from the left and right

C Dryer/collector behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

Pos: 86.54.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D Evaporator in the cab roof

E Manometric switch on drier, behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

F Expansion valve at the evaporator inlet

G Air conditioning system/heating rotary switch in cab, roof panel

– Basic Machine

18.14 Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating

Pos: 86.54.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SSpezi elle Sicher hei tshi nweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

18.15 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 86.54.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/WARNUNG! – Verletzungsgefahr durch Berührung von Kältemittel! @ 0\mod_1197301139072_78.docx @ 17682 @ @ 1

Warning! - Contact with refrigerant

Effect: Injuries

• In case of repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant emissions may occur; these emissions may be liquid or gaseous and are a hazard for man and the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

• Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorised specialists.

• In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet to present to a physician (see Chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).

• Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.

• During refill and repair do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

• Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.

• Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system

Pos: 86.54.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Klimaanl age/Komponenten der Kli maanlag e @ 0 \mod_1197301531697_78.docx @ 17701 @ 3 @ 1

411

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.54.6 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Kältemittel BM 400 @ 126\mod_1345723465211_78.docx @ 1143781 @ 3 @ 1

18.15.2 Refrigerant

 CAUTION

Environmental damage due to chemicals!

The air conditioning system is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. However, the refrigerant shall not simply be discharged as the environment will be damaged if refrigerant gets into it.

• Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

• Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

• Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning system carried out only by your Krone dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

Pos: 86.54.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Klimaanl age/Dr uckschalter @ 130 \mod_1347276640139_78.docx @ 1161115 @ 3 @ 1

18.15.3 Manometric Switch

Fig. 379

 NOTE

When the fan speed is at the highest still pleasant performance, set the cooling performance of the air conditioning system to an average value. Let the air conditioning system not operate at the lowest fan speed and highest cooling performance.

The air conditioning system has been fitted with a manometric switch (1) which shuts down the system in case of excess pressure or negative pressure (on the dryer behind the combined radiator on the left hand side in direction of travel).

Pos: 86.54.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

412

Pos: 86.54.9 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Klimaanl age/Samml er / Trockner (2012-09- 10 13:37:24) @ 0\mod_1197352605245_78.docx @ 17844 @ 3 @ 1

18.15.4 Collector/drier

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-134

Fig. 380:

Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing.

According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination with the inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.

Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

Pos: 86.54.10 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°

Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

413

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.54.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer /Grundmaschi ne/Kli maanlag e/Kältemittelzustand und di e F üllmenge prüfen @ 131\mod_1347277627360_78.docx @ 1161370 @ 3 @ 1

18.15.5 Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity

Fig. 381

Checking the filling quantity

The refrigerant quantity is checked on the viewing glass (2) via the white float ball (5).

Interval for refrigerant level check : refer to chapter Maintenance - Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

 Start the engine.

 Switch on the air conditioning system and set it to the highest action.

If the white float ball (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is OK.

If the white float ball (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be filled by a specialist workshop.

Checking the refrigerant condition

The refrigerant condition (moisture saturation) is checked on the viewing glass (2) by the orange indicator pearl (3)

Check the interval for refrigerant condition: refer to chapter Maintenance-Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer-receiver-unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

Pos: 86.54.12 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

414

Pos: 86.54.13 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K- O/KKühl er und Kühlerr aum r einigen @ 182\mod_1377244557397_78.docx @ 1561485 @ 2 @ 1

18.16 Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment

Pos: 86.54.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer /Grundmaschi ne/Kli maanlag e/Kondensator pr üfen Bild BM 420 @ 182 \mod_1377495042110_78.docx @ 1562254 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Fig. 382

Pos: 86.54.15 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer /Grundmaschi ne/Kli maanlag e/Kondensator pr üfen BM 420 @ 182\mod_1377246091200_78.docx @ 1561573 @ @ 1

Always keep the radiator, the radiator compartment, the condensator block, the sieve drum and the area in front of the sieve drum clean. The named components must be cleaned depending on the degree of soiling, however, at least once a day.

Cleaning the sieve drum

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Fold down the ladder (1).

• Open the tailgate (2).

• Clean the sieve drum (3) and the area in front of the sieve drum.

Cleaning the radiator and the radiator compartment

• Open the radiator guards (4), right and left machine side.

• Release the lockings (5) on the radiator frame and swing up the sieve drum.

• Release the locking on the condenser block (6) and swing the condenser block to the side.

• Clean the radiator (7) and the radiator compartment.

• Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside, making sure that the fins are not damaged.

• Swing back the condenser block and secure it.

• Swivel the sieve drum down and close the locking on the radiator frame.

• Close the radiator guards.

• Close the tailgate.

• Swing up the ladder.

Pos: 86.55 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

415

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.56.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/RRiementriebe @ 0\mod_1197276279135_78.docx @ 16733 @ 2 @ 1

18.17 Belt drives

Pos: 86.56.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Gefahr - U nvor herg esehene Akti onen an der Maschi ne_3 @ 0\mod_1197353885870_78.docx @ 17920 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

Pos: 86.56.3 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - D urchr utschende Riementriebe (2012-08-23 10:45:39) @ 0\mod_1197354754964_78.docx @ 17940 @ @ 1

Caution! -

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

• Retighten or replace slipping belt drives immediately.

Pos: 86.56.4 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Riemen allgemei n (2012- 08- 23 11:11:31) @ 13\mod_1226488106287_78.docx @ 165850 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.56.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

• Keep all belts at good tension constantly.

• Clean dirty belts with caustic cleaning fluid. Do not use petrol or similar products for cleaning.

• Check the tension of new belts after the first 10 operating hours and retension if necessary.

416

Pos: 86.56.6 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahr er/Hinweis Prüfen nach den ersten 10,50 danach 250 Stunden @ 131 \mod_1348120214097_78.docx @ 1164543 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Note

Check the V-belt tension and condition of all belt drives after the first 10, 50 hours of operation and thereafter every 250 operating hours.

• Replace damaged or worn V-belts.

Pos: 86.56.7 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahr er/Voraussetzung schaffen Riementriebe prüfen @ 131\mod_1348118753307_78.docx @ 1164485 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Lower the mowing unit into working position

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 86.56.8 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahr er/Antri eb Lüfterrad BM 420_MAN @ 86 \mod_1320151714955_78.docx @ 741725 @ 3 @ 1

18.17.1 Fan wheel drive

1

2 a 3

BM 420 0037

Fig. 383:

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 132 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 132 mm is set.

To replace belt (1):

• Relieve the spring (2) in the tension roller (3).

• Remove belt (1).

• The belt pulley (4) must be exactly aligned.

• If necessary, adjust the belt pulleys (4) with the screws (5).

• Set a new belt in place and tension the spring in the tension roller a = 132 mm

Pos: 86.56.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Make sure the fan blade is in a central position in the radiator cover.

417

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.56.10 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Ausleg erar me @ 12\mod_1225198179100_78.docx @ 154214 @ 3 @ 1

18.17.2 Outrigger arms

SFM1-450 a a

SFM1-460

Abb. 384

Outrigger right / left

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 87 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a= about 87 mm is set.

Pos: 86.56.11 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Tighten the left and right tensioning system only until the distance tube makes contact in the spring. (Do not overstretch!)

418

Pos: 86.56.12 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Ri emen der Ausl egerar me ersetzen BM 420 @ 149\mod_1361776454327_78.docx @ 1334736 @ @ 1

Replace the belt on the outrigger.

1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

3

4

2

Fig. 385

• Remove the belt covers.

• Relieve the springs (1) in the tension rollers.

Note

Remove the cover plate (3) on the right side.

Pos: 86.56.13 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Loosen the lubrication lines (2).

• Replace the belt (4) and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Tighten the springs (1) to a length of 87 mm.

• Install the cover plate (3) on the right side.

• Install the belt covers.

BM 400 0167

419

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.56.14 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Antriebsriemen M ähwer k @ 0\mod_1197357675011_78.docx @ 18056 @ 3 @ 1

18.17.3 Drive of mowing unit

Fig. 386

• The belt tension is produced using the hydraulic cylinder (pressure 50 bar). Reset the single-acting cylinder using the springs.

Replace the lateral mowing unit V-belt

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

BM202340

Fig. 387

• Remove the attachment bolts (1) of the belt covers (2) on both sides.

• Remove the belt covers (2).

• Replace the belt and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Install the belt covers (2) again.

Pos: 86.56.15 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Antrrieb Querför der er 80mm BM 400/420 @ 13\mod_1226401985570_78.docx @ 165677 @ 3 @ 1

420

18.17.4 Cross Conveyor Drive

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.56.16 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

3 5 4

BM 400 0230

Fig. 388

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 80 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Remove the guard (1)

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 80 mm is set.

• Install the guard (1)

To replace belt (3):

• Remove the guard (1)

• Remove the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

• Use the mounting lever (4) to raise the idler pulley (5).

• Remove the old belt (3).

• Place the new belt (3) onto the pulleys (6).

• Lower the idler pulley (5) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (4).

With the V-belt under tension, dimension a must be equal to approx. 80 mm. Correct the belt tension as necessary

• Install the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

• Install the guard (1)

421

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.56.17 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Ri emen am Z etter antrieb prüfen/ spannen/ ersetzen BM 400/420 @ 349\mod_1436342204683_78.docx @ 2625214 @ 3 @ 1

18.17.5 Checking / Tensioning / Replacing Belt on Conditioner Drive

3 2 6

5

1

4

7

8 a= 230

4 2

Fig. 389

1) Guard

3) Belt/kraftband

5) Hexagon socket-head screw

2) Tension spring

4) Ring screw

6 ) Pulley

7) Housing cover 8) Screws

Prerequisite:

– The machine is parked, shut down and is secured against rolling away.

– The ignition key is removed and you carry it with you.

– The cross conveyor is removed.

Checking the belt tension

• Dismount guard.

• Check dimension (a).

– If dimension (a) is 230 mm, the belt tension is sufficient.

– If dimension (a) is not 230 mm, the belt tension must be corrected.

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce dimension (a) until the distance (a) is approx. 230 mm.

• Mount guard.

Pos: 86.57 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Replacing belt

• Dismount guard.

• Dismount ring screw.

• Dismount housing cover.

• Loosen the eight connecting screws of the pulleys.

• Loosen hexagon socket-head screw and remove the first pulley from the shaft.

• Remove the old belt.

• Place the new belt over the V-belt pulleys.

• Push pulley onto the shaft and secure by means of eight connecting screws.

• Mount hexagon socket-head screw and washer.

• Tighten ring screw until dimension (a) is 230mm.

• Mount guard and housing cover.

BM 420 0176

422

Pos: 86.58.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/RR eifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.18 Tyres

Pos: 86.58.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahr enhinweise alt/Warnung - F alsche Rei fenmontage @ 0\mod_1197358162433_78.docx @ 18132 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.58.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/RR eifengröß e wechsel n @ 182\mod_1377182698177_78.docx @ 1559803 @ 2 @ 1

Warning! - Tyre fitting incorrect

Effect: Injuries or damage to the machine

• Fitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

• If tyres are not correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the

KRONE dealer or a qualified tyre specialist.

• When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, the maximum pressure given by the tyre manufacturer must not be exceeded. The tyre or even the wheel rim could explode and/or burst.

• If the tyre heels do not fit properly when the maximum permitted pressure is reached, let out the air, align tyres, lubricate the tyre heels and pump up the tyre again.

• Detailed information about how to fit tyres onto agricultural machinery can be obtained from the tyre manufacturers.

18.19

Pos: 86.58.4 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R eifengröß e wechseln @ 182\mod_1377181411119_78.docx @ 1559775 @ @ 1

Changing the Tyre Size

Pos: 86.58.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

If it is intended to change the tyre size, please ask KRONE customer service as the software parameter must be adapted by the traction drive, if necessary.

423

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.58.6 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/RR eifen prüfen und pfl egen @ 0\mod_1197358037214_78.docx @ 18094 @ 3 @ 1

18.19.1

Pos: 86.58.7 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R eifen pr üfen Bild Big M 420 @ 87\mod_1320329410237_78.docx @ 745224 @ @ 1

Checking and maintaining tyres

Fig. 390

Pos: 86.58.8 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R eifen pr üfen Big M 400 T ext (2012- 08- 27 16:36:49) @ 0\mod_1197358379792_78.docx @ 18172 @ @ 1

Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.

• Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as possible or change the tyres.

• Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the sunlight for long periods.

• Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.

• Use a precisely working tyre gauge to check the tyre pressure at least once a week (see chapter entitled "Technical Data").

Pos: 86.58.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Never operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transport of the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on the valves to keep dirt out. Check the tyre pressure frequently!

424

Pos: 86.58.10 /BA/Wartung/R eifen/Radbefestigung 630 N m @ 0\mod_1197359014933_78.docx @ 18210 @ 3 @ 1

18.19.2 Wheel mounting

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Fig. 391:

Tighten the wheel nuts after the first and then every 20 to 25 operating hours to a torque of 630

Nm.

Pos: 86.59 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmaschine/Befestigungsschr auben am Ausleg er nachziehen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197386860573_78.docx @ 20209 @ 3 @ 1

18.19.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger

Pos: 87 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 392:

• Retighten (annually) the four fastening bolts (1) on the frame arms to a tightening torque of

640 Nm.

425

Maintenance – lubrication chart

Pos: 88.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Schmier plan @ 0\mod_1197359304198_78.docx @ 18232 @ 2 @ 1

19 Maintenance

– lubrication chart

Pos: 88.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAbschmi eren der Gelenkwelle ( 2015-10-20 16:25:51) @ 0\mod_1197359496183_78.docx @ 18251 @ 1 @ 1

19.1 Lubricating the PTO shaft

Pos: 88.3 /BA/Wartung/Gel enkwelle schmier en/Abschmier en Gelenkwelle BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197359557776_78.docx @ 18392 @ @ 1

Fig. 393

All other grease nipples on the PTO shafts must be lubricated as shown in the illustration.

Pos: 88.4 /BA/Wartung/Gel enkwelle schmier en/Abschmier en Doppelgel enke am H auptgetriebe @ 0 \mod_1197360015073_78.docx @ 18473 @ 2 @ 1

19.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox

30h

Pos: 88.5 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 394:

All other grease nipples on the double joints must be lubricated as shown in the illustration to the side.

Note

The lateral mowing units must be moved into the transport position first when using hydraulic auger hoods.

426

Pos: 88.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchmi erpl an @ 0\mod_1197361829026_78.docx @ 18495 @ 1 @ 1

19.3 Lubrication Chart

Pos: 88.7 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Schmier plan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierpl an BM 420 Bil d @ 184\mod_1379057385217_78.docx @ 1588096 @ @ 1

Maintenance – lubrication chart

Fig. 395

Pos: 88.8 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Schmier plan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierpl an BM 420 C V T abelle @ 184\mod_1379057410830_78.docx @ 1588125 @ @ 1

Position Number Operating hours

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

5

1

2

4

4

5

1

2

2

4

2

2

4

1

2

4

=41

Note

10 25 50 100 250

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Crank for conditioner plate (CV)

Universal joint

Double joint (universal joint bracket)

Double joint (main gearbox) (CV)

Hydraulic cutting height adjustment

Horizontal universal shaft (front mowing unit)

Full floating axle

Ball joint eye track control arm / levelling system cylinder

Universal shaft (transfer gearbox / front mowing unit)

Cylinder spring compensation

Belt tensioner auger

Storage tensioning arm V-belt

Lifting cylinder lateral mowing unit

Sieve drum bearing

Bearing tension roller support

Ball joint eye top link

Pos: 89 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Total

427

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - El ektri k @ 0\mod_1197362427261_78.docx @ 18572 @ 1 @ 1

20 Maintenance

– electrical system

Pos: 90.2 /BA/Sicher heit/7. Gefahrenhi nweise alt/Gefahr - U nvorhergesehene Aktionen an der M aschine_4 @ 0\mod_1197365392761_78.docx @ 18610 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• During repair work (welding) always switch off the engine, set main battery switch (1) to pos. II (circuit interrupted) and remove the cable plug from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

Pos: 90.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBatterie @ 0\mod_1197366520558_78.docx @ 18648 @ 2 @ 1

20.1 Battery

Pos: 90.4 /BA/Sicher heit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batterieg ase sind hochexplosi v Version 1 @ 0\mod_1197366598276_78.docx @ 18667 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery gases are highly explosive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Batteries develop a highly explosive electrolytic gas. Do not allow sparks or naked flames anywhere near the battery.

• During repair work (welding work) on the electrical system or engine, always switch the engine off.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• Disconnect the cable plug (2) from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

• When jump-starting the battery, make certain that only a voltage of 12 V is connected to each battery!

Pos: 90.5 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e(n)/Batterien Big M 400 Bil d @ 41\mod_1271913925381_78.docx @ 373655 @ @ 1

Fig. 396

Pos: 90.6 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e(n)/Batterien Big M 400/500 T ext @ 0\mod_1197367396698_78.docx @ 18749 @ @ 1

The Big M is equipped with two batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each, which are connected in series (24 V) for starting.

A switching relay (2) is used to switch.

The operating voltage is only 12 V!

Note

Keep the battery clean of dust and chaff.

Pos: 90.7 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

428

Pos: 90.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batteriehauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

20.1.1 Main battery switch

Pos: 90.9 /BA/Sicher heit/6. Ü ber arbeitete War nhi nweise/Vorsicht – Stromkr eis durch den Batterie-Hauptschalter zu früh unterbrochen (2012-07-26 10:39:47) @ 86\mod_1319548789688_78.docx @ 739190 @ @ 1

Caution! - The electrical power circuit is interrupted too early by the battery master switch!

Effect: Exhaust gas after treatment system (SCR system MAN) can jam

Activate the battery master switch 2 minutes after switching off the engine at the earliest, as the

SCR system is blown off with compressed air in this time period.

Pos: 90.10 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie( n)/Batterie-H auptschalter BM 400 Bild @ 49\mod_1287041480828_78.docx @ 464450 @ @ 1

Fig. 397

Pos: 90.11 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie( n)/Batterie-H auptschalter BM 400 T ext @ 181\mod_1376922926269_78.docx @ 1552088 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel.

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine‟s power supply.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs.

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

Pos: 90.12 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Hi nweis - Batterie entl eert sich obwohl Batterie-H auptschalter aus @ 123\mod_1345098584971_78.docx @ 1128075 @ @ 1

 NOTE

The battery is discharging even though the main battery switch does not interrupt the electrical power circuit (main battery switch in position II) if the ignition is in stage 1 or 2!

• Before extended times with no usage, interrupt the electrical power circuit via main battery switch (position II).

• Disconnect the vehicle battery for winter storage (charge or recharge the vehicle battery, if necessary).

Pos: 90.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

429

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie aufladen @ 0\mod_1197368701995_78.docx @ 18795 @ 3 @ 1

20.1.2 Charging Batteries

Pos: 90.15 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batteriegase, Batteriesäure @ 0\mod_1197369332058_78.docx @ 18853 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery gases, battery acid

Pos: 90.16 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Schnellladung @ 0\mod_1197369592011_78.docx @ 18915 @ 3 @ 1

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Remove the plastic covers of the battery in order to prevent highly explosive gas from gathering.

• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

20.1.3 Quick charge

Fig. 398:

When quick charging the battery, disconnect the battery negative cable and open all battery cells to avoid damage to the electrical system.

Removing the battery:

Always disconnect the earth cable first and then the positive cable before removing the battery.

Pos: 90.17 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie( n)/Batterie rei nigen @ 0\mod_1197369802542_78.docx @ 18934 @ 3 @ 1

20.1.4 Cleaning the battery

Pos: 90.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.

• Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole terminals.

• Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole terminals.

• Keep the venting holes of the plugs open.

430

Pos: 90.19 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie prüfen @ 0\mod_1197368742605_78.docx @ 18814 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

20.1.5 Check battery

Pos: 90.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batteriesäur en @ 0\mod_1197368825761_78.docx @ 18833 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery acids

Effect: Chemical burns

• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

• If you top up the distilled water during the winter, allow the engine to run for about 30 minutes to ensure a better mixture of water and acid.

Pos: 90.21 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Säur estand prüfen @ 0\mod_1197369919339_78.docx @ 18953 @ 3 @ 1

• Use distilled water only.

20.1.6 Check acid level

Pos: 90.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 399:

Check the acid level every 250 operating hours.

• The acid level should be at the mark above the upper plate edge.

Note

Use only properly filled and maintained batteries.

Coat the battery terminals with acid protection grease (terminal grease).

431

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.23 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Messen der Säur edichte @ 0\mod_1197370272823_78.docx @ 18972 @ 3 @ 1

20.1.7 Measuring Acid Density

Pos: 90.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 400:

• Use an acid tester to measure the acid density of each battery cell.

A fully charged battery should have an acid density of 1.28 in normal climatic conditions.

• Recharge the battery, if the density drops below 1.20.

432

Pos: 90.25 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie( n)/Batterien ei nbauen und polrichtig anschließen @ 0\mod_1197370412776_78.docx @ 19054 @ 2 @ 1

20.2

Maintenance

Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly

– electrical system

Caution! - Installation of Batteries

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Always connect batteries with the correct polarity

Pos: 90.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 401:

To do this:

• Connect the positive cable from the starter (3) to the positive pole of the battery (1).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery (1) with the positive pole (30a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the negative cable of the battery (1) with the negative pole (31a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the negative cable from the starter (3) to the negative pole of the battery (2).

• Connect the negative cable of the battery (2) with the negative pole (31) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery (2) with the positive pole (30) of the battery changeover relay (4).

433

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.27 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/DDr ehstromg enerator @ 0\mod_1197370865698_78.docx @ 19073 @ 2 @ 1

20.3 Three-phase generator

Pos: 90.28 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anl age @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.docx @ 19111 @ @ 1

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

Pos: 90.29 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Drehstromg enerator Big M 420 Bild @ 86\mod_1320155361999_78.docx @ 741871 @ @ 1

Fig.

Pos: 90.30 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Drehstromg enerator T ext @ 0\mod_1197371243636_78.docx @ 19130 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to the manufacturer‟s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter "Fitting and Dismantling V-Ribs")

Have the three-phase generator checked once a year at a specialist workshop.

Pos: 90.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

434

Pos: 90.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/SStarter @ 0\mod_1197370892620_78.docx @ 19092 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

20.4 Starter

Pos: 90.33 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überar beitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anl age @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.docx @ 19111 @ @ 1

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Pos: 90.34 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Anlasser: Bild Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320156232769_78.docx @ 741929 @ @ 1

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

Pos: 90.35 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Anlasser: Text @ 0\mod_1197371466761_78.docx @ 19149 @ @ 1

Fig. 402

Note

If the electrical power circuit is interrupted by the main battery switch, 12 V is still present on the starter.

If the starter fails or does not work properly, investigate the cause of the problem. If the suggestions listed below do not remove the damage, please seek the advice of your KRONE dealer. Have the starter checked thoroughly once a year at a specialist workshop.

Loose, soiled or corroded cable connections:

• Clean the cable connections on the starter and tighten the connections.

• Clean the earth cable on the engine and tighten the connection to the engine.

Battery performance too low:

• Check the electrolyte as well as acid density, and recharge the battery, if and when necessary.

Discharged battery:

• Charge the battery.

Use of a wrong engine oil viscosity:

• Always use the right engine oil according to the specification.

Starter safety relay is defective:

• Replace the relay.

Pos: 90.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

435

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.37 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Steuer einhei ten und Sicher ung en Big M 420/500 @ 348\mod_1435837592545_78.docx @ 2621086 @ 2 @ 1

20.5 Control Units and Fuses

Pos: 90.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 403

Note

Have work on electronic system carried out by KRONE customer service or KRONE dealer only!

The control units listed below are located behind the cover (1) of the driver's cabin operation console.

1. CUC Control Unit Console

2. ECU Engine Control Unit

3. SmartDrive (traction drive)

4. KMC1 KRONE Machine Controller

5. DIOM output module

6. Potential distributor circuit board

7. Video box

8. Rotary potentiometer

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the control units listed above are located on the console circuit board. The console circuit board is located behind the cover (A) of the driver's cabin operation console. For overview of console circuit board, refer to chapter “Circuit Board

Console”

436

Pos: 90.39 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/EDC Electronic-Diesel-Contr ol M 420 @ 87\mod_1320321684421_78.docx @ 744942 @ 3 @ 1

20.5.1 Electronic-Diesel-Control (EDC)

Maintenance – electrical system

Fig. 404

The Electronic-Diesel-Control EDC (1) is located in direction of travel right on the engine. For more information, please refer to the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer.

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the Electronic-Diesel-Control EDC (1) are located on the console circuit board.

The console circuit board is located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver‟s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the Chapter entitled "Console Circuit

Board"

Pos: 90.40 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Kabi nen-R elaisplati ne BM 400 @ 350\mod_1436435880211_78.docx @ 2626540 @ 3 @ 1

20.5.2 Cabin Relay Circuit Board

1

2

Pos: 90.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX500088_1

Fig. 405

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the cabin are located on the cabin relay circuit board

(2). The cabin relay circuit board (2) is located behind the cover (1) in the cab ceiling. For circuit board overview, refer to chapter “Cabin Circuit Board”.

437

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.42 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sicher ung en/20 082 191 0 Pl atine Konsol e Sicherungen BM 420 MAN @ 116\mod_1340277254372_78.docx @ 1015724 @ 3 @ 1

20.5.3 Console Circuit Board

438

Fig. 406

Pos: 90.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

22F81

22F82

22F83

22F84

22F85

22F86

22F87

22F88

22F89

22F90

22F91

22F92

22F93

22F66

22F67

22F68

22F69

22F70

22F71

22F72

22F72.1

22F73

22F74

22F75

22F76

22F77

22F78

22F79

22F80

22F50

22F51

22F52

22F53

22F54

22F55

22F56

22F57

22F58

22F59

22F60

22F61

22F62

22F63

22F64

22F65

Fuse

22F37

22F38

22F39

22F40

22F41

22F42

22F43

22F44

22F45

22F46

22F46.1

22F47

22F47.1

22F48

22F48.1

Maintenance – electrical system

Value Designation

10A DIN socket

10A Diagnostics socket

20A ISOBUS release electronics

10A Filling level cooling water

15A Axle suspension valve

15A Reserve

15A Reserve

5A Reserve

7.5A Ignition stage 1 teleservice

5A

5A

Terminal (slow release)

Continuous voltage voltage converter

7.5A Ignition stage 1 CUC

7.5A Continuous voltage teleservice

5A Ignition stage 2 diagnostics socket

7.5A Ignition stage 2 CUC

3A Reserve

10A Reserve

10A Reserve

10A CAN diagnostics socket

7.5A Video system

10A Reserve

5A

5A

5A

3A

Reserve

Joystick ignition stage 1

Reserve

DIOM electronics

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

5A KMC 1 electronics

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics

20A Ignition stage 2 electronics

5A Continuous voltage joystick

10A Voltage FmX display

10A Continuous voltage CAN diagnostics socket

10A Continuous voltage MFR

10A Reserve

10A Ignition stage 2 MRF/EDC/SCR

20A Ignition stage 1 output

20A ½ absorption volume valve, axle separation

5A Parking brake valve

15A DIOM voltage

15A Voltage ISOBUS socket

15A Reserve

15A Autopilot voltage

15A SmartDrive voltage

15A Reserve

15A Reserve

15A Reserve

15A Reserve

10A Cigarette lighter 2

10A Cigarette lighter 1

15A Voltage V4 KMC 1

15A Voltage V3 KMC 1

15A Voltage V2 KMC 1

15A Voltage V1 KMC 1

10A Starting engine

7.5A Central lubrication

30A Reserve

30A Reserve

7.5A Continuous voltage ignition lock

20A Control signal starting engine

439

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.44 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sicher ung en/20 082 195 0 Pl atine Kabi ne Sicherung BM 420 @ 116\mod_1340278497897_78.docx @ 1015863 @ 3 @ 1

20.5.4 Cab Circuit Board

440

Fig. 407

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

F22

F23

F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

F30

F31

F32

F33

F34

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F10

F11

F12

F13

F6

F7

F8

F9

Fuse Valu e

F1

Designation

20A Allround light

F2

F3

F4

F5

10A Reserve

15A Seat compressor

15A Side windscreen washers

15A Front windscreen washers, water pump

15A Travel direction indicator

5A

5A

5A

5A

Horn, headlamp flasher

Mirror adjustment

30A PWM module fan

15A Cooling box

5A Control unit for climate control

GPS antenna, reserve

Air conditioning compressor

15A Radio/CB ignition stage 1

7.5A Radio/CB continuous voltage

15A Hazard warning lights

15A Comfort seat, climate control

Fuse test for all connector locks used on the circuit board

5A Interior lighting, spotlight

10A Dipped beam right

10A Dipped beam left

10A Full beam left

10A Full beam right

30A Working floodlight cabin roof inside

30A Working floodlight cabin roof centre outside

30A Rear working floodlight

30A Working floodlight platform side

15A Working floodlight platform front

10A Reversing horn, reversing lights

10A Brake light

10A Rear light, licence plate lamp left

10A Rear light, licence plate lamp right

10A Locator lighting

7.5A Control voltage, full beam

441

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.46 /BA/War tung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sicher ung en/Pl atine Krone-Maschinen-Contoller ( KMC1) BM 420 @ 349\mod_1436254950012_78.docx @ 2623762 @ 3 @ 1

20.5.5 Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller (KMC1)

Pos: 91 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 408

442

Pos: 92.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Zentr alschmi erung @ 0\mod_1197378235308_78.docx @ 19471 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

21 Maintenance

– Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.2 /BA/Wartung/Z entralschmier anl age/BEKA-MAX/BEKA M AX @ 51\mod_1288863746156_78.docx @ 497745 @ @ 1

BEKA MAX

Pos: 92.3 /BA/Wartung/Z entralschmier anl age/BEKA-MAX/Betri eb der M aschine mit nicht zul ässigen oder verunrei nigten Schmi erstoffen @ 51\mod_1288876736250_78.docx @ 497991 @ @ 1

Pos: 92.4 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

The machine must not be operated with non-permitted or uncleaned lubricants.

Machine damage.

Check the surrounding area to ensure it is clean.

• Use suitable and clean tools.

• Use permitted lubricants.

• Lubricants must be free of impurities.

443

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/UÜbersicht @ 53\mod_1289900374656_78.docx @ 506510 @ 2 @ 1

21.1 Overview

Pos: 92.6 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 92.7 /BA/Wartung/Z entralschmier anl age/BEKA-MAX/Verteiler blöcke H auptverteiler und Antri ebe Ü bersichts BIG M 420 C V Bil d @ 292\mod_1411102988151_78.docx @ 2303455 @ @ 1

1

2

Fig. 409

Pos: 92.8 /BA/Wartung/Z entralschmier anl age/BEKA-MAX/Verteiler blöcke H auptverteiler und Antri ebe Schmi erpl an BIG M 420 C V T ext @ 349\mod_1436267038151_78.docx @ 2624285 @ @ 1

444

6

7

5 3 4

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.9 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 410

BM 420 0173_1

445

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.10 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 92.11 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Verteil erbl öcke H auptverteiler und Antriebe Übersicht BIG M 420 CR I Bild @ 292\mod_1411103029896_78.docx @ 2303486 @ @ 1

1

2

6

7

5 3 4

8

Fig. 411

Pos: 92.12 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Verteil erbl öcke H auptverteiler und Antriebe Schmi erplan BIG M 420 CRI T ext @ 349\mod_1436267301060_78.docx @ 2624317 @ @ 1

446

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 412

447

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.14 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Schmierstoffbefüllung @ 51\mod_1288863995000_78.docx @ 497771 @ 2 @ 1

21.2 Lubricant filling

USA

1

2

Fig.413

Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple

Pos: 92.15 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Abfüll kuppl ung @ 51\mod_1288867617671_78.docx @ 497827 @ 2 @ 1

The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially available grease gun.

1. Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple

2. Additional mounting connection

21.3 Fill coupling

3

1

2

4

Pos: 92.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX110008

Fig.414

• Remove the lubrication nipple (3) and replace by filler neck 995-000-705 (4)

• The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to the filling pump (1).

448

Pos: 92.17 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Befüllzylinder @ 51\mod_1288868166031_78.docx @ 497854 @ @ 1

Filling cylinder

M20x1,5

3

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

2

1

Pos: 92.18 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Schmierstoff @ 186\mod_1380004894079_78.docx @ 1606288 @ 2 @ 1

BX110009

Fig. 415

• Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace by filler socket 940 392 0 (2)

• For filling remove the protective cap on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0 (1)

21.4 Lubricant

To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommend using the adjacent greases that we have tested (greases with sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or off-road area because they are soluble in water.)

Note

To ensure the system works properly, be careful no impurities enter the system when refilling lubricant. Dirt will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication system and will damage or destroy parts at friction points.

Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.

Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or grease should be used as lubricants

. Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).

They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since this can result in blockages during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can be distributed and pumped with progressive pumps.

Pos: 92.19 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/Vog el/Ver wenden von falschen Schmierstoffen @ 11 \mod_1222685784023_78.docx @ 142396 @ @ 1

Pos: 92.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Warning - Use of incorrect lubricants

Effect: Bearing damage to the machine

Use only the lubricants listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid grease.

449

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.21 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Füllstandskontr olle @ 86\mod_1320160327245_78.docx @ 742075 @ 2 @ 1

21.5 Checking the fill level

USA

1 min

Pos: 92.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.416

Visual

The transparent lubricant tank (1) permits a visual inspection of the fill.

2

450

Pos: 92.23 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Zeiten des Schmi erinter valls änder n @ 86\mod_1320160656490_78.docx @ 742103 @ 2 @ 1

21.6

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval

The lubrication intervals of the system have been pre-adjusted ex works.

Default setting upon delivery:

Cycle time: 1h

Lubrication period: 8 min

Change setting:

9

7

8

Fig. 417

• Use a flat screw driver to remove the red frame (7) on the protective motor housing of the pump

• Unscrew the four cross-head screws and lift off the transparent protective cover

• Use a flat screwdriver to set the cycle time (8) / lubrication duration (9)

• Reposition the transparent protective cover and secure it with the four cross-head screws

• Securely attach the red frame (7) again

CAUTION!

If the cover is not properly closed, water can penetrate the system, which then may be destroyed. In this case, the warranty will be void.

Pos: 92.24 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Fehlersuche und Beseitigung @ 51\mod_1288879023093_78.docx @ 498017 @ 2 @ 1

21.7 Troubleshooting

Pos: 92.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbr uch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point.

• Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean the main distributor or replace it.

• Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

• Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean the blocked subdistributor and replace it if required.

• Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

451

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92.26 /BA/War tung/Zentr alschmieranl age/BEKA-M AX/Signalanzeigen @ 51\mod_1288879531062_78.docx @ 498044 @ @ 1

Signal displays

6

5

4

Fig.418

Note

The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence.

Pos: 93 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The function of the pump is displayed via two control LEDs (green (4)/red (5)) in the viewing window (6) on the protective motor housing of the pump. The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence.

LED red green red green red green on off on off on off on off on off

1 sec

1 sec.

Signal display

Ready for operation: 1.5 sec

During the entire lubrication process

Description

Display of functional readiness

Program run of a lubrication process

Cycle error on the progressive distributor red green red green red green on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

Until the lubricant reservoir is re-filled

1 sec

1 sec.

0.5 sec

0.5 sec.

Error grease level

Grease level too low

Error pump motor speed

Error CPU / memory

452

Pos: 94.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Ei nlag erung @ 0\mod_1197385459120_78.docx @ 19966 @ 1 @ 1

Placing in Storage

22

Pos: 94.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAm Ende der Erntesaison @ 0\mod_1197385501276_78.docx @ 19985 @ 2 @ 1

Placing in Storage

22.1

Pos: 94.3 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/Einl ager ung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197385531370_78.docx @ 20004 @ @ 1

At the End of the Harvest Season

Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to preserve the machine.

• Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercial fertilisers are stored.

• Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.

• Clean the machine thoroughly through the maintenance openings inside and out. Chaff and dirt attract moisture, which causes steel parts to begin rusting.

Note

If a high pressure washing device is used for cleaning, do not point the water jet at the bearing or electrical system/electronic components.

• Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of setting screws and similar items; relieve springs.

• Transport interlock ratchet mechanism for side mowers: grease the bolt.

• Lubricate the plunger rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as possible.

• Moisten with oil all lever joints, cutter bars, and bearing points that cannot be lubricated.

Write down all repair jobs that must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance service and any required repairs outside of harvest season.

Pos: 94.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotor ber eich @ 0\mod_1197385875776_78.docx @ 20043 @ 1 @ 1

22.2

Pos: 94.5 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/Hi nweis auf Motor herstell er @ 0\mod_1197385918276_78.docx @ 20062 @ @ 1

Engine area

Pos: 94.6 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer‟s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on cleaning and preservation)

453

Placing in Storage

Pos: 94.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVor Beginn der neuen Saison @ 0\mod_1197386024448_78.docx @ 20081 @ 2 @ 1

22.3 Before the Start of the New Season

Pos: 94.8 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/T ext vor Beginn der Saison Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197386062214_78.docx @ 20100 @ @ 1

Before the start of the new harvest season, conduct a thorough inspection of the machine.

Keeping the machine in flawless condition will rule out the possibility of costly malfunctions during harvest time.

If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleaned inside and out.

• Refit any belts and V-belts that were removed and check belt tensions.

• Remove the covers from the engine openings.

• Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.

• Check to make certain all bolts are tightened and all cotter pins are in place.

• Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosion agent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protect the system against corrosion.

• Check the batteries. Check the charge state and height of the battery acid. If necessary, charge the batteries.

• Check the tyre pressures.

• Retighten the four attachment bolts on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm

(annually).

• After these tasks are complete, let the machine run about one hour at half speed. Then check all bearings for overheating.

Pos: 94.9 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

454

Pos: 94.10 /BA/Ei nlag erung/Rei bkupplung/R eibkuppl ung BYPY entl üften @ 0\mod_1197387210183_78.docx @ 20228 @ 23 @ 1

22.4 Friction clutch –ByPy

Placing in Storage

22.4.1

Fig. 419:

Completely loosen the four hexagonal socket head screws (2). These screws are not entirely threaded. Therefore they cannot be screwed out of the coupling.

The coupling is now ready for use.

Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft

Pos: 95 /Layout M odul e /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 420

Tighten the hexagonal socket head screws (2) on the friction clutch at the beginning of the storage period. This will relieve the disc springs' pressure on the friction lining and prevent the tendency to adhere. The flange coupling is vented.

To place the machine in service again, follow the instructions in chapter "Friction Clutch".

455

Disposal of the machine

Pos: 96 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Entsorgung der M aschine @ 274\mod_1404207309028_78.docx @ 2060455 @ 1 @ 1

23

Pos: 97 /BA/Entsorgung der Maschi ne/Die M aschine entsorgen @ 274\mod_1404207434449_78.docx @ 2060544 @ 2 @ 1

Disposal of the machine

23.1

Pos: 98 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Anhang @ 1\mod_1202278612285_78.docx @ 58360 @ 1 @ 1

Disposal of the machine

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The applicable country-specific, current waste disposal guidelines and the legal laws must be observed.

Metal parts

All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

The components must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

Electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

24

Pos: 99 /Ü berschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/FF ehl er mel dungen @ 13\mod_1226558727524_78.docx @ 166264 @ 2 @ 1

Appendix

24.1

=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Error Messages

456

25 Index

A

Abrasion Limit ................................................... 381

Activating fast reversing.................................... 286

Actuating release switches ................................. 70

Adjust all mowing units to 0°. ............................ 138

Adjustable Fan Nozzles ...................................... 91

Adjusting Skids ................................................. 295

Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............... 295

Adjusting the conditioner plate ......................... 300

Adjusting the cutting height ...................... 291, 293

Adjusting the Lifting Height ............................... 292

Adjusting the mowing units ............................... 290

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra) 301

Adjusting the Sensors ....................................... 410

Adjusting the swath width ................................. 304

Adjusting the Tedder Speed ............................. 298

After Shearing Off ............................................. 387

Air comfort seat ................................................... 44

Air Conditioning System ..................................... 38

Air filter .............................................................. 351

Air intake and distribution ................................. 401

Aligning the Cutter Bar ...................................... 372

Allround lights (optional) ..................................... 62

Angular gearbox ....................................... 367, 370

Appendix ........................................................... 456

At the End of the Harvest Season .................... 453

Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ...................... 326

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .................... 332

Autopilot .............................................................. 19

Autopilot release switch / - optional .................... 72

Axle separation key ............................................ 75

B

Basic screen field mode...................................... 95

Basic screen road travel ..................................... 95

Battery......................................................... 21, 428

Before the Start of the New Season ................. 454

BEKA - MAX central lubrication ........................ 443

Beka Max .......................................................... 443

Belt drives ......................................................... 416

Blade Changing on Cutting Discs ..................... 382

Blade Quick-Fit Device ............................. 378, 384

Blade screw connection .................................... 378

Blade Screw Connection .................................. 383

Brake light ........................................................... 57

Brakes ............................................................... 389

Bringing up a Menu Level ................................. 116

Index

C

Cab Circuit Board ............................................. 440

Cabin .................................................................. 41

Cabin Relay Circuit Board ............................... 437

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System .............. 140

Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor ................... 141

Calibrating Steering Automatically ................... 142

Calibrating Steering Manually .......................... 146

Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2 ........ 40

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval .. 451

Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ............. 402

Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................... 105

Changing the Tyre Size ................................... 423

Charge Indicator Lamp ...................................... 76

Charging Batteries ........................................... 430

Check battery ................................................... 431

Check before Start-up ...................................... 246

Checking / Tensioning / Replacing Belt on

Conditioner Drive ......................................... 422

Checking and maintaining tyres ....................... 424

Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling

Quantity ........................................................ 414

Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder 377

Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller (KMC1)

..................................................................... 442

Circulation filter ................................................ 403

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the preseparator ...................................................... 405

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with

Compressed Air ........................................... 338

Cleaning the Radiator ...................................... 415

Cleaning the Radiator Compartment ............... 415

Cleaning the Sieve Drum ................................. 415

Cleaning the Tedder Housing .......................... 361

Collector/drier ................................................... 413

Commissioning ................................................ 241

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 353

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 353

Console Circuit Board ...................................... 438

Consumables ..................................................... 39

Contact ............................................................... 26

Contamination in the engine compartment ...... 338

Control Units and Fuses .................................. 436

Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an

Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ....................... 311

Cooler ................................................................ 48

Cooling system .................................................. 21

457

Cooling Water Temperature Warning Light ........ 76

Cross Conveyor Drive ....................................... 421

Cruise Control ................................................... 260

Cutter Blades .................................................... 377

D

Daily checks ...................................................... 246

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the

Safety Instructions .......................................... 16

Deactivating the axle suspension ..................... 289

Deflector Plates ................................................ 310

Deleting Area .................................................... 107

Description of Installation.................................. 243

Deviating Torque .............................................. 359

Diagnostics ....................................................... 154

Diagnostics ISOBUS Steering System ............. 191

Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) ............................ 78

Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ............... 79

Diesel engine error storage .............................. 230

Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

...................................................................... 252

Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics.. 157

Disposal of the machine

................................ 456

Drain valve ........................................................ 354

Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ...... 47

Drive of mowing unit ......................................... 420

Driving and Transport ....................................... 248

Driving Forwards ............................................... 258

E

Electronic-Diesel-Control (EDC) ....................... 437

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor. 362

Emergency exit ................................................... 21

Emergency Exit ................................................... 49

Emergency steering forces ............................... 257

Emptying the Water Separator ......................... 340

Engine area ...................................................... 453

Engine coolant .................................................. 350

Engine Coolant ................................................. 349

Engine oil and filter replacement ...................... 339

Engine oil level .................................................. 339

Engine Overview ............................................... 334

Entering parameters ......................................... 119

Error Message 1414 ......................................... 251

Error Message 1415 ......................................... 251

Error Messages ........................................ 239, 456

F

Fan wheel drive ................................................ 417

Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) .......... 286

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for

Gearboxes .................................................... 364

458

Fire preventions ................................................. 22

Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ....................................................... 433

Fitting the guard cloths..................................... 241

Flashing Light Switch ......................................... 52

Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit to

Headland Position ........................................ 270

Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ................ 241

Folding down Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously ............................................. 270

Folding Down the Mowing Units ...................... 269

Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to Transport Position .................................... 282

Folding Up the Guards ..................................... 249

Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously to Transport Position .......... 282

Folding up the Mowing Units ........................... 281

Friction clutch ................................................... 455

Front mowing unit ..... 34, 291, 296, 304, 310, 322,

361, 372

Fuel .................................................................. 345

Fuel filter/water separator ................................ 340

Full Beam ........................................................... 53

G

Game animal protection ................................... 284

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ........................... 371

Guide's seat ....................................................... 48

H

Hand pump ...................................................... 342

Headlamp Flasher .............................................. 53

High-pressure filter ........................................... 399

Horn ................................................................... 52

Hydraulic system .............................................. 389

I

Identification Plate .............................................. 26

Ignition lock ........................................................ 77

Implements ........................................................ 20

Indications in the Document .............................. 14

Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

....................................................................... 57

Info centre EasyTouch ....................................... 93

Information message ....................................... 240

Information on Direction ..................................... 14

Information Required for Questions and Orders 26

Information Section ............................................ 95

Information Section Drive Information (VI)......... 99

Information section of settings (IV and V) .......... 99

Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

....................................................................... 98

Input gearbox ................................................... 368

Inside mirror ........................................................ 67

Installation of Cutter Blades .............................. 245

Intended use ............................................... 15, 267

Interior lighting .................................................... 63

Interior Room Lighting ........................................ 64

ISOBUS Steering System Diagnostics ............. 191

K

Killing the engine .............................................. 256

-Klimatronik / heating .......................................... 83

L

Ladder to driver's cabin ...................................... 41

Lateral Mowing Unit ......... 297, 298, 305, 365, 375

Left Outside Mirror .............................................. 65

Lifting All Mowing Units to Headland Position .. 280

Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Headland Position ......................................... 279

Lifting Front Mowing Unit into Headland Position

...................................................................... 278

Lifting the Mowing Units.................................... 278

Lighting ............................................................... 56

Lowering all Mowing Units to Working Position 272

Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Working Position ........................................... 271

Lowering Front Mowing Unit to Working Position

...................................................................... 271

Lowering Mowing Units..................................... 271

Lubricant ........................................................... 449

Lubricant filling .................................................. 448

Lubricants ........................................................... 39

Lubricating the PTO shaft ................................. 426

Lubrication Chart .............................................. 427

M

Machine Data Counter ...................................... 135

Machine overview ............................................... 25

Main battery switch ..................................... 24, 429

Main block ......................................................... 393

Main gearbox .................................................... 365

Main menu 1 Settings ....................................... 117

Main Menu 2 Counters ..................................... 135

Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................... 137

Main Menu 4 Service ........................................ 153

Maintenance ....................................................... 23

Maintenance – Basic Machine .......................... 389

Maintenance – Central Lubrication ................... 443

Maintenance – compressed air system ............ 353

Maintenance – electrical system ...................... 428

Maintenance - Engine ....................................... 334

Maintenance – lubrication chart ........................ 426

Maintenance – Mowing Units ........................... 355

Maintenance Table – Engine ........................... 336

Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ................. 357

Manometric Switch ........................................... 412

Manual Mode ................................................... 148

Measuring Acid Density ................................... 432

Menu 1-1 Parameters ...................................... 118

Menu 1-2 Machine Setting ............................... 120

Menu 1-3 Units ................................................. 125

Menu 1-4 Language ......................................... 126

Menu 1-5 Display ............................................. 127

Menu 1-5-1 Contrast ........................................ 128

Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .......................................... 129

Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ..................... 131

Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ..................... 132

Menu 1-6 Date/time ......................................... 133

Menu 1-9 Owner's address .............................. 134

Menu 3-5 Manual Mode ................................... 148

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ...................................... 154

Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .... 158

Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ....................... 194

Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus ..................................... 205

Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ............................ 206

Menu 4-1-13 Electronics .................................. 217

Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine ............................. 218

Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ....................................... 221

Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console .................. 223

Menu 4-1-17 Display ........................................ 226

Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

..................................................................... 161

Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ........ 167

Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood

..................................................................... 175

Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics ..................... 181

Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps ........ 186

Menu 4-2 Error list ........................................... 227

Menu 4-3 Service level .................................... 232

Menu 4-4 Information ....................................... 233

Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ......................................... 234

Menu 4-4-2 Software ....................................... 235

Menu 4-4-3 Machine ........................................ 237

Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages.......... 238

Menu 5 Basic Screen ....................................... 238

Menu Level ...................................................... 112

Menu Level Short Overview ............................. 112

Motor Data (II) Information Section .................... 97

Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor ............. 315

Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG

M CV ............................................................ 306

Moving the Front Mowing Unit to Central Position.

..................................................................... 250

459

Moving the guards into the working position .... 285

Mowing.............................................................. 283

Mowing Unit Drive ............................................. 273

Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ............... 285

Multi-Function Lever ........................................... 80

Multi-Function Lever Driving ............................... 82

N

Namur sensor ................................................... 410

O

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals

(Gearboxes) .................................................. 364

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

.............................................................. 372, 375

Opening the cabin door ...................................... 42

Opening the Front Guard .................................. 360

Operation – Mowing Units ................................ 267

Operation of Mowing Units ............................... 268

Operators controls .............................................. 43

Outrigger arms .................................................. 418

Outside mirrors ................................................... 65

Over-Pressure Valves ....................................... 394

P

Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ........................ 70

Parking Brake ................................................... 264

Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade

Drums ........................................................... 380

Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ......... 379

Permissible Fuels

........................................... 345

Personnel Qualification and Training .................. 16

Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure .......................... 76

Placing in Storage ............................................. 453

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the

Machine .......................................................... 28

Position of the Sensors ............................. 406, 408

Precondition for mowing ................................... 284

Pumps ............................................................... 392

Q

Quick Access Customer Data Counter ............. 104

Quick access Hydraulic axle suspension ......... 109

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable cutting height (optional) ............................................ 100

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure)

(optional) ....................................................... 102

Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........... 100

Quick access Machine settings ........................ 111

Quick charge ..................................................... 430

Quick Stop ........................................................ 286

460

R

Radio .................................................................. 92

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ................ 15, 267

Refrigerant ....................................................... 412

Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ........... 38

Reheat Mode ..................................................... 87

Release switch - holding brake .......................... 73

Release switch – road/field ........................ 71, 252

Release switch travelling gear ................... 74, 253

Releasing the holding brake manually ............. 266

Remove the Weiste Triangle ........................... 325

Removing Mowing Units .................................. 322

Removing of the compensation springs........... 323

Removing the Ground Flaps ............................ 288

Removing the Side Mowing Unit ...................... 327

Re-Ordering this Document ............................... 14

Repairing the sheared off bearing unit ............. 388

Replace Air Dryer ............................................. 354

Replacing the fuel filter insert .......................... 341

Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter ........................... 340

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ....................... 398

Replacing the linings ........................................ 385

Replacing Urea Filter Inserts ........................... 343

Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the

Outrigger ...................................................... 425

Reversing ......................................................... 259

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ..... 66

S

Safety ........................................................... 15, 27

Safety cartridge ................................................ 352

Safety-conscious work practices ....................... 16

Selecting Area .................................................. 107

Self-propelled working machine ......................... 18

Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor

(Optional) ..................................................... 303

Setting the Acceleration Behaviour .................. 257

Setting the anti-collision mirror .......................... 66

Setting the right outside mirror ........................... 66

Setting the Steering Radius ............................. 147

Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted

Mowers ........................................................ 310

Setting the Warning Panels ............................. 245

Shear pins ........................................................ 363

Short Overview Menu Level ............................. 112

Side light/dipped beam ...................................... 58

Spare Parts ...................................................... 356

Special Equipment – Mowing Units ................. 311

Speed gearbox ................................................. 369

Spotlight ....................................................... 63, 64

Starter ............................................................... 435

Starting the engine ............................................ 254

Starting to Drive ................................................ 256

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ...................... 256

Start-up ............................................................. 246

Status line (I) ....................................................... 96

Steering Column Adjustment .............................. 51

Steering Column and Foot Pedals ...................... 50

Stopping ............................................................ 262

Stopping with Foot Brakes ................................ 263

Sun blind ............................................................. 67

Switch Group Roof Panel ................................... 55

Switch off the machine ...................................... 265

Switch panel ....................................................... 69

Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives .................... 274

Switching Off the Engine .................................. 265

Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit

Drives ............................................................ 277

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

.............................................................. 274, 275

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Front.............................................................. 276

Switching On Mowing Unit Drives .................... 274

Switching on the dipped beam ........................... 58

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ............ 57

Switching on the indicator ................................... 57

Switching on the parking light ............................. 58

Switching On/Off Axle Separation .................... 287

Switching the counter on or off ......................... 106

System Description Operating and Brake

Hydraulics ..................................................... 392

T

Tanks ................................................................ 346

Tanks of urea solution ...................................... 347

Technical data .................................................... 36

Technical Data Air Conditioning System ............ 38

Technical Data of the Machine .......................... 36

Telephone and radio sets .................................. 23

Tensioning belts ............................................... 354

Tensioning the V-belt ....................................... 316

Test run ............................................................ 356

Three-phase generator .................................... 434

Tightening torques ........................................... 358

Tightening torques (countersunk screws) ........ 359

Tool box ........................................................... 356

Towing ............................................................. 266

Transfer gearbox .............................................. 400

Transport / Road Travel ................................... 248

Troubleshooting ............................................... 451

Tyre Pressure .................................................. 245

Tyres .......................................................... 21, 423

U

Using the operating brake .................................. 54

V

Variants for Machine Equipment ........................ 25

Venting the fuel system.................................... 349

W

Washer system .................................................. 68

Wheel chocks ..................................................... 23

Wheel mounting ............................................... 425

Windscreen washer system ............................. 404

Windshield wipers .............................................. 68

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................... 60

Working floodlight rear ....................................... 61

Working floodlights ............................................. 59

Working floodlights ............................................. 61

Working floodlights Cab ..................................... 60

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

....................................................................... 22

461

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle

Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle

Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Fax +49 (0) 59 77/935-339

Internet: http://www.krone.de

eMail: [email protected]

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents